MOi;^ 'M \n^' i:i-\:} ;|<;0. i'j?ii ^iit i ■ , ; ' ' r iiM.5 Q Division BL 1010 .S3 v.ll Tipi taka. Buddhist suttas THE y4^ N f-%^ o A. 1935 ■ O 7 ' ; a ''sacred books of the east TRANSLATED BY VARIOUS ORIENTAL SCHOLARS AND EDITED BY F. MAX %ULLER VOL. XI AT THE CLARENDON PRESS 1881 \^All rights reserved 1 BUDDHIST SUTTAS TRANSLATED FROM PALI BY T. W. RHYS DAVIDS \. THE mahA-parinibbAna suttanta 2. THE DHAMMA-TTAKKA-PPAVATTANA SUTTA 3. THE TYMIGGK SUTTANTA 4. THE AKANKHEYYA SUTTA 5. THE A'ETOKHILA SUTTA 6. THE MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTANTA 7. THE SABBASAVA SUTTA AT THE CLARENDON PRESS i88i \All rights reserved} i ■s^^ THJSOLOGIOAT. / CONTENTS. General Introduction to the Buddhist Suttas 1. The Book of the Great Decease (Maha-parinibbana Suttanta) .... Introduction .... Translation .... 2. The Foundation of the Kingdom of Righteousness (Dhamma-ztakka-ppavattana Sutta) . Introduction . . . Translation ....... 3. On Knowledge of the Vedas (Tevigga Suttanta) Introduction ....... Translation ....... (The Silas, pp. 189-200.) 4. If he should desire (Akankheyya Sutta) . Introduction .... Translation .... 5. Barrenness and Bondage (^etokhila Sutta) Introduction .... Translation .... 6. Legend of the Great King of Glory (Maha-Sudas SANA Suttanta) Introduction .... (Maha-Sudassana Gataka, pp. 238-241.) Translation .... 7. All the Asavas (Sabbasava Sutta) Introduction .... Translation .... Index ...... FACE ix xxix xxxi I 137 139 146 1.57 159 167 205 207 210 219 221 223 235 237 247 291 293 296 309 Transliteration of Oriental Alphabets adopted for the Translations of the Sacred Books of the East . .317 •-HI GENERAL "IOT^ODUCTION TO THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. On being asked to contribute a volume of translations from the Pali Suttas to the important series of which this work forms a part, the contributor has to face the difficulty of choosing from the stores of a nearly unknown literature — a difficulty arising from the embarrassment, not of poverty, but of wealth. I have endeavoured to make such a choice as would enable me to bring together into one volume a collection of texts which should be as complete a sample as one volume could afford of what the Buddhist scriptures, on the whole, contain. With this object in view I have re- frained from confining myself to the most interesting books • — those, namely, which deal with the Noble Eightfold Path, the most essential, the most original, and the most attractive part of Gotama's teaching ; and I have chosen accordingly, besides the Sutta of the Foundation of the Kingdom of Righteousness (the Dhamma- >^akka- ppavattana- Sutta), which treats of the Noble Path, six others which treat of other sides of the Buddhist system ; less interesting perhaps in their subject matter, but of no less historical value. These are — 1. The Book of the Great Decease (the Maha- parinibbana-Suttanta), which is the Buddhist repre- sentative of what, among the Christians, is called a Gospel. 2. The Foundation of the Kingdom of Righte- ousness (the Dhamma-^^akka-ppavattana-Sutta), containing the Four Noble Truths, and the Noble Eight- fold Path which ends in Arahatship. THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. 3. The Discussion on Knowledge of the Three Vedas(theTevi^^a-Suttanta), which is a controversial dialogue on the right method of attaining to a state of union with Brahma. 4. The Sutta entitled ' If he should desire — ' (Akah- kheyya-Sutta), which shows in the course of a very beautiful argument some curious sides of early Buddhist mysticism and of curiously unjustified belief. 5. The Treatise on Barrenness and Bondage (the iifetokhila-Sutta), which treats of the Buddhist Order of Mendicants, from the moral, as distinguished from the disciplinary, point of view. 6. The Legend of the Great King of Glory (the Maha-sudassana-Suttanta), which is an example of the way in which previously existing legends were dealt with by the early Buddhists. 7. The Sutta entitled 'All the Asavas' (the Sabba- sava-Sutta), which explains the signification of a con- stantly recurring technical term, and lays down the essen- tial principles of Buddhist Agnosticism. The Discipline of the Buddhist Mendicants, the Rules of their Order — probably the most influential, as it is the oldest, in the world — will be fully described, down to its minutest details, in the translation of the Vinaya Pi/aka, which will appropriately form a subsequent part of this Series of Translations of the Sacred Books of the East. There was therefore no need to include any Sutta on this subject in the present volume : but of the rest of the matters discussed in the Buddhist Sacred Books — of Buddhist le- gend, gospel, controversial theology, and ethics — the works selected will I trust give a correct and adequate, if necessa- rily a somewhat fragmentary, idea. The age of these writings can be fixed, without much uncertainty, at about the latter end of the fourth or the beginning of the third century before the commencement of the Christian era. This is the only hypothesis which seems, at present, to account for the facts known about them. It should not however be looked upon as anything GENERAL INTRODUCTION. XI more than a good working hypothesis to be accepted until all the texts of the Buddhist Pali Suttas shall have been properly edited. For it depends only on the fact that one of the texts now translated contains several statements^ and one very significant silence, which afford ground for chronological argument. That argument amounts only to probability, not to certainty; and it might scarcely be worth while to put it forward were it not that the course of the enquiry will be found to raise several questions of very considerable interest. The significant silence to which I refer occurs in the account of the death of Gotama at the end of the Maha- parinibbana-Sutta^ ; and I cannot do better than quote Dr. Oldenberg's remarks upon it at p. xxvi of the able Introduction to his edition of the text of the Maha-vagga. ' The Tradition regarding the Councils takes up the thread of the story where the accounts of the life and work of Buddha, given in the Sutta Pi/aka, end. After the death of the Master — so it is related in the A'ulla-vagga — Su- bhadda, the last disciple converted by Buddha shortly before his death ^, proclaimed views which threatened the dissolution of the community. ' " Do not grieve, do not lament," he is said to have said to the believers. " It is well that we have been relieved of the Great Master's presence. We were oppressed by him when he said, 'This is permitted to you, this is not per- mitted.' In future we can do as we like, and not do as we do not like." 'In opposition to Subhadda, — the tradition goes on to relate, — there came forward one of the most distinguished and oldest of Buddha's disciples, the great Kassapa, who proposed that five hundred of the most eminent members of the community should assemble at Ra^agaha, the royal residence of the ruler of Magadha, in order to collect the Master's precepts in an authentic form. It has already been said above, how, during the seven months' sitting of ' Translated below, pp. 1 12-135. 2 This is a mistake. The Subhadda referred to is quite a different person from the last convert. See my note below, p. 127. Xll THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. the assembly, Kassapa as president fixed the Vinaya with the assistance of Upali, and the Dhamma with the assist- A ance of Ananda. ^This is the story as it has come down to us. What we have here before us is not history, but pure invention ; and, moreover, an invention of no very recent date. Apart from internal reasons that might be adduced to support this, we are able to prove it by comparing another text which is older than this story, and the author of which cannot yet have known it. I allude to the highly important Sutta, which gives an account of the death of Buddha, and the Pali text of which has recently been printed by Professor Childers. This Sutta gives ^ the story — in long passages word for word the same as in the ^ulla-vagga — of the irreverent conduct of Subhadda, which Kassapa opposes by briefly pointing to the true con- solation that should support the disciples in their separation from the Master. Then follows the account of the burning of Buddha's corpse, of the distribution of his relics among the various princes and cities, and of the festivals which were instituted in honour of these relics. Everything that the legend of the First Council alleges as a motive for, and as the background to, the story about Kassapa's proposal for holding the Council, is found here altogether, except that there is no allusion to the proposal itself, or to the Council. We hear of those speeches of Subhadda, which, according to the later tradition, led Kassapa to make his proposal, but we do not hear anything of the proposal itself. We hear of the great assembly that meets for the distribution of Buddha^s relics, in which — according to the later tradition — Kassapa's proposal was agreed to, but we do not hear anything of these transactions. It may be added that we hear in this same Sutta ^ of the precepts which Buddha delivered to his followers shortly before his death, concerning doubts and differences of opinion that might arise, among the members of the community, with regard to the Dhamma and the Vinaya, and with regard to * Pages 67, 68 in the edition of Childers. * Pages 39, 60, 61, ibid. GENERAL INTRODUCTION. Xlll the treatment of such cases when he should no longer be with them. If anywhere, we should certainly have ex- pected to find here some allusion to the great authentic depositions of Dhamma and Vinaya after Buddha's death, which, according to the general belief of Buddhists, esta- blished a firm standard according to which differences could be judged and have been judged through many centuries. There is not the slightest trace of any such allusion to the Council. This silence is as valuable as the most direct testimony. It shows that the author of the Maha- parinibbana-Sutta did not know anything of the First Council.' The only objection which it seems to me possible to raise against this argument is that the conclusion is worded somewhat too absolutely; and that it is rather a begging of the question to state, in the very first words referring to the Maha-parinibbana-Sutta, that it is older than the story in the A'ulla-vagga, and that its author could not have known that work. But no one will venture to dispute the accuracy of Dr. Oldenberg^s representation of the facts on which he bases his conclusion ; and the conclusion that he draws is, at least, the easiest and readiest way of explaining the very real discrepancy that he has pointed out. We shall be quite safe if we only say that we have certain facts which lend strong probability to the hypothesis that the author of the Maha-parinibbana-Sutta did not know that account of the First Council which we find in the iiTulla-vagga. We do not know for certain the time at which that part of the ^ulla-vagga, in which that account occurs, was com- posed. I think it quite possible that it was as late as the Council of Patna (B.C. 250), though Dr. Oldenberg places it somewhat earlier ^ But even if we put the conclusion of the iTulla-vagga as late as the year I have mentioned, it is still in the highest degree improbable that the Mahi- parinibbana-Sutta, supposing it to be an older work, can have been composed very much later than the fourth century B.C. — a provisional date sufificient at present for practical purposes. Maha-vagga, p. xxxviii. XIV THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. This conclusion, however, is only almost, and not quite certain. It is just possible that the author of the Book of the Great Decease omitted all mention of the First Council at Ra^agaha, not because he did not know of it, but because he considered it unnecessary to mention an event which had no bearing on the subject of his work. He was de- scribing the death of the Buddha, and not the history of the Canon or of the Order. I must confess however that I only mention this as a possibility from a desire rather to understate than to over- state my case. For, firstly, it should be remembered that the writer does not merely omit to mention an occurrence subsequent to and unconnected with the Great Decease. He does more : he gives an account of the Subhadda in- cident which is inconsistent and irreconcilable with the legend or narrative of the Ra^agaha Council as related in the i^ulla-vagga. Had that narrative, as we now have it, been received in his time among the Brethren, he would scarcely have done this. And, secondly, he does not, after all, close his book, as he might well have done, with the Great Decease itself. It will be seen from the translation below ^ that there was a point in his narrative, the exclamations of sorrow at the death of the Buddha, which would have formed, had he desired to omit all unnecessary details, a very fitting con- clusion to his narrative. The Book of the Great King of Glory, the Maha-sudassana-Sutta, closes with the very ex- clamation our author puts, at this point, into the mouth of Sakka. The Maha-parinibbana was then over, and the Maha-parinibbana-Sutta might have then been closed. But he goes on and describes in detail the cremation, the distribution of the relics, and the feasts celebrated in their honour. It is not necessary for my point to show that it was in the least degree unnatural to do so. It is sufficient to be able to point out that the author having done so, — having gone on to the arrival of Kassapa, who was after- wards (in the A'ulla-vagga) said to have held the Council ; having mentioned the very incident which, according to the * See below, Chap. VI, § 21. GENERAL INTRODUCTION. XV other narrative, gave rise to the holding of the Council ; and having referred to events which took place after the Council, — it is scarcely a tenable argument to say that he, knowing of it, did not refer, even incidentally and in half a sentence, to so important an event, simply because it did not come, necessarily, within the subject of his work. And when we find that in other works on the death of the Buddha, referred to below ^, the account of the Council of Ra^agaha has, in fact, been included in the story, it is difficult to withhold our assent to the very great probability of the hypothesis, that it would have been included also in the Pali Book of the Great Decease had the belief in the tradi- tion of the Council been commonly held at the time when that book was put into its present shape. At the same time we must hold ourselves quite prepared to learn that some other explanation may turn out to be possible. The argument, if it applied to writers of the nineteenth century, would be conclusive. But we know too little about the mode in which the Pali Pi/akas were composed to presume at present to be quite certain. The Maha-parinibbana-Sutta was then probably com- posed before the account of the First Council of Ra^a- gaha in the concluding part of the TiTulla-vagga. It was also almost certainly composed after Pa/aliputta, the modern Patna, had become the capital city of the king- dom of Magadha ; after the worship of relics had become common in the Buddhist church ; and after the rise of a general belief in the /vTakkavatti theory, in the ideal of a sacred king, a supreme overlord in India. The first of these last three arguments depends on the prophecy placed in Gotama's mouth as to the future great- ness of Pa/aliputta — a prophecy found in the Maha-vagga as well as in the Maha-parinibbana-Sutta. It is true that the guess may actually have been made, and that it re- quired no great boldness to hazard a conjecture so vaguely expressed. The words simply are — ' And among famous places of residence and haunts of ^ See p. xxxviii. XVI THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. busy men, this will become the chief, the city of Pa/aliputta, a centre for interchange of all kinds of wares. But there will happen three disasters to Pa/'aliputta, one of fire, and one of water, and one of dissension \' But it is, to say the least, improbable that the conjecture would have been recorded until after the event had proved it to be accurate : and it would scarcely be too hazardous to maintain that the tradition of the guess having been made would not have arisen at all until after the event had occurred. What was the event referred to may also be questioned, as the words quoted do not, in terms, declare that the city would become the actual capital. But we know, not only from Buddhist, but from Greek historians, that it did, and this is most probably the origin of the prophecy. Now the Malalafikaravatthu, a Pali work of modern date, but following very closely the more ancient books, has been translated, through the Burmese, by Bishop Bigandet ; and it says, ' That monarch [Susunaga], not unmindful of his mother's origin, re-established the city of Vesali, and fixed in it the royal residence. From that time Ra^agaha lost her rank of royal city, which she never afterwards recovered. He died in 8i ' [that is, of the Buddhist era reckoned from the Great Decease] ^ . . . Relying on similar authority Bishop Bigandet afterwards himself says: ' King Ka/asoka left Ra^agaha, and removed the seat of his empire to Palibothra [the Greek name for Pa/aliputta], near the place where the modern city of Patna stands^.' * See below, Chap. I, § 28. I have translated Puiabhedana/w, 'a centre for the interchange of all kinds of wares,' in accordance with the commentary, which is clearly based on a derivation from pu/a, ' a bag or bundle.' But I see that Trenckner in his Pali Miscellany renders nanapu^abhedanam by 'sur- rounded by a number of dependent towns.' At the end the text has ' from fire o r from water o r from dissension ; ' on which Buddhaghosa says that or stands here for and; and the comment is correct enough, not of course philologically, but exegetically. But in either case the last clause is of very little importance for the present argument. ^ Bigandet's ' Legend of the Burmese Budha,* third edition, vol. ii. pp. 115, 183. I have altered the spelling only of the proper names. GENERAL INTRODUCTION. XVU It would seem therefore that, according to the tradition followed by this writer, Susunaga first removed the capital to Vesali, and his successor Ka/asoka, who died, in the opinion of the writer in question, in ii8 after the Great Decease, finally fixed it at Pa/aliputta. If we therefore apply this date to the prophecy we must come to the conclusion that the Book of the Great Decease was put into its present form at least loo years after the Buddha's death, and probably a little more. But the '-'^ authority followed by Bishop Bigandet is very late ; and no mention of these occurrences is found either in the Dipavawsa or in the Mahavaw^sa, I think indeed that the whole account of these two kings, as at present accepted in Ceylon and Birma, is open to grave doubt' (in which connection it should be noticed that the oldest account of the Council of Vesali, in the y^Tulla-vagga, Book XII, makes no mention of Ka/asoka). We have next to consider the reference to the relics in the concluding sections of Chapter VI as a possible basis for chronological argument. These sections are almost certainly older than the time when especial sanctity was claimed for Buddhist dagabas on the ground that they contained par- ticular relics of the Blessed One (such as a tooth, or the bowl, or the neck bone) ; for if such special relics were accepted as objects of worship when the Book of the Great Decease was put together, they would naturally have been mentioned in the course of Chapter VI. It is even almost certain that when the sections were put into their present form no Buddhist dagaba was in exist- ence except at the eight places mentioned in them ; and the words are quite consistent with the belief that those eight had themselves then ceased to have any very wide- spread and acknowledged sanctity. So in Chapter V, § 13, where four places are spoken of ' which the believing man should visit with feelings of reverence and of awe,' there is no mention of dagabas at all ; and in Chapter V, § 16, it is ^ See my ' Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon,' p. 50. [II] b XVlll THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. clearly implied that only one dagaba, or memorial burial mound, should be erected in honour of a Tathagata, just as one memorial mound should be erected in honour of a king of kings. When we recollect that in the first and second, and perhaps in the third century before Christ, dagabas had already been erected in honour of the Buddha in distant parts of the continent of India, and had rapidly become famous as places of pilgrimage, the reasonable conclusion to be drawn from these passages is that the Book of the Great Decease is older than them all ; or, at the least, that it was written before any of them had become famous. On the other hand, there is evidently an exaggerated belief as to the respect in which the Buddha was held by his contemporaries underlying the concluding and other sections of the book. It is probable enough that Gotama was held in deep respect by the simple people among whom he lived and moved about as a religious teacher and reformer. It may well be that the inhabitants of the village where he died gave him a sort of public funeral. But that the neighbouring clans should have vied one with the other for the possession of his remains is quite inconsistent with the position that he can reasonably be supposed to have held among them. It must have taken some time for this belief to spring up, and be received without question. In a similar way a considerable interval must have elapsed before the beautiful parable in the last section of Chapter I could have given rise to the belief in the miracle (the soli- tary miracle ascribed to the Buddha, so far as I know, in the Sutta Pi/aka) recorded in the previous section. So also the comparison drawn between the Buddha and a /Takkavatti Ra^a or King of Kings in Chapter V, § 37, and Chapter VI, § ;^^, can scarcely have arisen till the rise of a lord paramount in the valley of the Ganges had fami- liarised the people with the idea of a Universal Monarch. Now it was either just before or just after the well-known Councils at Vesali, of which mention has been made above, that that important revolution took place which raised a GENERAL INTRODUCTION. XIX low-caste adventurer to be the first A'akkavatti Ra^a ^. To the people of that time A'andragupta seemed to be lord of the world, for to them India was the world — just as European writers even now talk complacently of ' the world' while ignoring three-fourths of the human race. ' Is it surprising,' as I have asked elsewhere, ' that this unity of power in one man made a deep impression upon them ? Is it surprising that, like Romans worshipping Augustus, or like Greeks adding the glow of the sun-myth to the glory of Alexander, the Indians should have formed an ideal of their TTakkavatti, and have transferred to this new ideal many of the dimly sacred and half-understood traits of the Vedic heroes ? Is it surprising that the Bud- dhists should have found it edifying to recognise in their hero '' the iTakkavatti of Righteousness ; " and that the story of the Buddha should have become tinged with the colouring of these A'akkavatti myths?' In point of fact we know that in later works the attraction of this poetic ideal led to the almost complete disregard of the simpler narrative which seemed so poor and meagre in comparison ; and M. Senart has shown how large a pro- portion of the later poem called the Lalita Vistara is inspired by it. When, in isolated passages of the Book of the Great Decease, we find the earliest germs of this fruitful train of thought, we are I think safe in concluding that it assumed its present form after the notorious career of iifandragupta had made him supreme in the valley of the Ganges. All the above arguments tend in one direction ; namely, that the final redaction of the Book of the Great Decease must be assigned to the latter part of the fourth century before Christ, or to the earlier part of the following century. And so much alike are it and all the other Suttas translated in this volume in their form, in their views of life, and in j ' I have ventured in my ' Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon,' p. 51, to point out that the Councils of Vesali were very possibly held just at the time when Nanda was defeated by A'andragupta. Taranatha, the Tibetan histo- rian, while placing the Councils, like all the later authorities, under an As ok a (probably iTandragupta), says (p. 41 of Wassilief 's Gennan translation) that the assembled brethren were fed by Nanda. b2 XX THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. i I the religious doctrines they lay down, that, though it may 1 be possible hereafter to show that some are a little older i or a little younger than the others, every one will I think admit that they must all be assigned to about the same [ period of time. There is not the least reason to believe : that either of them is older than the Book of the Great Decease; and the argument has only been confined to it because it alone deals with the kind of subject which can give foundation to chronological conclusions. When the whole of the literature of the Pali Pi/akas has been fully explored, we may perhaps be able to reach a more definite conclusion. We are In absolute ignorance as to the actual author of any of the texts I have translated. It is quite evident that they are not the work of Gotama himself ; and it is difficult to believe that even his immediate disciples could have spoken of him in the exaggerated terms in which occasionally he is here described. On the other hand, the history of similar religious movements teaches us how quickly such notions spring up concerning the omniscience and sinlessness of the founder of the movement; and it; would be better to reserve our judgment as to the impos- sibility, on this account alone, of those Suttas having been composed even by the very earliest disciples. { It would be of less importance who composed the Suttas i if we could be sure that they gave an accurate account of: the teachings of the great thinker and reformer whose words j they purport to preserve. But though, like all other writings ; of a similar character, they are doubtless based upon tra- ditions older than the time of their authors or final redactors, : they cannot unfortunately be depended upon as entirely; authentic. And it will be always difficult, even when the whole of the Suttas have been published, to attempt to discriminate between the original doctrine of Gotama, and i the later accretions to, or modifications of it. ' But we can already make some steps towards such a i discrimination, without much fear of being contradicted. '■ GENERAL INTRODUCTION. XXI There can be little doubt but that the doctrines of the Four Noble Truths and of the Noble Eightfold Path, the ' Foundation of the Kingdom of Righteousness,' were not only the teaching of Gotama himself, but were the central and most essential part of it. I am aware that no method can be more misleading, or more uncritical, than first to form a theory regarding the personal character of the author of a new religious movement — as some later critics of the Gospel History have done — and then to adopt those pas- sages in the sacred books which fit in with that character, and to reject those which oppose it. We cannot begin by postulating that Gotama was a man of high moral earnest- ness, and of great intellectual acuteness ; and then disregard all the passages in which erroneous, and even puerile, opinions or sayings are placed in his mouth. But it does not follow that we are obliged either altogether to reject the evidence of the Buddhist Scriptures as to what Gotama did actually teach, or altogether to accept it. It will be acknowledged that the Suttas have preserved for us at least the belief of the earliest Buddhists — the Buddhists in India — as to what the original doctrines, taught by the Buddha himself, had been. We have in the Vinaya Pi/aka an invaluable and indisputable record of the mental characteristics and capabilities of these earliest followers of the Buddhist faith. Sanskrit scholars are engaged in elucidating the history of the beliefs in which Gotama was brought up, and which though often modified and frequently denied, still underlie, throughout, all that he is represented to have taught. We have therefore reliable evidence of the system out of which, and we know the system into which, Gotama's teaching was developed. This being so, it will be impossible to refrain, in despair, from the attempt to solve one of the most interesting problems which the history of the Aryan race presents to us. Scholars will never be unanimously agreed on all points ; but they will agree in ascribing some parts of the early Buddhist Dharma or doctrine only to the early disciples; and after allowing for all reasonable doubts, they will agree in ascribing other parts to the great Teacher himself. I venture to think XXll THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. that not only the Four Noble Truths, but the whole of the Seven Jewels of the Law, may already be placed, with certainty, in the latter category \ The form, in which these Suttas have been preserved, deserves careful attention. Every reader will be struck at once with the constant repetitions. These repetitions are not essential, and are merely designed to facilitate the learning of the Suttas by heart. Writing was unknown in the age of the Buddha, and probably for long after his time. In all probability indeed, just as the Indians learnt from the Greeks, not the art of coinage, but the custom of issuing a legally authorised coinage - ; so it was from the Greeks that they acquired, if not their earliest alphabet, at least the knowledge of the utility of writing. But even for some time after writing was generally known, it was considered a desecration to make use of it for the preservation of the sacred books. This feeling naturally passed away much sooner among the adherents of the popular religious faith of Buddhism, than it did among their conservative opponents. With the latter it is by no means ex- tinct even now, and the first record we have of the Buddhist Scriptures being reduced into waiting is the well-known passage in the Dipava;«sa, which speaks of their being recorded in books in Ceylon towards the beginning of the first century before the commencement of our era. And as all our copies of the Buddhist Pi^^akas are, at present, derived from those then in use in Ceylon, we are practically concerned only with those thus referred to in the Dipa- vawsa ^. The date of the Dipavawzsa may be placed approxi- mately in the fourth century of our era ; but its author reproduces the continued tradition of the monasteries in * They will be found enumerated, and shortly described, in a note below (pp. 62, 63"). I am glad to learn that my friend Dr. Morris is preparing a full account of them, drawn from various parts of the Sutta Pi^aka, for his forth- coming work to be accordingly entitled ' The Seven Jewels of the Law.' ^ See my ' Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon ' (Part VI of Numismata Orientalia), p. 13. ^ Dipavawsa XX, vv. 20, 21, quoted in the Mahavawjsa, p. 207. GENERAL INTRODUCTION. XXIU which he dwelt, and he is more probably correct, than not, in the assertion I have quoted. It would follow that the Buddhist Scriptures were, till then, handed down by word of mouth only ; and no one who is acquainted with the wonderful powers of memory possessed by Indian priests, who can devote their whole lives to the task of acquiring and repeating their sacred books by heart, will doubt for a moment the possibility of this having been the case. Two methods were adopted in India to aid this power of memory. One, adopted chiefly by the grammarians, was to clothe the rules to be remembered in very short enigmatical phrases (called sutras or threads), which taxed the memory but little, while they required elaborate com- mentaries to render them intelligible. The other, the method adopted in the Buddhist writings (both Sutta and Vinaya), was, firstly, the use of stock phrases, of which the commencement once given, the remainder followed as a matter of course; and secondly, the habit of repeating whole sentences, or even paragraphs, which in our modern books would be understood or inferred, instead of being expressed. The stock phrases, which must be distinguished from the repetitions, belong certainly to a very early period of Buddhism, and many of them recur in Sanskrit as well as in Pali texts ^ One result of these numerous repetitions of phrases and paragraphs is that the preservation of the text, when once established, was rendered very easy ; and that mistakes in the MSS. can now be easily rectified when they occur in such repeated passages. To edit the text of such portions of a Pali Sutta is therefore a comparatively easy task ; and it may be said of all the Suttas here translated, that they have thus acquired a valuable protection against that danger of corruption from various readings which often renders uncertain the text of important passages of works written on the very different and simpler system • Several examples of such passages occur in the present volume in the Akankheyya- and Maha-sudassana-Suttas, where they are pointed out in the notes. XXIV THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. to which we are accustomed. On the other hand, however, the catchwords may sometimes have given rise to serious interpolations. It is open to much doubt whether, in the numerous passages where such stock phrases and repetitions occur, the best mode of translation is to follow word for word the expressions found in the original (but only inserted there to perform a service no longer necessary), or to make use of contractions, the fact of their being so being duly pointed out, either in notes, or by some typographical expedient. Where, for instance, a long paragraph is devoted to what an elder of the Buddhist Order of Mendicants should do, or be, under certain given circumstances, and the whole paragraph is then repeated word for word, of an ordinary member, and of a nun, and of a lay-disciple (upasaka), or of a religious woman (upasika)\ it would be possible to convey the whole sense intended, by translating that an elder of the Order, and an ordinary member, and a nun, and a lay-disciple of either sex, should do, or be, such and such things. But every case of repetition is not so simple as this ; such curtailing destroys at least the form and the em- phasis of the originals ; and it seemed more in accordance with the rules laid down in the prospectus to the Series of Translations from the Sacred Books of the East, of which this volume forms a part, to adhere in all cases strictly to the text. With the exception of the earlier chapters in the Book of the Great Decease, in which a few such contractions will be found mentioned in the notes, I have therefore reproduced almost all the repeti- tions. The result will not, I trust, be embarrassing to the reader who keeps constantly in mind the aim and origin of these stock phrases and repetitions, and does not allow the wearisome form in which they are presented to shut out from his view the logical sequence of the sometimes very striking ideas which these Suttas contain. I venture to go further and to maintain that it is not necessary or ' See below, Book of the Great Decease, Chap. IH, §§ 7, 8. GENERAL INTRODUCTION. XXV even correct to read through the whole of passages which were never intended to be read. We shall do wisely when coming to a phrase which we already know, to make use of a httle judicious skipping, and, noting the course of the argument, to pass on, with even mind, to the next paragraph. I send forth the following translations with very great diffidence. It is not too much to say that the discovery of early Buddhism has placed all previous knowledge of the subject in an entirely new light ; and has turned the flank, so to speak, of most of the existing literature on Buddhism. I use the term 'discovery' advisedly, for though the Pali texts have existed for many years in our pubhc libraries, they are only now beginning to be under- stood ; and the Buddhism of the Pali Pi/akas is not only a quite different thing from Buddhism as hitherto com- monly received, but is antagonistic to it. I cannot hope that the renderings of the many technical terms, now for the first time submitted to the judgment of students of early Buddhism, will all stand the test of time. So per- fectly dovetailed is the old Buddhist system, so utterly different from European Christianity are the ideas involved, so pregnant are the expressions used with deep and earnest religious feelings resting on a foundation completely apart from our own, that the translation of each term becomes a problem of great difficulty and delicacy. Where Gogerly or Burnouf has dealt with any word, the process has been easier : but there are many words they have not touched, and while Gogerly had no sympathy with these ancient beliefs, Burnouf has confined himself chiefly to later phases of Buddhism. There are several paragraphs — such as the one at Chapter I, § 12 of the Book of the Great Decease — which have cost me more time and trouble than the reader of the few words they contain will easily believe ; and it would be impossible to add a note to every word justifying the rendering which was finally adopted to convey the Buddhist idea, without in- volving at the same time some misleading implication. XXVI THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. In order to call attention to the fact, when a word in the original Pah is one of these technical terms of the Buddhist system of self-training, and when therefore the English expression must be taken in that technical sense, I have throughout written the technical terms with capital letters ; and I would invite the special notice of the reader to the words thus distinguished ^, Apart, too, from the necessity of great care in the rendering of single words, I have felt bound to make some attempt, however inadequate, to reproduce the style and tone of the Buddhist author, or authors. A mere word-for-word translation, though much easier to make, and perhaps more useful to those engaged in the study of the language would not only fail to do justice to the original, but would even convey a wrong impression to those who are interested in these works from the point of view of the comparative history of religious belief. There is a very real, though peculiar, eloquence in a considerable number of the prose passages, and more especially in the closing sections of each chapter; not the mere rhetorical eloquence of a clever word-painter, but the unconscious eloquence which springs from deep religious emotion. So also in the verses scattered through the Book of the Great Decease, while there is occasional doggrel, there are also one or two passages (such as I, 34 ; IV, S^\ VI, 15-18, and 6^) where the rhythm of the Pali verses is exceedingly beautiful, and the thoughts expressed not devoid of fancy. The translation of such passages has been beset with difficulty ; and I am only too con- scious how small has been the success attained. But I must ask the reader constantly to bear in mind that words, dull and bare to us, are full of meaning to the Buddhist. ' The Blessed Master came to the Mango-grove ' is a very plain statement of supposed fact : but to the earnest Buddhist the mention of ' the Master ' calls up to his mind ' I regret to say that the printer has very frequently omitted to reproduce these capitals ; but they still remain in some places, and the paragraph which explains them is therefore retained. i' GENERAL INTRODUCTION. XXVll his highest ideal of what is wise and great and kind ; and the Mango-grove is surrounded to him with all the poetry, and is associated with all the tender memories which to the devout and earnest Christian are wrapped up in such names as Bethany or the Mount of Olives. While impressed therefore with the knowledge of having come far short of my ideal, I feel there is for these reasons some justification in asking a kindly consideration for this first volume of English translations from the prose portions of the Pali Pi/akas. T. W. RHYS DAVIDS. Brick Court, Temple, August, 1880. MAHA-PARINIBBANA- SUTTANTA. INTRODUCTION TO THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. In translating this Sutta I have followed the text pub- lished by my friend the late Mr. Childers, first in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, and afterwards sepa- rately. In the former the text appeared in two instalments, the first two sheets, with many various readings in the foot- notes, in the volume for 1874; and the remainder, with much fewer various readings, in the volume for 1876. The reprinted text omits most of the various readings in the first two sheets, and differs therefore slightly in the paging. The letters D, S, Y, and Z, mentioned in the notes, refer to MSS. sent to Mr. Childers from Ceylon by myself, Subhiiti Unnanse, Yatramulle Unnanse, and Mudliar de Zoysa re- spectively. The MS. mentioned as P (in the first two sheets quoted only in the separate edition) is, no doubt, the Digha Nikaya MS. of the Phayre collection in the India Office Library. The other four are now I believe in the British Museum. The Hon. George Turnour of the Ceylon Civil Service published an analysis of this work in the Journal of the Bengal Asiatic Society for 1839; but as he unfortunately skips, or only summarises, most of the difficult passages, his work, though a most valuable contribution for the time, now more than half a century ago, has not been of much service for the present purpose. Of much greater value was Buddhaghosa's commentary contained in the Su- mahgala Vilasini^; but the great fifth-century commen- ' I have used the copy made for Tumour, and now in the India Office Collection. XXXll THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. tator wrote of course for Buddhists, and not for foreign scholars ; and his edifying notes and long exegetical ex- pansions of the text (quite in the style of Matthew Henry) often fail to throw light on the very points which are most interesting, and most doubtful, to European readers. The Malalarikara-vatthu, a late Pali work by a Bur- mese author of the eighteenth century \ is based, in that part of it relating to the last days of the Buddha, almost exclusively on the Book of the Great Decease, and on Buddhaghosa's commentary upon it. Bishop Bigandet's translation into English of a Burmese translation of this work, well known under the title of ' The Life or Legend of Gaudama the Budha of the Burmese,' affords evidence therefore of the traditional explanations of the text. In the course either of the original author's recasting, or of the double translation, so many changes have taken place, that its evidence is frequently ambiguous and not always quite trustworthy: but with due caution, it may be used as a second commentary. The exact meaning which was originally intended by the title of the book is open to doubt. ' Great-Decease-Book ' may as well mean 'the Great Book of the Decease,' as 'the Book of the Great Decease.' This book is in fact longer than any other in the collection, and the epithet 'Great' is often opposed in titles to a ' Short ' Sutta of (otherwise) the same name 2. But the epithet is also frequently intended, without doubt, to qualify the immediately succeeding word in the title ^ ; and, though the phrase ' Great Decease,' as apphed to the death of the Buddha, has not been found elsewhere, it is, I think, meant to do so here ^. ^ See ' The Life or Legend,' Sec, third edition, vol. ii. p. 149. The date there given (1134 of the Burmese era = 1773 a.d.) is evidently the date of the original work, and not of the translation. Nothing is said in the book itself or in Bishop Bigandet's notes of the name of the author, or of the name or date of the Burmese translator. * There are several such pairs in the Ma.ggh\ma. Nikaya; and the Maha- SatippaifMana-Sutta in the Digha is the same as the Satipa/Mana- Sutta in the Ma^-^Aima. * E. g. in the Maha-padhana-Sutta and Maha-sudassana-Sutta. * Childers seems to have been of the same opinion, vide Diet. I, 268. INTRODUCTION. XXXIU The division of the Book into chapters^ or rather Portions for Recitation, is found in the MSS. ; the division of these chapters into sections has been made by myself. It will be noticed that a very large number of the sections have already been traced, chiefly by Dr. Morris and myself, in various other parts of the Pili Pi/akas : whole paragraphs or episodes^ quite independent of the repetitions and stock phrases above referred to, recurring in two or more places. The question then arises whether (i) the Book of the Great Decease is the borrower, whether (2) it is the original source, or whether (3) these passages were taken over, both into it, and into the other places where they recur, from earlier sources. It will readily be understood that, in the present state of our knowledge, or rather ignorance, of the Pali Pi/akas, this question cannot as yet be answered with any certainty. But a few observations may even now be made. Generally speaking the third of the above possible ex- planations is not only more probable in itself, but is confirmed by parallel instances in literatures developed under similar conditions, both in the valley of the Ganges and in the basin of the Mediterranean. It is quite possible that while some books — such as the Maha-vagga, the /^ulla-vagga, and the Digha Nikaya — usually owe their resemblances to older sources now lost or absorbed ; others — such as the Sawyutta and the Ariguttara — are always in such cases simply borrowers from sources still existing. At the time when our Book of the Great Decease was put into its present shape, and still more so when a Book of the Great Decease was first drawn up, there may well have been some reliable tradition as to the events that took place, and as to the subjects of his various discourses, on the Buddha's last journey. He had then been a public Teacher for forty-five years ; and his system of doctrine, which is really, on the whole, a very simple one, had already been long ago elaborated, and applied in numerous dis- courses to almost every conceivable variety of circumstances. What he then said would most naturally be, as it is repre- sented to have been, a final recapitulation of the most [II] c XXXIV THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. important and characteristic tenets of his reHgion. But these are, of course, precisely those subjects which are most fully and most frequently dealt with in other parts of the Pali Pi/akas. No record of his actual words could have been preserved. It is quite evident that the speeches placed in the Teacher's mouth, though formulated in the first person, in direct narrative, are only intended to be sum- maries, and very short summaries, of what was said on these occasions. Now if corresponding summaries of his previous teaching had been handed down in the Order, and were in constant use among them, at the time when the Book of the Great Decease was put together, it would be a safe and easy method to insert such previously existing summaries in the historical account as having been spoken at the places where the Teacher was traditionally believed to have spoken on the corresponding doctrines. In the historical book the simple summaries would sufficiently answer every purpose ; but when each particular matter became the subject of a separate book or division of a book, the same summaries would be included, but would be amplified and elucidated. And this is in fact the relation in which several of the recurring passages, as found in the Book of the Great Decease, stand to the same passages when found elsewhere. On the other hand, some of the recurring passages do not consist of such summaries, but are actual episodes in the history. As an instance of these we may take the long extract at the end of the first, and the beginning of the second chapter (I, 20-II, 3, and again II, 16-II, 24), which is found also in the Maha-vagga. The words are (nearly^) identical in both places, but in the Book of the Great Decease the account occurs in its proper place in the middle of a connected narrative, whereas in the Maha- vagga, a treatise on the Rules and Regulations of the Order, it seems strangely out of place. So the passage, also a long one, with which the Book of the Great ^ On the difference see the note at H, i6. It affects only a few localising phrases in a narrative occupying (in the translation) thirteen pages. INTRODUCTION. XXXV Decease commences (on the Seven Conditions of Welfare), seems to have been actually borrowed by the Ariguttara Nikaya from our work. The question of these summaries and parallel passages cannot be adequately treated by a discussion of the in- stances found in any one particular book. It must be >. considered as a whole^ and quite apart from the allied , question of the ' stock phrases ' above alluded to, in a ' discussion of all the instances that can be found in the Pali Pi/akas. For this purpose tabulated statements are essential, and as a mere beginning such a statement is here : annexed (including the passages, marked with an asterisk, which have every appearance of belonging to the same category). BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE, iChap. I (34 sections) §§ I- 1 o §11 „ ,r §§16,17' §§ 20-34 §§ I, 2, 3 Chap. II (35 sections) §§ 13. M, i5- §§ 16-24 §§ 27-35 !!hap. Ill (66 sections) §§ i-io §§ 11-20 §§21-23* §§ 24-32 §§ 33-42 Dhap. IV (58 sections) §§ 2, 3 §§7-ii* 5> OTHER BOOKS. Ahguttara (Sutta-nipata). „ (AVza-nipata). Digha (Sampasadaniya) and Sa?«yutta (Satippa///^ana- vagga). Maha-vagga VI, 28. Maha-vagga VI, 29. / Digha (Satippa////ana). \ M.zggh\m2i „ i Sa?«yutta „ \ Vibhahga „ Maha-vagga VI, 30. Sawyutta (Satippa////ana- vagga). f Sa;;?yutta(Iddhipada-vagga). I Anguttara (A//^a-nipata). Ariguttara (A///^a-nipata). ? Eight Assemblies. Ahguttara (A///za-nipdta). Ahguttara (A/Ma-nipata). Ahguttara (Aatuka-nipata). ^ Omitted in Po-fa-tsu. See below, p. xxxviii. C 2 XXXVl THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. Chap. V (69 sections) § 10 » §§ 16-22 1 . » » §§27-31*) • » >. § 36 » „ §§41-44 » » §60 >» >. § 63 §68 Chap.VI (62 sections) §16 » » §§36-41 OTHER BOOKS. Anguttara (Duka-nipata). (^atuka-nipata). Sawyutta (Satippa/Mana- vagga). Digha (Maha-sudassana- Sutta). A^ulla-vagga V, 8, i. Maha-vagga I, 38, i. A'ulla-vagga XI, i, 15. Digha (Maha-sudassana- Sutta). AAilla-vagga XI, i, i. No Sanskrit work has yet been discovered giving an account of the last days of Gotama ; but there are several Chinese works which seem to be related to ours. Of one especially, named the Fo Pan-ni-pan King (apparently Buddha-Parinibbana-Sutta, but such an expression is un- known in Pali), Mr. Beal says^ : ' This appears to be the same as the Sutra known in the South. ... It was translated into Chinese by a Shaman called Fa-tsu, of the Western Tsin dynasty, circa 200 A.D.' I do not understand this date. The Western Tsin dj^nasty is placed by Mr. Beal himself on the fly-leaf of the Catalogue at 265-313 a.d. And whether the book referred to is really the same work as the Book of the Great Decease seems to me to be very doubtful. At p. 160 of his 'Catena of Buddhist Scriptures from the Chinese ' Mr. Beal says, that another Chinese work ' known as the Maha Parinirva^^a Sutra' 'is evidently the same as the Mahi Parinibbana Sutta of Ceylon/ but it is quite evident from the extracts which he gives that it is an entirely different and much later work. On this book there would seem further to be a trans- lated commentary, Ta Pan-ni-pan King Lo, mentioned ' Omitted by Po-fa-tsu. See below, p. xxxviii. '^ Catalogue of Buddhist Chinese Books in the India Office Library, p. 95. INTRODUCTION. XXXvIi at p. loo of the same Catalogue, and there assigned to Chang-an of the Tsin dynasty (589-619 A.D.). At pp. 12-13 of the same Catalogue we find no less than seven other works, and an eighth on p. 77, not indeed identified with the Book of the Great Decease, but bearing titles which Mr. Beal represents in Sanskrit as Mahapari- nirva^a Sutra. They purport to be translated respectively — A. D. 1. By Dharmaraksha of the Northern Liang dynasty . 502-555 2. By Dharmaraksha „ „ 3. By Fa Hian and Buddhabhadra of the Eastern Tsin dynasty 317-419 4. By Gilanabhadra and others of the Eastern Tang dynasty 620-904 5. By Dharmagupta and others of the Western Tsin dynasty ....... 265-313 6. By Fa Hian of the Eastern Tsin dynasty . . 317-419 7. Unknown. 8. By Dharmabodhi of the Former Wei dynasty . . circa 200 Indian author, Vasubandhu. Whether Nos. 1 and 2, and again 3 and 6 are the same is not stated; and in the Indian Antiquary for 1875 Mr. Beal gives an account of another undated work, as existing in the India Office Collection, bearing a different title from any of the above, but which he also translates as Mahaparinibbana Sutta. It purports to be the very oldest of the Vaipulya Sutras, whereas the book quoted in the Catena is there said to be 'one of the latest of the expanded St!itras.' ' The general outline,' says Mr. Beal \ ' is this. Buddha, on a certain occasion, proceeded to Kinsinagara (sic), and entering a grove of Sala trees, there reposed. He received a gift of food from C hand a, an artisan of the neighbouring town. After partaking of the food he was seized with illness. He discoursed through the night with his disciples, and disputed with certain heretical teachers. At early dawn he turned on his right side with his head to the north, and died. The Sala trees bent down to form a canopy over his head. The account then proceeds to relate * Indian Antiquary, vol. iv. p. 90. XXXVlll THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. the circumstances of his cremation, and the subsequent disputes, between the Mallas and others, for his ashes.' There is a curious echo here of some of the sections translated below ; though each particular item of the summary is really in contradiction with the corresponding part of the Pali book. There is perhaps another Chinese work on the death of Buddha, of the existence of which I have been informed, through the kind intervention of Pro- fessor Max Muller, by Mr. Kasawara. It was translated by Po-fa-tsu between 290 and 306 a. D. It seems to be the same as the first mentioned above, but it contains a good deal of matter not found in the Maha-parinibbana-Sutta (notably an account of the Ra^agaha Council, the mention of which is so conspicuously absent from the Pali work) ; and it omits many of the sections found in the Pali. Mr. Kasawara has been kind enough to send me the following details regarding those omissions, and they are of peculiar interest as compared with the table given above ^: Chapters in the Pali. Sections wanting in Chinese, ist Chapter . . 15-18. 3rd Chapter .. . 21-42. 4th Chapter . .. 53-56. 5th Chapter . . 4-6; 16-23; 27-31; 48-51. 6th Chapter . . 27; 48-50. There is no evidence to show that any of the above works are translations of our Sutta, or in any sense the same work. No reliance, in fact, can be placed upon the mere similarity of title in order to show that a Chinese work and an Indian one are really the same : and I regret that attempts should have been made to fix the date of Indian works by the fact that Chinese translations bearing similar titles are said to have been made in a certain period. But the above-mentioned works on the Great Decease will, when published, throw valuable light on the traditions of different, though no doubt later, schools of Buddhist thought ; and a detailed comparison would pro- bably throw a very interesting light 'on the way in which ' On p. xxxvi. INTRODUCTION. XXXIX religious legends of this kind vary and grow ; and the existence of these Chinese translations affords ground for the hope that we may some day discover an earlier Sanskrit work on the same subject^. The cremation ceremonies described in the sixth chapter are not without interest. It would be natural enough that Gotama should have been buried without any of those ritual- istic forms the usefulness of which he denied, and without any appeal to gods whose power over men he ignored. But the tone of the narrative makes it at least possible that there was not really anything unusual in the method of his cremation ; and that the elaborate rites prescribed in the Brahmanical books for use at a funeral^ were not, in practice, observed in the case of the death of any person other than a wealthy Brahman, or some layman of rank who was a devoted adherent of the Brahmans. In the same way we find that in those countries where the more ancient form of Buddhism still prevails, there are a few simple forms to be used in the case of the cremation of a distinguished Bhikkhu or Upasaka ; but in ordinary cases bodies are buried without any ceremony. So in Ceylon, Robert Knox — whose rare and curious work, one of the most trustworthy books of travels extant, deserves more notice than it has received, and who was a captive there for many years before the natives were influ- enced by any contact with Europeans — says^, ' It may not be unacceptable to relate how they burn their dead. As for persons of inferior quality, they are interred in some convenient places in the woods (there being no set places for burial), carried thither by two or three of their friends, and buried without any more ado. They lay them on their backs, with their heads to the West, and their feet to the East, as we do. Then these people go and wash : for they are unclean by handling the dead. ' I have not been able to trace any reference to either of these Chinese works in Mr. Edkins's ' Chinese Buddhism.' " See Max Muller in Z. D. M. G., vol. ix. » Knox's ' Historical Relation of Ceylon,' Part III, Chap. xi. xl THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. ' But persons of greater quality are burned, and that with ceremony. When they are dead they lay them out, and put a cloth over their privy parts ; and then wash the body, by taking half a dozen pitchers of water and pouring upon it. Then they cover him with a linen cloth, and so carry him forth to burning. This is when they burn the body speedily. But otherwise they cut down a tree that may be proper for their purpose, and hollow it like a hog-trough, and put the body, being disembowelled and embalmed, into it, filling up all about with pepper, and so let it lie in the house until it be the king's command to carry it out to the burning. For that they dare not do without the king's order if the person deceased be a courtier. Sometimes the king gives no order in a great while ; it may be not at all : therefore, in such cases, that the body may not take up house-room or annoy them, they dig a hole in the floor of their house, and put hollowed tree and all in, and cover it. If afterwards the king commands to burn the body, they take it up again, in obedience to the king — otherwise there it lies. ' Their order for burning is this : if the body be not thus put into a trough or hollow tree, it is laid upon one of his bedsteads, which is a great honour among them. This bedstead with the body on it, or hollowed tree with the body in it, is fastened with poles, and carried upon men's shoulders unto the place of burning, which is some eminent place in the fields, or highways, or where else they please. There they lay it upon a pile of wood some two or three feet high ; — then they pile up more wood upon the corpse, lying thus on the bedstead or in the trough. Over all they have a kind of canopy built (if he be a person of very high quality), covered at top, hung about with painteS cloth, and bunches of cocoa-nuts, and green boughs ; and so fire is put to it. After all is burnt to ashes, they sweep to- gether the ashes into the manner of a sugar-loaf, and hedge the place round from wild beasts breaking in, and they will sow herbs there. Thus I saw the king's uncle, the chief tirinanx' (who was, as it were, the chief primate of all the ' Knox's way of spelling Terunnanse, that is, Thera. ■ INTRODUCTION. xH nation), burned upon a high place, that the blaze might be seen a great way^/ I myself saw an Unnanse burned very much in this way near the Weyangoda Court-house ; and there is a long account in the native newspaper, the Lak-riwi-kirana (Ceylon Sunbeam), of the i2th March, 1870, of the crema- tion of a Weda-rala, or native doctor. Bishop Bigandet relates in a note in his 'Life or Legend of Gautama' the corresponding ceremonies still in use in Burma, of which he has been a witness^; but cremation is apparently as seldom resorted to in Burma as it is in Ceylon. The unceremonious mode of burying the dead referred to by Knox is not adopted in the more settled districts on the sea coast. When at Galle I enquired into the funeral customs there prevalent, with the following result^: A few hours after a man has died, the relations wash the corpse, shave it ; and, having clothed it with a strip of clean white cloth, place it on a bedstead covered with white cloth, and under a canopy (wiyana) also of white cloth. They then place two lamps, one to burn at the head, and the other at the foot of the corpse, and use perfumes. A coffin is then prepared, covered with black cloth ; and the body is placed on the coffin, and is then sprinkled over with lavender or rose-water. The women meanwhile bow backwards and forwards with their hands behind their heads, uttering loud wailings over the deceased. Then the male relatives carry the coffin to the grave, which is dug in one of their own cocoa-nut topes near by, and over which is raised a more or less elaborate canopy or arch of cloths and evergreens (ge<^i-ge), adorned with the tender leaves and flowers of the cocoa-nut. Along the path also from the house to the grave young cocoa-nut leaves and flowers are sometimes hung, and the pathway itself is often spread with clean white cloths. The tom-tom beaters go first ; and the dull monotonous * In the older editions of Knox there is a curious engraving of a body being thus burnt. ^ Third edition, vol. ii. pp. 78, 79. ^ See the Ceylon Friend for 1870, pp. 109 and following. xlii THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE, sound of their instruments of music is appropriate enough. Then follow some Buddhist mendicants, in number accord- ing to the wealth or influence of the deceased, and walking under a portable canopy of white cloth. Then the coffin is carried by the nearest male relatives, and followed by other male relatives and relations — no females, even the widowed mother of an only son, taking part in this last sad pro- cession. Three times the coffin is carried round the grave : then it is placed on two sticks placed across the mouth of the pit ; and one end of a roll of white cloth is placed on the coffin, the other end being held by all the Unnanses (Bhikkhus) whilst the people repeat three times in Pali the well-known formula of the Refuges (the simple Nicene Creed of the Buddhists) : ' I take my refuge in the Buddha, I take my refuge in the Dhamma, I take my refuge in the Order ^.' Then the priests respond, thrice repeating in Pali the well-known verse discussed below ^: ' How transient are all component things ! Their nature's to be born and die ; Coming, they go; and then is best, When each has ceased, and all is rest!' Then the Unnanses let go the roll of white cloth, and whilst water is poured from a goblet into a cup placed on a plate until the cup is full to the brim '^ they again chaunt three times in Pali the following verses : — 'As rivers, when they fill, must flow. And reach, and fill the distant main ; * Buddhaw sara^aw gs.kkha.mi Dhammaw sa.ra.na.m ga/.X-Aami Sawghaw sarawaw ga.lkfia.mi. ' Ani^^a vata sawkhara uppadavaya-dhammino Uppa^g'ilva niru^^Aanti tesaw vupasamo sukho. See 'Book of the Great Decease,' VI, i6, and the 'Legend of the Great King of Glory,' H, 42. * This ceremony is called Txm wadanawa. INTRODUCTION, xli 111 So surely what is given here Will reach and bless the spirits there! If you on earth will gladly give Departed ghosts will gladly live! As water poured on mountain tops Must soon descend, and reach the plain ; So surely what is given here Will reach and bless the spirits there^!^ The relations then place the coffin in the grave, and each throws in a handful of earth. The Unnanses then go away, taking the roll or rolls of cloth, one end of which was placed upon the coffin. The grave is filled in. Two lights, one at the head of it, and one at the foot, are left burning. And then the friends and relations return to the house. The funeral now being over, is follov/ed by a feast ; for though nothing may be cooked in a house or hut in which there is a corpse, yet plenty of food has been brought in from neighbouring tenements by the relations of the deceased. There is, however, yet another very curious ceremony to be gone through. Three or seven days — whichever, according to the rules of astrology, is a lucky day — after the deceased person died, an Unnanse is duly invited to the house in which the deceased died. He arrives in the evening ; reads bana (that is, the Word, passages from the sacred books) throughout the night ; and in the morning is presented with a roll of white cloth, and is asked to partake of food, chiefly of course curries, of those different kinds of which the deceased had been most particularly fond. * Yatha varivaha pura paripiirenti sagaram Evam eva ito dinnaw petanam upakappati. Ilo dinnena yapenti peta kalakata tahim. Unname udakaw v3.H3.7n yatha ninnawz pavattati Evam eva ito dinnaw petana?« upakappati. These verses occur in the Tirokurft/a-Sutta of the Khuddaka-Pa^Aa, but in a different order. xliv THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. This ceremony is called Mataka Danaya (Gift for the Dead), and the previous feast is called Mataka Bhatta (Feast in honour of the Dead) : the two combined taking the place of an ancient rite obsei-ved in pagan, pre-Buddhistic, times, and then also called Mataka Bhatta, in which offerings were made to the Betas; that is^ to the manes, or departed ghosts, of ancestors and near relations. Such offerings are of course forbidden to Bud- dhists ^, and it is a very instructive instance of a survival in belief, of the effect of the natural reluctance to make much change in the mode of paying the customary funeral re- spect to deceased friends, that the kind of food supposed to be most appreciated by the dead should still be used in the Buddhist funeral rites. Another part of the ceremony, that part where one end of a roll of cloth is placed on the coffin while the other end is held by all the assembled Unnanses ^, is a fragment of ritualistic symbolism which deserves attention. The mem- bers of the Buddhist Order of Mendicants were enjoined to avoid all personal decoration of any kind ; and to attire themselves in cloths of no value, such as might be gathered from a dust heap (Pawsu-kula), or even from a cemetery. This was a principle to be followed, not a literal rule to be observed ; and therefore from the first presents of strips of plain white cotton cloth, first torn in pieces to deprive them of any commercial value, then pieced together again and dyed a dull orange colour to call to mind the colour of old worn out linen, were the material from which the mendicants' clothing was actually made. But the duty of contempt for dress (called Pawsu-kulikaiiga, from the dust heap) was never lost sight of, and advantage was taken of the gifts given by the faithful at funerals to impress this duty upon the minds of the assembled Bhikkhus. Nothing is known of any religious ceremony having been performed by the early Buddhists in India, whether the person deceased was a layman, or even a member of the ' Compare the Mataka-Bhatta-Gitaka (No. i8), translated in 'Buddhist Birth Stories,' vol. i. pp. 226 and following. * See p. xlii. INTRODUCTION. xlv Order. The Vinaya Pi/'aka, which enters at so great length into all the details of the daily life of the recluses, has no rules regarding the mode of treating the body of a deceased Bhikkhu. It was probably burnt, and very much in the manner described in the last chapter of our Sutta — that is to say, it was reverently carried out to some convenient spot, and there simply cremated on a funeral pyre without any religious ritual, a small tope being more often than not erected over the ashes. Though funerals are, naturally, not unfrequently mentioned in the historical books, and in the Birth Stories, there is nowhere any reference to a recognised mode of performing any religious ceremony ^. The date of the Great Decease is not quite certain. The dwellers in the valley of the Ganges, for many genera- tions after Gotama's death, were a happy people, who had no need of dates ; and it was only long afterwards, and in Ceylon, that the great event became used as the starting- point for chronological calculations, as the Buddhist era. The earliest use of the Buddha's Parinibbina as such an era is in an Inscription of King Nissanka Malla's, of the twelfth century A.D., published by me in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society for 1875. Both in the historical records of Ceylon, and in those passages of the Pura;^as which are the nearest approach to historical records in India, the chronology is usually based on the lists of kings, just as it is in the Old Testament. Only by adding to- gether the lengths of the reigns of the intermediate kings is it possible to calculate the length of the time that is said to have elapsed between any two given events. If these lists of kings had been accurately kept from * Compare Mahavawsa, pp. 4,125, 129,199, 223-225, and Chap. 39, verse 28; Gataka I, 166, 181, 402; II, 6; Dasaratha Gataka, pp. i, 21, 22, 26, &c. ; Dhammapada Commentary, pp. 94, 205, 206, 222, 359; Hatthavana-galla- vihara-vamsa. Chap. IX; Hardy, 'Eastern Monachism,' pp. 322-324. The words Saddham, Uddhadehikaw, and Nivapo, given in Childers, refer to pagan rites. On funerals among Buddhists in Japan, see Miss Bird's ' Unbeaten Tracks,* vol. i. xlvi THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. Gotama's time to the time when the existing chronicles were compiled, we should be able, if we could fix the date of any one of the kings, to calculate the date of the Buddha's death. This last we can do ; for the date of iifandragupta, and the date of his grandson Asoka, can be independently fixed within a few years by the aid of the Greek historians. But unfortunately the earlier parts of the otherwise reliable Ceylon chronicles are, like the earlier parts of Livy's otherwise reliable history of Rome, full of inconsistencies and impossibilities. According to the Ra^a-parampara, or line of kings, in the Ceylon chronicles, the date of the Great Decease would be 543 B.C., which is arrived at by adding to the date 161 B.C. (from which the reliable portion of the history begins) two periods of 146 and 236 years. The first purports to give the time which elapsed between 161 B.C. and the great Buddhist church Council held under Asoka, and in the eighteenth year of his reign, at Patna ; and the second to give the interval between that Council and the Buddha's death. It would result from the first calculation that the date of Asoka's coronation would be 3256.0.(146 + 161 + 18). But we know that this must contain a blunder or blunders, as the date of Asoka's coronation can be fixed, as above stated, with absolute certainty within a year or two either way of 267 B.C. Would it then be sound criticism to accept the other, earlier, period of 236 years found in those chronicles — a period which we cannot test by Greek chronology — and by simply adding the Ceylon calculation of 236 years to the European date for the eighteenth year of Asoka (that is circa 249 B.C.) to conclude that the Buddha died in or about 485 B.C.? I cannot think so. The further we go back the greater does the probability of error become, not less. The most superficial examination of the details of this earlier period shows too, that they are unreliable ; and what reliance would it be wise to place upon the total, apart from the details, when we find it mentioned for the first time in INTRODUCTION. xl Vll a work, the Dipavawsa, written eight centuries after the date it is proposed to fix ? If further proof were needed, we have it in the fact that the Dipavawsa actually contains the details of another calculation — based not on the lists of kings (Ra^a- pa ram- para), but on a list of Theras (Thera-parampara) stretching back from Asoka's time to the time of the great Teacher — which contradicts this calculation of l'^(> years. The Thera-parampara gives the name of the member of the Buddhist Order of Mendicants, that is, the Thera, who ordained Mahinda (the son of Asoka), then the name of the Thera who ordained that Thera, and so on. There are only five of them from Upali, who was ordained six- teen years after Buddha's death, down to Mahinda in- clusive. This would account not for 236^ but only for about 150 years. For let the reader take the case of any clergyman in the present day. The Bishop who ordains him would have been ordained thirty or forty years before ; and four such intervals would fill out, not 236 years, but about a century and a half; and a similar argument applies with reasonable certainty to the case in point. An examination of the details of the List of Theras confirms this conclusion strongly on every essential point. An examination also of the List of Kings shows that the period of 236 years is wrong by being too long. The shorter period of 150 years between Asoka and the Great Decease agrees much better with what we know of the literary history of Buddhism during that interval. And it also agrees with the tradition of the northern Bud- dhists as preserved by Hiouen Thsang, and in Kashmir and Tibet ^. In the 'Questions of Milinda' also — a work of unknown date, preserved only in its Pali form, but * Julien's translation of Hiouen Thsang, ' Memoires sur les contrees occi- dentales,' vol. i. p. 172 ; Kahla??a's Ra^a-tarangini, Book I ; and Csoma Korosi in 'Asiatic Researches,' vol. xx. pp. 92, 297. They place the Great Decease 400 years before Kanishka, whose Council was held shortly after the commence- ment of our era. xlvili THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. possibly derived from a northern Buddhist Sanskrit work —the date of the Buddha's death is fixed at five hundred years before the time of MiHnda\ who certainly reigned about a century after Christ. I am, therefore, of opinion that the hitherto accepted date of the Buddha's death should be modified accordingly. This would make the date of the Great Decease about 420-400 B.C. (very possibly a year or two later), and the date of Gotama's birth therefore eighty years earlier, or in round numbers about 500 B.C. I have discussed the whole question at full length in my « Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon/ written in ampli- fication of a paper read in 1874 before the Royal Asiatic Society ; and to that work I must refer any reader, who may take interest in these chronological discussions, for ampler details. I have been able here to present only a summary of an argument which is in so far of little im- portance, inasmuch as the rectification which I have ven- tured to propose only differs by a little more than half a century from the earliest date which can in any case be suggested as approximately correct (that is about 485 B. c). The date 543 B. C, still unfortunately accepted outside the circle of students of Buddhism-, is now acknowledged to be too early by all scholars who have seriously considered the subject. 1 Trenckner, p. 3. Mr. Trenckner says in his preface that Buddhaghosa quotes this work, but unfortunately he does not give any reference. See the note below on our Sutta, Chap. VI, § 3. » See, for instance, Max Duncker, 'History of Antiquity,' vol. iv. p. 364. On the dated Edict, ascribed by some to Asoka, see my note loc. cit., and Olden- berg, ' Introd. to the Maha-vagga,' p. xxxviii. THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. Chapter I. 1 ^ Thus have I heard. The Blessed One was once dwelhng in Ra^''agaha, on the hill called the Vulture's Peak. Now at that time A^atasattu, the son of the queen-consort ofVideha origin^, the king of Magadha, was desirous of attacking the Va^ians ; and he said to himself, ' I will root out these Va^- ^ Sections i-io, inclusive, recur in ihe Va^^i Vagga of the Sutta Nipata in the Ahguttara Nikaya; and there is a curiously incorrect version of § 3 in the Fa Kheu Pi Hu, translated from the Chinese by Mr. Beal, under the title of 'The Dhammapada from the Buddhist Canon,' pp. 165, 166. 2 A^atasattu Vedehiputto. The first word is not a per- sonal name, but an official epithet, ' he against whom there has arisen no (worthy or equal) foe ; ' the second gives us the maiden family, or tribal (not personal) name of his mother. Persons of distinction are scarcely ever mentioned by name in Indian Buddhist books, a rule applying more especially to kings, but extended not unfrequently to private persons. Thus Upatissa, the earnest and thoughtful disciple whom the Buddha himself declared to be ' the second founder of the kingdom of righteousness,' is referred to either as Dhamma-senapati or as Sariputta ; epithets of cor- responding origin to those in the text. By the (?ains A^atasattu is called Ku«ika or Ko?nka, which again is probably not the name given to him at the rice-eating (the ceremony corresponding to infant baptism), but a nickname acquired in after Hfe. [II] B 2 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. ^ians, mighty and powerful ^ though they be, I will destroy these Va^ians, I will bring these Va^ians to utter ruin !' 2. So he spake to the Brahman Vassakara, the prime-minister of Magadha, and said : ' Come now, O Brahman, do you go to the Blessed One, and bow down in adoration at his feet on my behalf, and enquire in my name whether he is free from illness and suffering, and in the enjoyment of ease and comfort, and vigorous health. Then tell him that A^atasattu, son of the Vedehi, the king of Magadha, in his eagerness to attack the Va^ians, has resolved, " I will root out these Va^^ians, mighty and powerful though they be, I will destroy these Va^ians, I will bring these Va^ians to utter ruin!" And bear carefully in mind whatever the Blessed One may predict, and repeat it to me. For the Buddhas speak nothing untrue!' 3. Then the Brahman Vassakara hearkened to the words of the king, saying, ' Be it as you say.' And ordering a number of magnificent carriages to be made ready, he mounted one of them, left Raf^agaha with his train, and went to the Vulture's Peak, riding as far as the ground was passable for car- ^ Evammahiddhike evammahanubhave. There is nothing supernatural about the iddhi here referred to. Etena tesah samagga-bhavan kathesi says the commentator simply: thus referring the former adjective to the power of union, as he does the second to the power derived from practice in military tactics (hatthisippadihi). The epithets are, indeed, most commonly applied to the supernatural powers of Devatas, Nagas, and other fairy-like beings ; but they are also used, sometimes in the simple sense of this passage, and sometimes in the other sense, of Buddhas and of other Arahats. See M. P. S. 12, 43; M. Sud. S. 49-53; <^at. I, 34, 35, 39, 41. I r. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 3 riages, and then alighting and proceedhig on foot to the place where the Blessed One was. On arriving there he exchanged with the Blessed One the greetings and compliments of friendship and civility, sat down respectfully by his side [and then delivered to him the messacre even as the king- had commanded ^]. 4. Now at that time the venerable Ananda was standing behind the Blessed One, and fanning him. And the Blessed One said to him : ' Have yon heard, Ananda, that the Va^^ians hold full and frequent public assemblies ?' ' Lord, so I have heard,' replied he. ' So long, Ananda,' rejoined the Blessed One, ' as the Va^ians hold these full and frequent public assemblies ; so long may they be expected not to decline, but to prosper.' [And in like manner questioning Ananda, and receiving a similar reply, the Blessed One declared as follows the other conditions which would ensure the welfare of the Va^ian confederacy ^.] ' So long, Ananda, as the Va^ians meet together in concord, and rise in concord, and carry out their undertakings in concord — so long as they enact nothing not already established, abrogate nothing that has been already enacted, and act in accordance with the ancient institutions of the Va^ians as established in former days — so long as they honour and esteem and revere and support the Va^ian elders, and hold it a point of duty to hearken to their words — so lonof as no women or g^irls ^ § 2 repeated. ''■ In the text there is a question, answer, and reply with each clause. B 2 4 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. belonofine to their clans are detained amons: them by force or abduction — so long as they honour and esteem and revere and support the Va^^ian shrines ^ in town or country, and allow not the proper offerings and rites, as formerly given and performed, to fall into desuetude — so long as the rightful protection, defence, and support shall be fully provided for the Arahats among them, so that Arahats from a distance may enter the realm, and the Arahats therein may live at ease — so long may the Va^nans be expected not to decline, but to prosper.' 5. Then the Blessed One addressed Vassakara the Brahman, and said : ' When I was once staying, O Brahman, at Vesali at the Sarandada Temple^, I taught the Va^^ians these conditions of welfare ; and so long as those conditions shall continue to exist among the Va^- ^ians, so long as the Va^^ians shall be well instructed in those conditions, so long may we expect them not to decline, but to prosper.' 'We may expect then,' answered the Brahman, 'the welfare and not the decline of the Va^ians when they are possessed of any one of these conditions of welfare, how much more so when they are possessed of all the seven. So, Gotama, the Va^ians cannot be overcome by the king of Magadha ; that is, not in battle, without diplomacy or breaking up their alliance ^. And now, Gotama, we must go ; we are busy, and have much to do.' ^ ^etiyani, which Sum.Vil. explains as Yakkha-X'etiyani. ^ The commentator adds that this was a vihara erected on the site of a former temple of the Yakkha Sarandada. ^ 'Overcome' is literally 'done' (akara??iya), but the word evidently has a similar sense to that which ' done ' occasionally has MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. ' Whatever you think most fitting, O Brahman,' was the reply. And the Brahman Vassakara, de- lighted and pleased with the words of the Blessed One, rose from his seat, and went his way. 6. Now soon after he had gone the Blessed One addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : ' Go now, Ananda, and assemble in the Service Hall such of the Brethren ^ as live in the neighbourhood of Ra^agaha.' in colloquial English. The Sum. Vil. (fol. /i) says akarawiya, akatabba agahetabba : yadidan, nipata-mattah: yuddhas- sati, karawatthe sami-va>(:anah, abhimukhena yuddhena gahetun na sakka ti attho. Upalapana, which I have only met with here, must mean 'humbug, cajolery, diplomacy;' see the use of the verb upa-lapeti, at MahaVaggaV, 2, 21; (rat. II, 266, 267; Pat. in the 70th Va-k. Sum. Vil. explains it, at some length, as making an alliance, by gifts, with hostile intent, which comes to much the same thing. The root I think is li. ^ The word translated ' brethren ' throughout is in the original bhikkhu, a word most difficult to render adequately by any word which would not, to Christians and in Europe, connote something different from the Buddhist idea. A bhikkhu, literally ' beggar,' was a disciple who had joined Gotama's order ; but the word refers to their renunciation of worldly things, rather than to their conse- quent mendicancy ; and they did not really beg in our modern sense of the word. Hardy has 'priests;' I have elsewhere used ' monks ' and sometimes ' beggars ' and ' members of the order.' This last is, I think, the best rendering ; but it is too long for con- stant repetition, as in this passage, and too complex to be a really good version of bhikkhu. The members of the order were not priests, for they had no priestly powers. They were not monks, for they took no vow of obedience, and could leave the order (and constantly did so and do so still) whenever they chose. They were not beggars, for they had none of the mental and moral qualities associated with that word. ' Brethren ' connotes very much the position in which they stood to one another ; but I wish there were a better word to use in rendering bhikkhu. 6 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH, And he did so ; and returned to the Blessed One, and informed him, saying : ' The company of the Brethren, Lord, is assem- bled, let the Blessed One do as seemeth to him fit' And the Blessed One arose, and went to the Service Hall ; and when he was seated, he addressed the Brethren, and said : ' I will teach you, O mendicants, seven conditions of the welfare of a community. Listen well and attend, and I will speak.' 'Even so. Lord,' said the Brethren, in assent, to the Blessed One ; and he spake as follows : ' So long, O mendicants, as the brethren meet together in full and frequent assemblies — so long as they meet together in concord, and rise in con- cord, and carry out in concord the duties of the order — so long as the brethren shall establish nothing that has not been already prescribed, and abrogate nothing that has been already established, and act in accordance with the rules of the order as now laid down — so longf as the brethren honour and esteem and revere and support the elders of expe- rience and long standing, the fathers and leaders of the order, and hold it a point of duty to hearken to their words — so long as the brethren fall not under the influence of that craving which, springing up within them, would give rise to renewed exist- ence ^ — so long as the brethren delight in a life of solitude — so long as the brethren so train their minds ^ that good and holy men shall come to them, and those w^ho have come shall dwell at ease 1 f 2 i Ponobhavika' punabbhava-dayika. (S. V. fol. /u.) Fa.kk3itta.m yeva sati?« upa////apessanti' ti attano ab- ■.) bhantare sati;;/ upa///^apessanti. (S. V. fol. /u.) '1 I. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 7 — SO long may the brethren be expected, not to decHne, but to prosper. So long as these seven con- ditions shall continue to exist amonsf the brethren, so long as they are well-instructed in these conditions, so long may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper.' 7. ' Other seven conditions of welfare will I teach you, O brethren. Listen w^ell, and attend, and I will speak.' And on their expressing their assent, he spake as follows : ' So long: as the brethren shall not eneaee in. or be fond of, or be connected with business — so long as the brethren shall not be in the habit of, or be fond of, or be partakers in idle talk — so long as the brethren shall not be addicted to, or be fond of, or indulge in slothfulness — so long as the brethren shall not frequent, or be fond of, or indulge in society — so long as the brethren shall neither have, nor fall under the influence of, sinful desires — so long as the brethren shall not become the friends, companions, or intimates of sinners — so lonsf as the brethren shall not come to a stop on their way [to Nirva;2a^] because they * 'Oramattakena' ti avaramattakena appamattakena. 'An- tara' ti arahattaz^i appatva 'va etth' antare. ' Vosanan' ti . . . . osakkanam ida?« vutta;;/ hoti. Yava sila-parisuddhi-mat- tenava vipassana-mattenava sotapanna-bhava-mattena va sakadagami-bhava-mattena va anagami-bhava-mattena va ' vosana/;/' na 'apa^^issanti' nama ' vuddhi yeva bliikkhu- na.m pa/ika^kha no parihani.' S. V. (fol. tri). This is an inter- esting analogue to Phiilippians iii. 13:'! count not myself to have apprehended : but this one thing I do, forgetting those things which are behind, and reaching forth unto those things which are before, I press toward the mark,' &c. See also below, Chap. V, § 68. 8 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. have attained to any lesser thing — so long may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper. ' So lone as these conditions shall continue to exist among the brethren, so long as they are in- structed in these conditions, so long may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper.' 8. ' Other seven conditions of welfare will I teach you, O brethren. Listen well, and attend, and I will speak.' And on their expressing their assent, he spake as follows : ' So lonof as the brethren shall be full of faith, modest in heart, afraid of sin \ full of learning, strong in energy, active in mind, and full of wisdom, so long may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper. ' So lone as these conditions shall continue to exist among the brethren, so long as they are in- structed in these conditions, so long may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper.' 9, ' Other seven conditions of welfare will I teach you, O brethren. Listen well, and attend, and I will speak.' And on their expressing their assent, he spake as follows : ^ The exact distinction between hiri and ottappa is here ex- plained by Buddhaghosa as follows : 'Hirimana' ti papa-^igu^'y(7;ana-lakkha«aya hiriya yut- ta/('itta. 'Ottapi' ti papato bhaya-lakkha«ena ottappena sa- mannagata: that is, loathing sin as contrasted with fear of sin. But this is rather a gloss than an exact and exclusive definition. Ahirika is shamelessness, anotappa7?z frowardness. At (7at. I, 207 we find hiri described as subjective, and ottappa as objec- tive, modesty of heart as contrasted with decency in outward behaviour. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. ' So long as the brethren shall exercise themselves in the sevenfold higher wisdom, that is to say, in mental activity, search after truth, energy, joy, peace, earnest contemplation, and equanimity of mind, so long may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper. ' So long as these conditions shall continue to exist among the brethren, so long as they are in- structed in these conditions, so long may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper.' 10. ' Other seven conditions of welfare will I teach you, O brethren. Listen well, and attend, and I will speak.' And on their expressing their assent, he spake as follows : ' So long as the brethren shall exercise themselves in the sevenfold perception due to earnest thought, that is to say, the perception of impermanency, of non-individuality ^ of corruption, of the danger of sin, of sanctification, of purity of heart, of Nirva7^a, so long may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper. ' So lonor as these conditions shall continue to exist among the brethren, so long as they are instructed in these conditions, so long may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper.' 11. ' Six conditions of welfare will I teach you, O brethren. Listen well, and attend, and I will speak.' And on their expressing their assent, he spake as follows : ^ For a further explanation of the meaning of anatta;;/ see Gotama's second discourse in the Maha Vagga I, 6 : 38-47. Buddhaghosa makes no special comment here on either of the seven perceptions. lO THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH, ' So long as the brethren shall persevere in kind- ness of action, speech, and thought amongst the saints, both in public and in private — so long as they shall divide without partiality, and share in common with the upright and the holy, all such things as they receive in accordance with the just provisions of the order, down even to the mere contents of a begging bowl — so long as the brethren shall live among the saints in the practice, both in public and in private, of those virtues which (un- broken, intact, unspotted, unblemished) are produc- yj tive of freedom ^ and praised by the wise; which are untarnished by the desire of future life, or by the V belief in the efficacy of outward acts - ; and which are conducive to high and holy thoughts — so long as the brethren shall live among the saints, cherishing, both in public and in private, that noble and saving faith which leads to the complete destruction of the sorrow of him who acts accordingr to it — so lone may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper. 'So long as these six conditions shall continue to ^ Buddhaghosa takes this in a spiritual sense, 'tani pan' etani (silani) tawha-dasavyato mo/('etva bhu^issa-bhava-kara- «ato bhu^issani:' that is, 'These virtues are bhu^issani be- cause they bring one to the state of a free man by delivering him from the slavery of craving.' " Ta?;ha-di///nhi aparama/Z/^atta, ida;« nama tva;;/ apan- napubbo ti kenaX'i parama////u;« asakku;/eyyatta /^'a, 'apa- rama///^ani' (S. V. fol. //la), that is, 'These virtues are called a par am a//// an i because they are untarnished by craving or de- lusion, and because no one can say of him who practices them, "you have been already guilty of such and such a sin."' Craving is here the hope of a future life in heaven, and delusion the belief in the efficacy of rites and ceremonies (the two nissayas) which are condemned as unworthy inducements to virtue. I. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. I I exist among the brethren, so long as they are hi- structed in these six conditions, so long may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper.' 12. And whilst the Blessed One stayed there at Rac^agaha on the Vulture's Peak he held that com- prehensive religious talk with the brethren on the nature of upright conduct, and of earnest contem- plation, and of intelligence. * Great is the fruit,^, great the advantage of earnest contemplation when| set round with upright conduct. Great is the fruit, \ great the advantage of intellect when set round with/ ^■^ earnest contemplation. The mind set round with \ intelligence is freed from the great evils, that is I to say, from sensuality, from individuality, from / delusion, and from ignorance \' ^ This paragraph is spoken of as if it were a well-known sum- mary, and it is constantly repeated below. The word I have rendered 'earnest contemplation' is samadhi, which occupies in the PaH Pi/akas very much the same position as faith does in the New Testament ; and this section shows that the relative import- ance of samadhi, pawfia, and sila played a part in early Bud- dhism just as the distinction between faith, reason, and works did afterwards in Western theology. It would be difficult to find a passage in which the Buddhist view of the relation of these conflicting ideas is stated with greater beauty of thought, or equal succintness of form. The expression 'set round with' is in Pali paribhavita, which Dr. Morris holds to be etymologically exactly parallel to our phrase 'perfected by,' on the ground that facio is a causal of the Latin representative of the Sanskrit root bhu. In the A'etokhila Sutta of the Ma-gg/iima, Nikaya eggs are said to be paribhavitani by a brooding hen. Buddhaghosa says simply sila-paribhavito ti adesu yamhi sile //zatva magga-samadhi;« nibbattenti so tena silena paribhavito. 'The samadhi belonging to the (Noble Eightfold) Path is said to be paribhavito by that virtue, in which they (that is, the converted) are steadfast whilst they practice the samadhi.' 12 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 13. Now when the Blessed One had sojourned at Ra^agaha as long as he pleased, he addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : ' Come, Ananda, let us go to Ambala///^ika.' 'So be it, Lord!' said Ananda in assent, and the Blessed One, with a large company of the brethren, proceeded to Ambala///^ika. 14. There the Blessed One stayed in the king's house and held that comprehensive religious talk with the brethren on the nature of upright conduct, and of earnest contemplation, and of intelligence. ' Great is the fruit, great the advantage of earnest contemplation when set round with upright conduct. Great is the fruit, great the advantage of intellect when set round with earnest contemplation. The mind set round with intelligence is freed from the great evils, that is to say, from sensuality, from individuality, from delusion, and from ignorance.' 15. Now when the Blessed One had stayed as long as was convenient at Ambala////ika, he ad- dressed the venerable Ananda, and said : ' Come, Ananda, let us go on to Nalanda.' * So be it. Lord!' said Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. Then the Blessed One proceeded, with a great company of the brethren, to Nalanda ; and there, at Nalanda, the Blessed One stayed in the Pavarika mango grove. 16. ^ Now the venerable Sariputta came to the ^ This conversation is given at length in the Sampasadaniya Sutta of the Digha Nikaya, and also in the Satipa/Z/zana Vagga of the Sa;;zyutta Nikaya. I have compressed mere repetitions at the places marked with [ ] where the preceding clauses are, in the text, repeated in full. I. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 1 3 place where the Blessed One was, and having saluted him, took his seat respectfully at his side, and said : ' Lord ! such faith have I in the Blessed One, that methinks there never has been, nor will there be, nor is there now any other, whether Sama;^akka-bandhanadina pa/isahkhara«ena veghamissakena; thus giving the same meaning, but in such a way as to throw no hght on the derivation of the word. The whole episode from §11, 27 to the end of the chapter occurs also word for word in the Satipa///zana Vagga of the Sa^wyutta Nikaya, and the Burmese Phayre IMS. there reads vekhamissakena, as the Burmese MS. does here. My Digha Nikaya confirms Childers's reading, which no doubt correctly represents the uniform tradition of the Ceylon INISS. The Sumangala Vilasini goes on, mailne ti ^ara-saka/aw viya meghamissakena msinne yapeti arahatta-phala- veghanena /(■atu-iriyapatha-kappana/?^ Tathagatassa hoti nidasseti. Here the reading megha of the Turnour MS. must be a copyist's sHp of the pen for vegha, and veghanena is no clearer than veghamissakena. On the use of the word missaka at the end of a compound see Gataka II, 8, 420, 433. I have translated on what seems to me the only solu- tion at present possible, namely, that an initial a has been dropt, and that vegha or vekha = aveksha, ' attention, foresight, care.' In the same way though avalail^eti does occur (G^ataka I, 1 1 1), the more usual form in Pali, and the only one given by Childers, is valaw^eti. 38 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. the Tathagata, ceasing to attend to any outward thing, or to experience any sensation, becomes plunged in that devout meditation of heart which is concerned with no material object — it is only then that the body of the Tathagata is at ease. A 33. 'Therefore, O Ananda, be ye lamps unto your- selves. Be ye a refuge to yourselves. Betake yourselves to no external refuge. Hold fast to the truth as a lamp. Hold fast as a refuge to the truth. Look not for refuge to any one besides yourselves. And how, Ananda, is a brother to be a lamp unto himself, a refuge to himself, betaking himself to no external refuge, holding fast to the truth as a lamp, holding fast as a refuge to the truth, looking not for refuge to any one besides himself? 34. ' Herein, O Ananda, let a brother, as he dwells in the body, so regard the body that he, being strenuous, thoughtful, and mindful, may, whilst in the world, overcome the grief which arises from bodily craving — while subject to sensations let him continue so to regard the sensations that he, being strenuous, thoughtful, and mindful, may, whilst in the world, overcome the grief which arises from the sensations — and so, also, as he thinks, or reasons, or feels, let him overcome the grief which arises from the craving due to ideas, or to reasoning, or to feeling. 35. 'And whosoever, Ananda, either now or after I am dead, shall be a lamp unto themselves, and a refuge unto themselves, shall betake themselves to no external refuge, but holding fast to the truth as their lamp, and holding fast as their refuge to the truth, shall look not for refuge to any one besides themselves — it is they, Ananda, among my ir. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 39 bhikkhus, who shall reach the very topmost Height! — but they must be anxious to learnt' End of the Second Portion for Recitation. ^ Tamatagge me te Ananda bhikkhu bhavissanti ye ke/^i sikkhakama. The Burmese MSS. for me te read p'ete, which is a little easier. Buddhaghosa says, Tamatagge ti tamagge. Mz.gghQ takaro padasandhivasena vutto. Idaw vutta??? hoti ime aggatama ime aggama ti : eva/« sabbawi tama- yogaw ^/zinditva ativiya agge uttama-bhave te Ananda mama/// bhikkhu bhavissanti. Kesaw ati-agge bhavis.- santi.? Ye ke-^i sikkhakama sabbesa?;/ te ^atu-sati-ppa/- //?ana-go/^ara /^a bhikkhu agge bhavissanti ti. Arahatta- tiku/ena desa«am ga«hati, 'Tamatagge is for tamagge. The t in the middle is used for euphony. This word means, " these are the most pre-eminent, the very chief." Having, as above stated, broken every bond of darkness (tarn a) those bhikkhus of mine, Ananda, will be at the very top, in the highest condition. They will be at the very top of whom ? Those bhikkhus who are willing to learn, and those who exercise themselves in the four ways of being mindful and thoughtful, they shall be at the top of all (the rest). Thus does he make Arahatship the three-peaked height of his discourse' (compare on this last phrase Nibbanena desanaku/aw ga;/hati, G'ataka I, 275, 393, 401; and see also I, 114). Uttama, the highest (scil. bhava, condition), is used abso- lutely of Arahatship or Nirva/za at Cataka I, 96; Aggaphala occurs in the same sense at (?ataka I, 114; and even Phalagga at Mah. 102. The last words, 'but they must be anxious to learn,' seem to me to be an after thought. It is onTy'"Those who are thoroughly determined to work out their own salvation, without looking for safety to any one else, even to the Buddha himself, who will, whilst in the world, enter into and experience Nirvana. But, of course, let there be no mistake, merely to reject the vain baubles of the current superstitious beliefs is not enough. There is plenty (to learn and to acquire, of which enough discourse is elsewhere. For aggama in the comment we must read aggatama. If one could read amatagge in the text, all difficulty would vanish; but this would be too bold, and neither do I see how the use of anamatagge can help us. 40 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. Chapter III. I ^ Now the Blessed One robed himself early in the morning, and taking his bowl in the robe, went into Vesali for alms, and when he returned he sat down on the seat prepared for him, and after he had finished eating the rice he addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : ' Take up the mat, Ananda ; I will go to spend the day at the A'apala ATetiya.' * So be it, Lord!' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. And taking up the mat he followed step for step behind the Blessed One. 2. So the Blessed One proceeded to the A'apala Afetiya, and when he had come there he sat down on the mat spread out for him, and the venerable A Ananda took his seat respectfully beside him. Then the Blessed One addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : ' How delightful a spot, Ananda, is Vesali, and the Udena ATetiya, and the Gotamaka A'etiya, and the Sattambaka ATetiya, and the Bahuputta Afetiya, and the Sarandada A^'etiya, and the ATapala A'etiya. A 3. * Ananda ! whosoever has thought out, deve- loped,, prac_tised, accuinulated, andT^scen^d to the very heights of the four paths to Iddhi ^ and so ^ The whole of this passage down to the end of § 10 recurs in the Iddhipada Vagga of the Sawyutta Nikaya. 2 Iddhi. The four paths are, i. will, 2. effort, 3. thought, and 4. investigation, each united to earnest thought and the struggle against sin. The Iddhi reached by them is supposed in works on Buddhism to be a bodily condition (power of flying, &c.), by which the body rose superior to all the ordinary limitations of III. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 4 1 mastered them as to be able to use them as a means of (mental) advancement, and as a basis for edification, he, should he desire it, could remain in the same birth for a kalpa, or for that portion of the kalpa which had yet to run. Now the Tathagata has thought them out, and thoroughly practised and developed them [In all respects as just more fully described], and he could, therefore, should he desire it, live on yet for a kalpa, or for that portion of the kalpa which has yet to run.' 4, But even though a suggestion so evident and a hint so clear were thus given by the Blessed One, the venerable Ananda was incapable of comprehend- ing them ; and he besought not the Blessed One, saying, ' Vouchsafe, Lord, to remain during the kalpa ! Live on through the kalpa, O Blessed One ! for the good and the happiness of the great multi- tudes, out of pity for the world, for the good and the gain and the weal of gods and men ! ' So far was his heart possessed by the Evil One \ matter — a bodily condition corresponding to the mental condition of exaltation and power by which it was reached. On this curiously perverted exaggeration of the real influence of the mind over the body see, further, the translator's 'Buddhism,' pp. 174-177. Two of the string of participles — yanikata, which may possibly mean 'made use of as a vehicle,' and susamaraddha, 'most thoroughly ascended up to ' — might seem to allude to Iddhi as a power of flying bodily through the air. But the whole set of participles is used elsewhere of conditions of mind highly esteemed among the Buddhists, and incapable of giving support to any such allusion. So, for instance, of universal love (metta) at Gataka II, 61. ^ Yatha taw Marena pariyu///^ita/^itto. Here \.a.m is the indeclinable particle, yatha ta.m introducing an explanation. My MS. of the Digha Nikaya and the Turnour MS. of the Sumangala Vilasini read pari&u/Mita, and either spelling is correct. The 42 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 5. A second and a third time did the Blessed One [say the same thing, and a second and a third time was Ananda's heart thus hardened]. 6. Now the Blessed One addressed the venera- ble Ananda, and said : ' You may leave me, Ananda, awhile, and do whatever seemeth to thee fit.' A ' So be it. Lord ! ' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed, and rising from his seat he saluted the Blessed One, and passing him on the rieht, sat down at the foot of a certain tree not far off thence. 7. Now not long after the venerable Ananda had been gone, Mara, the Evil One, approached the Blessed One, and stood beside him. And so stand- ing there, he addressed the Blessed One in these words : ' Pass away now, Lord, from existence ; let the Blessed One now die. Now is the time for the Blessed One to pass away — even according to the fact is that the jy or v in such cases is even less than euphonic; it is an assistance not to the speaker, but merely to the writer. Thus in the Siilhalese duwanawa, 'to run,' the spoken word is du- anawa, and the w is written only to avoid the awkward use in the middle of a word of the initial sign for the sound a. That the speakers of Pali found no difficulty in pronouncing two vowels together is abundantly proved by numerous instances. The writers of Pali, in those cases in which the second vowel begins a word, use without hesitation the initial sign ; but in the middle of the word this would be so ungainly that they naturally prefer to insert a consonantal sign to carry the vowel sign. The varying readings I have pointed out are a strong confirmation of the cor- rectness of the pronunciation of modern native scholars ; and we may the more readily adopt it as the question is not really one concerning the pronunciation of Pali, but concerning the use which modern native copyists make of their own alphabet. I would pro- nounce therefore pari-u////ita-/('itto. III. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 43 word which the Blessed One spoke when he said ^ : " I shall not die, O Evil One ! until the brethren and sisters of the order, and until the lay-disciples of either sex ^ shall have become true hearers, wise and well-trained, ready and learned, versed in the Scriptures, fulfilling all the greater and., th p lesser . __ duties, correct in life, walking according to the pre- _ cepts — until they, having thus themselves learned the doctrine, shall be able to tell others of it, preach it, make it known, establish it, open it, minutely ex- plain it and make it clear — until they, when others start vain doctrine, shall be able by the truth to vanquish and refute it, and so to spread the wonder- working truth abroad ! " ' 8. *And now. Lord, the brethren and sisters of the order and the lay-disciples of either sex have be- come [all this], are able to do [all this]. Pass away now therefore. Lord, from existence ; let the Blessed One now die ! The time has come for the Blessed One to pass away — even according to the word which he spake when he said, " I shall not die, O Evil One ! until this pure religion of mine shall have become successful, prosperous, widespread, and popular in all its full extent — until, in a word, it shall have been well proclaimed to men." And now, Lord, this pure religion of thine has become [all this]. Pass away now therefore, Lord, from ^ The words here quoted were spoken by the Buddha, after he had been enjoying the first bliss of Nirvana, under the shepherd's Nigrodha tree (see my 'Buddhist Birth Stories,' pp. 109-1 11). The Evil One then also tempted him to die (see below, paragraph III, 43), and this was his reply. ^ The whole paragraph is repeated, here and below, for each of these glasses of persons. 44 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. existence ; let the Blessed One now die ! The time has come for the Blessed One to pass away !' 9. And when he had thus spoken, the Blessed One addressed Mara, the Evil One, and said : ' O Evil One ! make thyself happy, the final extinction of the Tathagata shall take place before long. At the end of three months from this time the Tatha- gata will die ! ' 10. Thus the Blessed One while at the Ai'apala A'etiya deliberately and consciously rejected the rest of his allotted sum of life. And on his so rejecting it there arose a mighty earthquake, awful and terrible, and the thunders of heaven burst forth. And when the Blessed One beheld this, he broke out at that time into this hymn of exultation : ' His sum of life the sage renounced, The cause of life immeasurable or small ; With inward joy and calm, he broke. Like coat of mail, his life's own cause ! ' 11. Now the following thought occurred to the venerable Ananda : ' Wonderful indeed and marvel- lous is it that this mighty earthquake should arise, awful and terrible, and that the thunders of heaven should burst forth ! What may be the proximate, what the remote cause of the appearance of this earthquake ?' 12. Then the venerable Ananda went up to the place where the Blessed One was, and did obeisance to the Blessed One, and seated himself respectfully at one side, and said : ' Wonderful indeed and mar- vellous is it that this mighty earthquake should arise, awful and terrible, and that the thunders of in. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 45 heaven should burst forth ! What may be the proximate, what the remote cause of the appearance of this earthquake?' 1 3. ' Eight are the proximate, eight the remote causes, Ananda, for the appearance of a mighty earthquake. What are the eight ? This great earth, Ananda, is estabHshed on water, the water on wind, and the wind rests upon space. And at such a time, Ananda, as the mighty winds blow, the waters are shaken by the mighty winds as they blow, and by the moving water the earth is shaken. These are the first causes, proximate and remote, of the appearance of a mighty earthquake. 14. 'Again, Ananda, a Sama^^a or a Brahman of great (intellectual) power, and who has the feelings of his heart well under his control; or a god or fairy (devata^) of great might and power, — when such a ^ Devata is a fairy, god, genius, or angel. I am at a loss how to render this word without conveying an erroneous impression to those not familiar with ancient ideas, and specially with ancient Buddhist ideas, of the spirit world. It includes gods of all sorts ; tree and river nymphs; the kindly fairies or ghosts who haunt houses (see my ' Buddhist Birth Stories,' Tale No. 40) ; spirits in the ground (see above, § I, 26); the angels who minister at the great renunciation, the temptation, and the death of the Buddha; the guardian angels who watch over men, and towns, and countries ; and many other similar beings. ' Celestial being ' would be wholly inapplicable, for instance, to the creatures referred to in the curious passage above (§1, 26). 'Superhuman being' would be an inaccu- rate rendering ; for all these light and airy shapes come below, and after, man in the Buddhist order of precedence. ' Spirit ' being used of the soul inside the human body, and of the human soul after it has left the body, and figuratively of mental faculties — none of which are included under devata — would suggest ideas incon- sistent with that of the Pali word. As there is therefore no appro- priate general word I have chosen, for each passage where the expression occurs, the word used in English of the special class 46 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. one by intense meditation of the finite idea of earth or the infinite idea of water (has succeeded in reahsing the comparative vahie of things ^) he can make this earth move and tremble and be shaken violently. These are the second causes, proximate or remote, of the appearance of a mighty earth- quake. 1 5. 'Again, Ananda, when a Bodhisatta consciously and deliberately leaves his temporary form in the heaven of delight and descends into his mother's womb, then is this earth made to quake and tremble and is shaken violently. These are the third causes, proximate or remote, of the appearance of a mighty earthquake ^. more particularly referred to in the passage of the text. Here all kinds of devatas being referred to, and there being no word in English for them all, I have ventured to put the word devata into my version, and to trouble the reader with this note. ^ Yassa paritta pa/Z/avi-safina bhavita hoti appamawa aposafifia, on which Buddhaghosa says simply, Paritta ti dub- bala: appamawa ti balava, and then goes on, as a note to kampeti, to tell a long story how Sangharakkhita Samawera, the nephew of Naga Thera, attained Arahatship on the day of his admission to the order ; and at once proceeded to heaven, and standing on the pinnacle of the palace of the king of the gods, shook the whole place with his big toe ; to the great consternation and annoyance of the exalted dwellers therein ! There is no doubt a real truth in the idea that deep thought can shake the universe, and make the palaces of the gods to tremble, just as faith is said in Matthew xxi. 21 to be able to remove mountains, and cause them to be cast into the sea. But these figurative expressions have, in Buddhism, become a fmitful soil for the outgrowth of superstitions and misunderstandings ; and the train of early Bud- dhist speculation in this field has yet to be elucidated. There is much about it in the Maha Padhana Sutta of the Digha Nikaya, where Chap. Ill, §§ 1 1-20 recur. 2 The Bodhisatta's voluntary incarnation is looked upon by the Buddhists as a great act of renunciation, and curious legends have III. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 47 1 6. 'Again, Ananda, when a Bodhisatta deliberately and consciously quits his mother's womb, then the earth quakes and trembles and is shaken violently. This is the fourth cause, proximate and remote, of the appearance of a mighty earthquake. 1 7. ' Again, Ananda, when a Tathagata arrives at the supreme and perfect enlightenment, then this earth quakes and trembles and is shaken violently. gathered about it. One is that on the night when she conceived his mother dreamt that a white elephant entered her side. The account will be found at length in my 'Buddhist Birth Stories' (pp. 62-64), and the earthquake is there mentioned in terms identical with those in the text. The sacred event is also one of those represented on the ancient bas-reliefs round the Bharhut Thupa, a full description of which will be found in General Cunningham's most interesting work, ' The Stupa of Bharhut.' General Cunning- ham says of the description placed above this sculpture : ' Above it in large characters is inscribed Bhagavato rukdanta, which may perhaps be translated, "Buddha as the sounding elephant," from ru, to sound, to make a particular sort of sound.' Now the first word of the inscription is in the genitive case, so that if the second word could mean an elephant, the whole would signify, ' The Buddha's elephant.' But the characters which General Cunningham reads riikdanta are, I venture to suggest, okkanti (^ ukkanti); and the inscription simply says, ' The descent of the blessed One.' As I have pointed out in 'Buddhism' (p. 184), the white elephant legend is one of those hallowed sun stories by which half-con- verted Hindus have striven to embellish the life story of the Teacher whose followers they had become. In the Lalita Vistara (Calc. ed. p. 63) the entrance of the elephant into Maya precedes the dream ; but though the ignorant may have therefore accepted it as a fact, it is of course only a figure of speech — and I venture to think from the Hindu standpoint, a beautiful figure of speech — to express the incarnation of divine mildness and majesty in a human form. The use of such a figure is not confined to India. In the earliest of the Apocryphal Gospels, the Gospel according to the Hebrews, the incarnation of the divine gentleness and love is expressed by saying that a dove from heaven ' entered into ' the human form. 48 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. This is the fifth cause, proximate and remote, of the appearance of a mighty earthquake. 18. 'Again, Ananda, when a Tathagata founds the subHme kingdom of righteousness, then this earth quakes and trembles and is shaken violently. This is the sixth cause, proximate and remote, of the appearance of a mighty earthquake. 19. 'Again, Ananda, when a Tathagata consciously and deliberately rejects the remainder of his life, then this earth quakes and trembles and is shaken violently. This is the seventh cause, proximate and remote, of the appearance of a mighty earthquake. 20. ' Again, Ananda, when a Tathagata passes entirely away with that utter passing away in which nothing whatever is left behind, then this earth quakes and trembles and is shaken violently. This is the eighth cause, proximate and remote, of the appearance of a mighty earthquake. 21. ' Now of eight kinds, Ananda, are these as- semblies. Which are the eis^ht ^ .-* Assemblies of nobles, Brahma/zas, householders, and Sama;^as, and the angel hosts of the Guardian Angels, the Great Thirty-Three, Mara, and Brahma. 22. ' Now I call to mind, Ananda, how when I used to enter into an assembly of many hundred nobles, before I had seated myself there or talked to them or started a conversation with them, I used to become in colour like unto their colour, and in voice like unto their voice. Then with religious discourse ^ The connection, or rather want of connection, between this and the last paragraph seems to me to be very suggestive as to the way in which the Sutta was composed. The narrative is resumed at paragraph 111, 43. On vanishing away, comp. I, 33. lir. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 49 I used to instruct, incite, and quicken them, and fill them with gladness. But they knew me not when I spoke, and would say, "Who may this be who thus speaks? a man or a god?" Then having instructed, incited, quickened, and gladdened them with reli- gious discourse, I would vanish away. But they knew me not even when I vanished away; and would say, "Who may this be who has thus vanished away ? a man or a god ?" ' 23. [And in the same words the Blessed One spake of how he had been used to enter into assem- blies of each of the other of the eieht kinds, and of how he had not been made known to them either in speakmg or m vanishmg away.] ' Now these, Ananda, are the eight assemblies.' A 24. ' Now these, Ananda, are the eight positions of mastery [over the delusion arising from the apparent permanence of external things ^]. What are the eight ? ^ Abhibhayatant ti abhibhavanakara«ani. Ki/;/ abhi- bhavanti? Pa-^/^anika-dhamme pi aramma?zani pi: tani hi pa/ipakkha-bhavena pa/^/^anika-dhamme abhibhavanti puggalassa Tianuttaritaya arammawani, says Buddhaghosa. (Sum.Vil m) This and the next paragraph are based upon the Buddhist belief as to the long-vexed question between the Indian schools who represented more or less closely the European Idealists and Realists. When cleared of the many repetitions inserted for the benefit of the repeaters or reciters, the fundamental idea seems to be that the great necessity is to get rid of the delusion that what one sees and feels is real and permanent. Nothing is real and permanent but character. The so-called eight Positions of Mastery are merely an expan- sion of the first two of the following eight Stages of Deliverance, and the whole argument is also expressed in another form in the 50 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 25. ' When a man having subjectively the idea of form sees externally forms which are finite, and pleasant or unpleasant to the sight, and having mas- tered them, is conscious that he knows and sees — this is the first position of mastery. 26. ' When a man having subjectively the idea of form sees externally forms which are boundless, and pleasant or unpleasant to the sight, and having mas- tered them, is conscious that he knows and sees — this is the second position of mastery. 2']. 'When a man without the subjective idea of form sees externally forms which are finite, and plea- sant or unpleasant to the sight, and having mastered them, is conscious that he knows and sees — this is the third position of mastery. 28. ' When a man without the subjective idea of form sees externally forms which are boundless, and pleasant or unpleasant to the sight, and having mastered them, is conscious that he knows and sees — this is the fourth position of mastery. 29. ' When a man without the subjective idea of form sees externally forms that are blue in colour, blue in appearance, and reflecting blue, — just, for passage on the nine successive ' Cessations,' of whicli an abstract will be found in Childers, sub voce nirodha. The two hsts have been translated and commented upon by Burnouf (Lotus de la Bonne Loi, pp. 543, 824-832), who took the texts from the Mahanidana Sutta and the Sangiti Sutta respectively. The former has been reprinted in Grimblot's Sept Suttas Palis, where the passage will be found at pp. 261, 262. I regret that in my interpretation I have been compelled to diiTer so greatly from Burnouf. Though I have devoted much care and time to the subject, I do not suppose that I have understood it better than he did. We cannot hope to get to the bottom of what these old Buddhists thought about matter and mind from such curt lists as these. III. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 5 1 instance, as the Umma flower is blue in colour, blue in appearance, and reflecting blue ; or, again, as that fine muslin of Benares which, on whichever side you look at it, is blue in colour, blue in appearance, and reflecting blue, — when a man without the subjective idea of form sees externally forms which, just in that way, are blue, blue in colour, blue in appearance, and reflecting blue, and having mastered them, is conscious that he knows and sees — that is the fifth position of mastery.' 30-32. [The sixth, seventh, and eighth positions of mastery are explained in words identical with those used to explain the fifth ; save that yellow, red, and white are respectively substituted throughout for blue ; and the Kawikara flower, the Bandhu-^ivaka flower, and the morning star are respectively substi- tuted for the Umma flower, as the first of the two objects given as examples.] 33. ' Now these stages of deliverance, Ananda [from the hindrance to thought arising from the sensations and ideas due to external forms ^], are eight in number. Which are the eight ? 34. 'A man possessed with the idea of form sees forms — this is the first stage of deliverance. 35. 'Without the subjective idea of form, he sees forms externally — this is the second stage of deli- verance. ^ These are the A///^a Vimokkha. Buddhaghosa has no com- ment upon them ; merely saying, ' The passage on the Vimokkhas is easy to understand ' — which is tantalizing. The last five Vi- mokkhas occur again below, in Chap. VI, §§ 11-13, where it is clear that they are used to express the progress through deep meditation, into absent-mindedness, abstraction, and being sunk in thought, until fiinally the thinker falls into actual trance. E 2 52 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 36. ' With the thought " it is well," he becomes intent (upon what he sees) — this is the third stage of deliverance. 2']. ' By passing quite beyond all idea of form, by putting an end to all idea of resistance, by paying no attention to the idea of distinction, he, thinking , " it is all infinite space," reaches (mentally) and re- mains in the state of mind in which the idea of the ■ infinity of space is the only idea that is present — j this is the fourth stage of deliverance. | 38. ' By passing quite beyond all idea of space being the infinite basis, he, thinking " it is all infinite , reason," reaches (mentally) and remains in the state i of mind to which the infinity of reason is alone | present — this is the fifth stage of deliverance. 39. ' By passing quite beyond the mere conscious- ness of the infinity of reason, he, thinking " nothing at all exists," reaches (mentally) and remains in the state of mind to which nothing at all is specially present — this is the sixth stage of deliverance. 40, ' By passing quite beyond all idea of nothing- ness he reaches (mentally) and remains in the state of mind to which neither ideas nor the absence of ideas are specially present — this is the seventh stage of deliverance. 41, 'By passing quite beyond the state of "neither ideas nor the absence of ideas " he reaches (men- tally) and remains in the state of mind in which both sensations and ideas have ceased to be — this is the eighth stage of deliverance. 42, ' Now these, Ananda, are the eight stages of deliverance. 43. ' On one occasion, Ananda, I was resting under the shepherd's Nigrodha tree on the bank of the i in. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 53 river Nera?/^ara immediately after having reached the great enHghtenment. Then Mara, the Evil One, came, Ananda, to the place where I was, and standing beside me he addressed me in the words : " Pass away now, Lord, from existence ! Let the Blessed One now die ! Now is the time for the Blessed One to pass away!" 44. ' And when he had thus spoken, Ananda, I addressed Mara, the Evil One, and said : " I shall not die, O Evil One ! until not only the brethren and sisters of the order, but also the lay-disciples of either sex shall have become true hearers, wise and well-trained, ready and learned, versed in the Scriptures, fulfilling all the greater and the lesser duties, correct in life, walking according to the pre- cepts — until they, having thus themselves learned the doctrine, shall be able to tell others of it, preach it, make it known, establish it, open it, minutely ex- plain it and make it clear — until they, when others start vain doctrine, shall be able by the truth to vanquish and refute it, and so to spread the wonder- workinor truth abroad !. 45. '"I shall not die until this pure religion of mine shall have become successful, prosperous, wide-spread, and popular in all its full extent — until, in a word, it shall have been well proclaimed among men ! " 46. 'And now again to-day, Ananda, at the A'apala A'etiya, Mara, the Evil One, came to the place where I was, and standing beside me addressed me [in the same words]. 47. ' And when he had thus spoken, Ananda, I answered him and said : " Make thyself happy, the final extinction of the Tathagata shall take place 54 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. before lonof. At the end of three months from this time the Tathagata will die ! " 48. ' Thus, Ananda, the Tathagata has now to-day at the A'apala iTetiya consciously and deli- berately rejected the rest of his allotted term of hfe.' 49. And when he had thus spoken the venera- ble Ananda addressed the Blessed One, and said : ' Vouchsafe, Lord, to remain during the kalpa ! live on through the kalpa, O Blessed One ! for the good and the happiness of the great multitudes, out of pity for the world, for the good and the gain and the weal of o;ods and men ! ' 50. ' Enough now, Ananda, beseech not the Ta- thagata ! ' was the reply. ' The time for making such request is past.' 51. And again, the second time, the venerable Ananda besought the Blessed One [in the same words. And he received from the Blessed One the same reply]. 52. And again, the third time, the venerable Ananda besought the Blessed One [in the same words]. 53. ' Hast thou faith, Ananda, in the wisdom of the Tathigata ?' ' Even so. Lord !' * Now why, then, Ananda, dost thou trouble the Tathaofata even until the third time ?' 54. ' From his own mouth have I heard from the Blessed One, from his own mouth have I received this saying, " Whosoever has thought out, Ananda, and developed, practised, accumulated, and ascended to the very heights of the four paths to saintship, and so mastered them as to be able to use them as in, MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 55 a means of (mental) advancement, and as a basis for edification — he, should he desire it, could remain in the same birth for a kalpa, or for that portion of a kalpa which has yet to run." Now the Tathagata has thought out and thoroughly practised them [in all respects as just now fully described], and might, should he desire it, remain alive for a kalpa, or for that portion of a kalpa which has yet to run.' 55. ' Hast thou faith, Ananda ?' ' Even so, Lord ! ' ' Then, O Ananda, thine is the fault, thine is the offence — in that when a suggestion so evident and a hint so clear were thus given thee by the Tathagata, thou wast yet incapable of comprehending them, and thou besoughtest not the Tathagata, saying, " Vouch- safe, Lord, to remain during the kalpa. Live on, O Blessed One ! through the kalpa for the good and the happiness of the great multitudes, out of pity for the world, for the good and the gain and the weal of gods and men." If thou shouldst then have so besought the Tathagata, the Tathagata might have rejected the appeal even to the second time, but the third time he would have granted it. Thine, there- fore, O Ananda, is the fault, thine is the offence!' A 56. * On one occasion, Ananda, I was dwelling at Ra^agaha, on the hill called the Vulture's Peak. Now there, Ananda, I spoke to thee, and said : A " How pleasant a spot, Ananda, is Ra^agaha ; how pleasant is this Vulture's Peak. \V hosoe ver has thought out, Ananda, and developed, practised, accu- mulated, and ascended to the very heights of the four paths to saintship, and so mastered them as to be able to use them as a means of (mental) advance- ment, and as a basis for edification — he, should he 56 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. desire it, could remain in the same birth for a kalpa, or for that portion of a kalpa which has yet to run. But even when a suggestion so evident and a hint so clear were thus given thee by the Tathd- gata, thou wast yet incapable of comprehending them, and thou besoughtest not the Tathagata, saying, ' Vouchsafe, Lord, to remain during the kalpa. Live on, O Blessed One ! through the kalpa for the good and the happiness of the great multitudes, out of pity for the world, for the good and the gain and the weal of gods and men.' If thou shouldst then have so besought the Tathagata, the Tathagata might have rejected the appeal even to the second time, but the third time he would have granted it. Thine, therefore, O Ananda, is the fault, thine is the offence!" 57. 'On one occasion, Ananda, I was dwelling at that same Rafagaha in the Banyan Grove — on one occasion at that same Ra^agaha at the Robbers' Cliff • — on one occasion at that same Ra^agaha in the Satta- panjn cave on the slope of Mount Vebhara — on one occasion at that same Ra^agaha at the Black Rock on the slope of Mount Isigili — on one occasion at that same Rafagaha in the Sitavana Grove in the mountain cave Sappaso/^^^ika — on one occasion at that same Ra^agaha in the Tapoda Grove — on one occasion at that same Ra^agaha in the Bambu Grove in the Squirrels' Feeding Ground — on one occasion at that same Ra^agaha in 6^ivaka's Mango Grove — on one occasion at that same Ra^raeaha in the Deer Forest at Maddaku/i'/t-Z/i.' A 58. * Now there too, Ananda, I spoke to thee, A ^ and said : " How pleasant, Ananda, is Ra^agaha ; how pleasant the Vulture's Peak ; how pleasant the III. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 57 Banyan tree of Gotama ; how pleasant the Robbers' CHff; how pleasant the Sattapa;^7/i cave on the slope of Mount Vebhara ; how pleasant the Black Rock on the slope of Mount Isigili ; how pleasant the mountain cave Sappaso7/rt^ika in the Sitavana Grove ; how pleasant the Tapoda Grove ; how plea- sant the Squirrels' Feeding Ground in the Bambu Grove ; how pleasant 6^ivaka's Mango Grove ; how pleasant the Deer Forest at Maddaku/'Mi ! 59. '"Whosoever, Ananda, has thought out and developed, practised, accumulated, and ascended to the very heights of the four paths to saintship, and so mastered them as to be able to use them as a means of (mental) advancement and as a basis for edification — he, should he desire it, could remain in the same birth for a kalpa, or for that portion of a kalpa which has yet to run." Now the Tathagata has thought out and thoroughly practised them [in all respects as just now fully described], and might, should he desire it, remain alive for a kalpa, or for that portion of a kalpa which has yet to run.' A 60. ' On one occasion, Ananda, I w^as residing here at Vesali at the Udena A'etiya. And there too, Ananda, I spoke to thee, and said : " How pleasant, Ananda, is Vesali ; how pleasant the A Udena A'etiya. Whosoever, Ananda, has thought out and developed, practised, accumulated, and ascended to the very heights of the four paths to saintship, and so mastered them as to be able to use them as a means of (mental) advancement and as a basis for edification — he, should he desire it, could remain in the same birth for a kalpa, or for that portion of a kalpa which has yet to run." Now the Tathagata has thought out and thoroughly practised 58 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. them [in all respects as just now fully described], and might, should he desire it, remain alive for a kalpa, or for that portion of a kalpa which has yet to run.' 61. ' On one occasion, Ananda, I was dwelling here at Vesali at the Gotamaka ATetiya — on one occa- sion here at Vesali at the Sattamba A'etiya — on one occasion here at Vesali at the Bahuputta A'etiya — on one occasion here at Vesali at the Sarandada A'etiya [and on each occasion I spoke to thee, Ananda, in the same words]. 62. ' And now to-day, Ananda, at the TTapala A'etiya, I spoke to thee, and said : " How pleasant, Ananda, is Vesali; how pleasant the Udena A'etiya; how pleasant the Gotamaka A'etiya ; how pleasant the Sattamba A'etiya ; how pleasant the Bahuputta A'etiya ; how pleasant the Sarandada A'etiya. Who- soever, Ananda, has thought out and developed, practised, accumulated, and ascended to the very heights of the four paths to saintship, and so mas- tered them as to be able to use them as a means of (mental) advancement, and as a basis for edification — he, should he desire it, could remain in the same birth for a kalpa, or for that portion of a kalpa which has yet to run. Now the Tathagata has thought and thoroughly practised them [in all respects as just now fully described], and might, should he desire it, remain alive for a kalpa, or for that portion of a kalpa which has yet to run." A 6t,. ' But now, Ananda, have I not formerly^ de- ^ That pa/iga^^' eva means 'formerly, already' is clear from Maha Vagga I, 7, i ; X, 2, 3, though its derivation would seem to render the meaning ' frequently, recurringly ' more natural. The III. MAIIA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 59 clared to you that it is in the very nature of all things, near and dear unto us, that we must divide ourselves from them, leave them, sever ourselves from them ? How then, Ananda, can this be pos- sible — whereas anything whatever born, brought into being, and organised, contains within itself the inherent necessity of dissolution — how then can this be possible that such a being should not be dis- solved ? No such condition can exist ! And this mortal being, Ananda, has been relinquished, cast away, renounced, rejected, and abandoned by the Tathagata. The remaining sum of life has been surrendered by him. Verily, the word has gone forth from the Tathagata, saying, " The final extinc- tion of the Tathagata shall take place before long. At the end of three months from this time the Tathagata will die!" That the Tathagata for the sake of living should repent him again of that saying — this can no wise beM' 64. ' Come, Ananda, let us go to the Ku^'agara Hall, to the Mahavana.' ' Even so. Lord ! ' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. Then the Blessed One proceeded, with Ananda phrase occurs pretty often. Trenckner (milinda-pailhaw, p. 422) proposes a correction into pa/ika/^/('' eva. Palu^^iti just below is noteworthy as an unusual contraction of palu^^e iti. ^ I do not understand the connection of ideas between this paragraph and the idea repeated with such tedious iteration in the preceding paragraphs. The two seem to be in marked contrast, if not in absolute contradiction. Perhaps we have here the older tradition ; and certainly the latter utterance of the two is more in accordance with the general impression of the character, and with the other sayings, of Gotama as handed down in the Pali Pi/akas. 6o THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. with him, to the Mahavana to the Ku/agara Hall : and when he had arrived there he addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : ' Go now, Ananda, and assemble in the Service Hall such of the brethren as reside in the neigh- bourhood of Vesali.' ' Even so. Lord,' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. And when he had as- sembled in the Service Hall such of the brethren as resided in the neighbourhood of Vesali, he went to the Blessed One and saluted him and stood beside him. And standing beside him, he addressed the Blessed One, and said : ' Lord ! the assembly of the brethren has met together. Let the Blessed One do even as seemeth to him fit.' 65. Then the -Blessed One proceeded to the Service Hall, and sat down there on the mat spread out for him. And when he was seated the Blessed One addressed the brethren, and said : ' Therefore, O brethren — ye to whom the truths I have perceived have been made known by me — having thoroughly made yourselves masters of them, practise them, meditate upon them, and spread them abroad ; in order that pure religion may last long and be perpetuated, in order that it may con- tinue to be for the good and happiness of the great multitudes, out of pity for the world, to the good and the gain and the weal of gods and men ! 'Which then, O brethren, are the truths which, when I had perceived, I made known to you, which, when you have mastered it behoves you to practise, meditate upon, and spread abroad, in order that pure religion may last long and be perpetuated, in order Iir. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 6 1 that It may continue to be for the good and the happiness of the great multitudes, out of pity for the world, to the good and the gain and the weal of gods and men ?' They are these : The four earnest meditations. The fourfold great struggle against sin. The four roads to saintship. The five moral powers. The five organs of spirittra.1 sense. The seven kinds of wisdom, and The noble eightfold path. These, O brethren, are the truths which, when I had perceived, I made known to you, which, when you have mastered it behoves you to practise, meditate upon, and spread abroad, in order that pure religion may last long and be perpetuated, in order that it may continue to be for the good and the happiness of the great multitudes, out of pity for the world, to the good and the gain and the weal of gods and men ! 66. And the Blessed One exhorted the brethren, and said : ' Behold now, O brethren, I exhort you, saying, "All component things must grow old. Work out your salvation with diligence. The final extinction of the Tathagata will take place before long. At the end of three months from this time the Tatha- gata will die !" ' My age is now full ripe, my life draws to its close : I leave you, I depart, relying on myself alone ! Be earnest then, O brethren ! holy, full of thought ! 62 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. Be Steadfast in resolve ! Keep watch o'er your own hearts ! Who wearies not, but holds fast to this truth and law\ Shall cross this sea of life, shall make an end of grief.' End of the Third Portion for Recitation 2. 1 Dhamma and vinaya. The Buddhist religion, as just summarised, and the regulations of the order. 2 It is of great interest to notice what are the points upon which Gotama, in this last address to his disciples, and at the solemn time when death was so near at hand, is reported to have lain such emphatic stress. Unfortunately we have only a fragment of the address, and, as it would seem from its commencement, only the closing fragment. This, however, is in the form of a summary, consisting of an enumeration of certain aggregates, the details of which must have been as familiar to the early Buddhists as the details of similar numerical terms — such as the ten command- ments, the twelve tribes, the seven deadly sins, the four gospels, and so on — afterwards were to the Christians. This summary of the Buddha's last address may fairly be taken as a summary of Buddhism, which thus appears to be simply a system of earnest self-culture and self-control. The following are the details of the aggregate technical terms used in the above summary, but it will be understood that the English equivalents used give rather a general than an exact representation of the ideas expressed by the Pali ones. To attempt more would demand a treatise rather than a note, and it has given me peculiar pleasure to learn, as these sheets are passing through the press, that my friend Dr. Morris intends to devote a book to the treatment of these seven 'Jewels of the Law,' as the A'ulla Vagga calls them (IX, i, 4), which form, when united, the bright diadem of Nirvawa. The four Earnest Meditations (/^attaro Satipa/Z/^ana) are — 1. Meditation on the body. 2. Meditation on the sensations. 3. Meditation on the ideas. 4. Meditation on reason and character. III. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 6^ The fourfold Great Struggle against sin is divided into /('attaro Samappad hana, which are — 1. The struggle to prevent sinfulness arising. 2. The struggle to put away sinful states which have arisen. 3. The struggle to produce goodness not previously existing. 4. The struggle to increase goodness when it does exist. The four Roads to Saintship are four means by which Iddhi (see above, § 3, note) is to be acquired. They are the A^attaro Iddhipada: 1. The will to acquire it united to earnest meditation and the struggle against sin. 2. The necessary exertion united to earnest meditation and the struggle against sin. 3. The necessary preparation of the heart united to earnest meditation and the struggle against sin. 4. Investigation united to earnest meditation and the struggle against sin. The five moral powers (pafi/^a Balani) are said to be the same as the next class, called organs (Indriyani). It is no doubt most remarkable that, in a summary like this, two classes out of seven should be absolutely identical except in name. The differ- ence of name is altogether too unimportant to account, by itself, for the distinction made. Either the currently accepted explanation of one of the two aggregate terms must be incorrect, or we must look for some explanation of the repetition other than the mere desire to record the double title. Is it impossible that the one class was split into two to bring the number of the classes up to the sacred number seven, corresponding to the seven Ratanas of a iTakkavatti? The details of both classes are — I. Faith. 2. Energy. 3. Thought. 4. Contemplation. 5. Wisdom. The seven kinds of Wisdom (satta Bo^^>^anga) are — I. Energy. 2. Thought. 3. Contemplation. 4. Investiga- tion (of scripture). 5. Joy. 6. Repose. 7. Serenity. The Noble Eightfold Path (ariyo a/Mangiko Maggo) forms the subject of the Dhamma-^akka-ppavattana-sutta, translated in this volume, and consists of — I. Right views. 2. High aims. 3. Right speech. 4. Upright conduct. 5. A harmless livelihood. 6. Perseverance in well-doing. 7. Intellectual activity. 8. Earnest thought. 64 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. Chapter IV. 1. Now the Blessed One early in the morning robed himself, and taking his bowl, entered Vesali for alms: and when he had passed through Vesali, and had eaten his meal and was returning from his alms-seeking he gazed at Vesali with an elephant look^ and addressed the venerable Ananda, and said: ' This will be the last time, Ananda, that the A Tathaeata will behold Vesali. Come, Ananda, let us go on to Bha;^^a-gama.' ' Even so. Lord !' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. And the Blessed One proceeded with a great company of the brethren to Bha;^rt'a-gama ; and there the Blessed One stayed in the village itself. 2. There the Blessed One addressed the bre- thren, and said: 'It is through not understanding and grasping four truths ^ O brethren, that we have had to run so long, to wander so long in this weary path of transmigration — both you and I.' 'And what are these four? The noble conduct of life, the noble earnestness in meditation, the noble kind of wisdom, and the noble salvation of freedom. But when noble conduct is realised and known, when noble meditation is realised and known, when noble wisdom is realised and known, when noble ^ Nagapalokita/^ Vesaliyaw apaloketva. The Buddhas were accustomed, says Buddhaghosa, on looking backwards to turn the whole body round as an elephant does ; because the bones in their neck were firmly fixed, more so than those of ordinary men ! 2 Or Conditions (Dhamma). They must, of course, be care- fully distinguished from the better known Four Noble Truths (Sa-^Mni) above, Chap. II, § 2. KV. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 65 freedom is realised and known — then is the craving for existence rooted out, that which leads to re- newed existence is destroyed, and there is no more birth.' 3. Thus spake the Blessed One ; and when the Happy One had thus spoken, then again the teacher said^: * Righteousness, earnest thought, wisdom, and freedom sublime — These are the truths realised by Gotama, far- renowned. Knowing them, he, the knower, proclaimed the truth to the brethren. The master with eye divine, the quencher of griefs, must die ! ' 4. There too, while staying at Bha^zrt'a-gdma, the Blessed One held that comprehensive religious dis- course with the brethren on the nature of upright conduct, and of earnest contemplation, and of intel- ligence. ' Great is the fruit, great the advantage of earnest contemplation when set round with upright conduct. Great is the fruit, great the advantage of intellect when set round with earnest contemplation. ^ This is merely a stock phrase for introducing verses which repeat the idea of the preceding phrase (see above, paragraph 32). It is an instructive sign of the state of mind in which such records are put together, that these verses could be ascribed to Gotama himself without any feeling of the incongruity involved. The last word means, completely gone out; and here refers to the ex- tinction of kilesa and ta«ha, which will bring about, inevitably, the extinction of being. Compare the passage quoted by Burnouf in Lotus de la Bonne Loi, p. 376. Probably the whole stanza formerly stood in some other connection, where the word parinibbuto had its more usual sense. See Buddhaghosa's note on IV, 23. 66 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. The mind set round with intelligence is freed from the great evils — that is to say, from sensuality, from individuality, from delusion, and from ignorance.' 5. Now when the Blessed One had remained at Bha;^^a-gama as long as he desired, he addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : * Come, Ananda, let us go on to Hatthi-gama.' 'Even so, Lord!' said Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. Then the Blessed One proceeded with a great company of the brethren to Hatthi-gama. 6. [And in similar words it is then related how the Blessed One went on to Amba-gama, to 6^ambu- gama, and to Bhoga-nagara,] 7. Now there at Bhoga-nagara the Blessed One A staj^ed at the Ananda A'etiya. There the Blessed One addressed the brethren, and said : ' I will teach you, O brethren, these four Great References ^ Listen thereto, and give good heed, and I will speak.' * Even so. Lord!' said the brethren, In assent^, to ^ The meaning of mahapadesa is not quite clear. Perhaps it should be rendered true authorities. I have followed Buddha- ghosa in taking apadesa as the last part of the compound. He says, mahapadesa ti maha-okase maha-apadese va. Bud- dhadayo mahante mahante apadisitva vuttani maha- karawani ti attho, 'the causes (authorities) alleged when referring to Buddha and other great men.' ^ I ought perhaps to have explained why I have ventured to differ from Childers in the rendering of the common word pa/i- su«ati. The root stu seems to have meant 'to sound' before it meant 'to hear;' and, whether this be so or not, pa/i-su«ati means not simply ' to consent,' but ' to answer (assentingly).' It IV. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 6/ the Blessed One, and the Blessed One spoke as follows : 8. ' In the first place, brethren, a brother may say thus: "From the mouth of the Blessed One himself have I heard, from his own mouth have I received it. This is the truth, this the law, this the teaching of the Master." The word spoken, bre- thren, by that brother should neither be received with praise nor treated with scorn. Without praise and without scorn every word and syllable should be carefully understood, and then put beside the scripture and compared with the rules of the order \ If when so compared they do not har- monise with the scripture, and do not fit in with the rules of the order, then you may come to the con- clusion, " Verily, this is not the word of the Blessed One, and has been wrongly grasped by that brother.'*" Therefore, brethren, you should reject it. But if they harmonise with the scripture and fit in with the rules of the order, then you may come to the conclusion, " Verily, this is the \vord of the Blessed One, and has been well grasped by that brother." This, brethren, you should receive as the first Great Reference. 9. ' Again, brethren, a brother may say thus : "In such and such a dwelling-place there is a com- pany of the brethren with their elders and leaders. From the mouth of that company have I heard, has been pointed out to me that answer was formerly 'and- swerian,' where swerian is probably not unrelated to the root svar, 'to sound.' ^ Sutte otaretabbani vinaye sandassetabbani, where one would expect to find the word Pi/aka if it had been in use when this passage was first written or composed. F 2 68 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. face to face have I received it. This is the truth, this the law, this the teaching of the Master." The word spoken, brethren, by that brother should neither be received with praise nor treated with scorn. Without praise and without scorn every word and syllable should be carefully understood, and then put beside the scripture and compared with the rules of the order. If when so compared they do not harmonise with the scripture, and do not fit in with the rules of the order, then you may come to the conclusion, " Verily, this is not the word of the Blessed One, and has been wrongly grasped by that company of the brethren." There- fore, brethren, you should reject it. But if they harmonise with the scripture and fit in with the rules of the order, then you may come to the con- clusion, "Verily, this is the word of the Blessed One, and has been well grasped by that company of the brethren." This, brethren, you should receive as the second Great Reference. lo. 'Again, brethren, a brother may say thus: "In such and such a dwelling-place there are dwelling many elders of the order, deeply read, holding the faith as handed down by tradition, versed in the truths, versed in the regulations of the order, versed in the summaries of the doctrines and the law. From the mouth of those elders have I heard, from their mouth have I received it. This is the truth, this the law, this the teaching of the Master." The word spoken, brethren, by that brother should neither be received with praise nor treated with scorn. Without praise and without scorn every word and syllable should be carefully understood, and then put beside the scripture and IV. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA, 69 compared with the rules of the order. If when so compared they do not harmonise with the scripture, and do not fit in with the rules of the order, then you may come to the conclusion, " Verily, this is not the word of the Blessed One, and has been wrongly grasped by those elders." Therefore, bre- thren, you should reject it. But if they harmonise with the scripture and fit in with the rules of the order, then you may come to the conclusion, "Verily, this is the word of the Blessed One, and has been well grasped by those elders." This, brethren, you should receive as the third Great Reference. II. 'Again, brethren, a brother may say, "In such and such a dwelling-place there is there living a brother, deeply read, holding the faith as handed down by tradition, versed in the truths, versed in the regulations of the order, versed in the sum- maries of the doctrines and the law. From the mouth of that elder have I heard, from his mouth have I received it. This is the truth, this the law, this the teaching of the Master." The word spoken, brethren, by that brother should neither be received with praise nor treated with scorn. Without praise and without scorn every word and syllable should be carefully understood, and then put beside the scripture and compared with the rules of the order. If when so compared they do not har- monise with the scripture, and do not fit in with the rules of the order, then you may come to the conclusion, " Verily, this is not the word of the Blessed One, and has been wrongly grasped by that brother." Therefore, brethren, you should reject it. But if they harmonise with the scripture 70 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. and fit in with the rules of the order, then you may come to the conclusion, "Verily, this is the word of the Blessed One, and has been well grasped by that brother." This, brethren, you should receive as the fourth Great Reference.' * These, brethren, are the Four Great References.' 12. There, too, the Blessed One held that com- prehensive religious talk with the brethren on the nature of upright conduct, and of earnest contem- plation, and of intelligence. ' Great is the fruit, great the advantage of earnest contemplation when set round with upright conduct. Great is the fruit, great the advantage of intellect when set round with earnest contemplation. The mind set round with intelligence is freed from the great evils — that is to say, from sensuality, from individuality, from delusion, and from ignorance.' 13. Now when the Blessed One had remained as long as he desired at Bhoga-gima, he addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : ' Come, Ananda, let us go on to Piva.' 'Even so, Lord!' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. And the Blessed One proceeded with a great company of the brethren to Pava. And there at Pava the Blessed One stayed at the Mango Grove of A'unda, who was by family a smith. 14. Now A'unda, the worker in metals, heard that the Blessed One had come to Pava, and was staying there in his Mango Grove. IV. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. ^I And A'unda, the worker in metals, went to the place where the Blessed One was, and saluting him took his seat respectfully on one side. And when he was thus seated, the Blessed One instructed, aroused, incited, and gladdened him with religious discourse. 15. Then he, instructed, aroused, incited, and gladdened by the religious discourse, addressed the Blessed One, and said : * May the Blessed One do me the honour of taking his meal, together with the brethren, at my house to-morrow.' And the Blessed One signified, by silence, his consent. 16. Then seeing that the Blessed One had con- sented, A^unda, the worker in metals, rose from his seat and bowed down before the Blessed One, and keeping him on his right hand as he past him, departed thence. 17. Now at the end of the night, A'unda, the worker in metals, made ready in his dwelling-place sweet rice and cakes, and a quantity of dried boar's flesh. And he announced the hour to the Blessed One, saying, ' The hour, Lord, has come, and the meal is ready.' 18. And the Blessed One robed himself early in the morning, and taking his bowl, went with the bre- thren to the dwelling-place of iTunda, the worker in metals. When he had come thither he seated him- self on the seat prepared for him. And when he was seated he addressed A'unda, the worker in metals, and said : ' As to the dried boar's flesh you have made ready, serve me with it, A'unda ; and as to the other food, the sweet rice and cakes, serve the brethren with it.' 72 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. * Even so, Lord ! ' said A'unda, the worker in metals, in assent, to the Blessed One. And the dried boar's flesh he had made ready he served to the Blessed One ; whilst the other food, the sweet rice and cakes, he served to the members of the order. 19. Now the Blessed One addressed ^unda, the worker in metals, and said : ' Whatever dried boar's flesh, ICunda, is left over to thee, that bury in a hole. I see no one, A'unda, on earth nor in Mara's heaven, nor in Brahma's heaven, no one among Sama;^as and Brahma;?as, among gods and men, by whom, when he has eaten it, that food can be assimilated, save by the Tath^gata.' ' Even so. Lord ! ' said A'unda, the worker in metals, in assent, to the Blessed One. And what- ever dried boar's flesh remained over, that he buried in a hole. '20. And he went to the place where the Blessed One was ; and when he had come there, took his seat respectfully on one side. And when he was seated, the Blessed One instructed and aroused and incited and gladdened A'unda, the worker in metals, with religious discourse. And the Blessed One then rose from his seat and departed thence. 21. Now when the Blessed One had eaten the food prepared by A'unda, the worker in metal, there fell upon him a dire sickness, the disease of dysen- tery, and sharp pain came upon him, even unto death. But the Blessed One, mindful and self- possessed, bore it without complaint. 22. And the Blessed One addressed the venerable A A Ananda, and said : ' Come, Ananda, let us go on to KA A > usniara. IV. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 73 'Even so, Lord!' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. 23. When he had eaten A^imda's food. The copper-smith's — thus have I heard — He bore with fortitude the pain, The sharp pain even unto death ! And from the dried flesh of the boar, as soon as he had eaten it. There fell upon the teacher sickness dire, Then after nature was relieved the Blessed One announced and said : ' I now am going on to Kusinara ^' 24. Now the Blessed One went aside from the path to the foot of a certain tree ; and when he had come there he addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : ' Fold, I pray you, Ananda, the robe ; and spread it out for me. I am weary, Ananda, and must rest awhile!' * Even so. Lord ! ' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One, and spread out the robe folded fourfold. 25. And the Blessed One seated himself on the seat prepared for him ; and when he was seated, he addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : ' Fetch me, I pray you, Ananda, some water. I am thirsty, Ananda, and would drink.' 26. When he had thus spoken, the venerable Ananda said to the Blessed One : ' But just now, ^ ' It should be understood,' says Buddhaghosa, ' that these are verses by the Theras who held the council.' And he repeats this at §§ 52, 56- 74 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. Lord, about five hundred carts have gone over. That water stirred up by the wheels has become shallow and flows fouled and turbid. This river Kakutthd, Lord, not far off, is clear and pleasant, cool and transparent, easy to get down into, and delightful. There the Blessed One may both drink the water, and cool his limbs ^' 2"]. Again the second time the Blessed One addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : ' Fetch me, I pray you, Ananda, some water. I am thirsty, Ananda, and would drink.' 28. And again the second time the venerable Ananda said to the Blessed One : ' But just now, Lord, about five hundred carts have gone over. That water stirred up by the wheels has become shallow and flows fouled and turbid. This river Kakuttha, Lord, not far off, is clear and pleasant, cool and transparent, easy to get down into, and delightful. There the Blessed One may both drink the water, and cool his limbs.' 29. Again the third time the Blessed One ad- A dressed the venerable Ananda, and said : ' Fetch me, A I pray you, Ananda, some water. I am thirsty, Ananda, and would drink.' A 30. ' Even so. Lord!' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One ; and taking a bowl he went down to the streamlet. And lo ! the streamlet which, stirred up by the wheels, was but just now become shallow, and was flowing fouled and turbid, A had begun, when the venerable Ananda came up to it, to flow clear and bright and free from all turbidity. ^ A^/^/iodika ti pasannodika: satodika ti madhurodhika: sitodika ti tanu- sitala-salila : setaka ti nikkaddama : supatittha ti sundara-tittha. (S.V. thri.) Comp. IV, 56. IV. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA, 75 31. Then Ananda thought: 'How wonderful, how marvellous is the great might and power of the Tathagata ! For this streamlet which, stirred up by the wheels, was but just now become shallow and flowing foul and turbid, now, as I come up to it, is flowing clear and bright and free from all turbidity.' ^2. And taking water in the bowl he returned towards the Blessed One ; and when he had come where the Blessed One was he said to him : ' How wonderful, how marvellous is the great might and power of the Tathagata ! For this streamlet which, stirred up by the wheels, was but just now become shallow and flowing foul and turbid, now, as I come up to it, is flowing clear and bright and free from all turbidity. Let the Blessed One drink the water ! Let the Happy One drink the water !' Then the Blessed One drank of the water. 1,7,. Now at that time a man named Pukkusa^ a young Mallian, a disciple of A/ara Kalama's, was passing along the high road from Kusinara to Pava. 34. And Pukkusa, the young Mallian, saw the Blessed One seated at the foot of a tree. On seeing him, he went up to the place where the Blessed One was, and when he had come there he saluted the Blessed One, and took his rest respect- fully on one side. And when he was seated ^ The Pukkusa caste was one of the lower castes of .Sudras. Compare Assalayana Sutta (Pischel), pp. 13, 35; BurnouFs 'In- troduction,' &c., pp. 144, 208 ; Lalita Vistara XXI, 17. But Bud- dhaghosa says Pukkusa must here be simply a name, as the Mallas were of the Khattiya caste. He adds that this Pukkusa was the owner of the five hundred carts that had just passed by ; and that A/ara Kalama was called A/ara because he was Digha-pihgalo, Kalama being his family name. 76 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. Pukkusa, the young Mallian, said to the Blessed One : ' How wonderful a thing is it, Lord ! and how marvellous, that those who have gone forth out of the world should pass their time in a state of mind so calm ! ' A 35. * Formerly, Lord, A/ara Kalama was once walking along the high road ; and leaving the road he sat himself down under a certain tree to rest during the heat of the day. Now, Lord, five hun- dred carts passed by one after the other, each close A to A/ara Kalama. And a certain man, who was fol- lowing close behind that caravan of carts, went up to A the place where A/ara Kalama was, and when he was come there he spake as follows to A/ara Kalama : * "But, Lord, did you see those five hundred carts goby?" * " No, indeed, sir, I saw them not." * "But, Lord, did you hear the sound of them ?" * "No, indeed, sir, I heard not their sound." * "But, Lord, were you then asleep ?" * " No, sir, I was not asleep," ' " But, Lord, were you then conscious." '"Yes, I was conscious, sir." * " So that you. Lord, though you were both con- scious and awake, neither saw, nor heard the sound of five hundred carts passing by, one after the other, and each close to you. Why, Lord, even your robe was sprinkled over with the dust of them !" ' " It is even so, sir." 36. 'Then thought that man: "How wonderful a thing is it, and how marvellous, that those who have gone forth out of the world should pass their time in a state of mind so calm ! So much so that a man though being both conscious and awake, IV. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. ']'^ neither sees, nor hears the sound of five hundred carts passing by, one after the other, and each close to him." ' And after giving utterance to his deep faith in A/ara Kalama, he departed thence.' 37. 'Now what think you, Pukkusa, which is the more difficult thing either to do or to meet with — that a man being conscious and awake should neither see, nor hear the sound of five hundred carts passing by, one after the other, close to him, — or that a man, being conscious and awake, should neither see, nor hear the sound thereof when the falling rain goes on beating and splashing, and the lightnings are flashing forth, and the thunderbolts are crashing ? ' '^'^. ' What in comparison, Lord, can these five hundred carts do, or six or seven or eight or nine or ten hundred, yea, even hundreds and thousands of carts. That certainly is more difficult, both to do and to meet with, that a man being conscious and awake should neither see, nor hear the sound thereof when the falling rain goes on beating and splashing, and the lightnings are flashing forth, and the thunderbolts are crashing.' 39. 'Now on one occasion, Pukkusa, I was dwelling at Atuma, and was at the Threshing-floor\ And at that time the falling rain begun to beat and to splash, and the lightnings to flash forth, and the thunderbolts to crash ; and two peasants, brothers, and four oxen were killed. Then, Pukkusa, a great A multitude of people went forth from Atuma, and went up to the place where the two peasants, brothers, and the four oxen, lay killed. _i Bhusagare ti kha/u-salaya/«. (S.V.Mr/.) 78 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 40. * Now at that time, Pukkusa, I had gone forth from the Threshing-floor, and was walking up and down thinking at the entrance to the Threshing- floor. And a certain man came, Pukkusa, out of that great multitude of people, up to the place where I was ; and when he came up he saluted me, and took his place respectfully on one side. 41. 'And as he stood there, Pukkusa, I said to the man : ' "Why then, sir, is this great multitude of people assembled together ? " ' " But just now, the falling rain began to beat and to splash, and the lightnings to flash forth, and the thunderbolts to crash ; and two peasants, bro- thers, were killed, and four oxen. Therefore is this great multitude of people gathered together. But where, Lord, were you ? " ' " I, sir, have been here all the while." ' " But, Lord, did you see it ?" * " I, sir, saw nothing." * " But, Lord, did you hear it ?" * " I, sir, heard nothing." ' " Were you then. Lord, asleep ?" '" I, sir, was not asleep." * " Were you then conscious, Lord ?" * " Even so, sir." ' " So that you, Lord, being conscious and awake, neither saw, nor heard the sound thereof when the falling rain went on beating and splashing, and the lightnings were flashing forth, and the thunderbolts were crashing." ' " That is so, sir." 42. ' Then, Pukkusa, the thought occurred to that man : IV. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 79 '" How wonderful a thing is it, and marvellous, that those who have gone forth out of the world should pass their time in a state of mind so calm! — so that a man beinof conscious and awake neither sees nor hears the sound thereof when the falling rain is beating and splashing, and the lightnings are flashing forth, and the thunderbolts are crashing." And after giving utterance to his deep faith in me, he departed from me with the customary demonstra- tions of respect.' 43. And when he had thus spoken Pukkusa, the young Mallian, addressed the Blessed One in these words: 'Now I, Lord, as to the faith that I had in A/ara Kalama, that I winnow away as in a mighty wind, and wash it away as in a swiftly running stream. Most excellent, Lord, are the words of thy mouth, most excellent! Just as if a man were to set up that which is thrown down, or were to reveal that which is hidden away, or were to point out the right road to him who has gone astray, or were to bring a lamp into the darkness, so that those who have eyes can see external forms — just even so, Lord, has the truth been made known to me, in many a figure, by the Blessed One. And I, even I, belake myself. Lord, to the Blessed One as my refuge, to the Truth, and to the Brotherhood. May the Blessed One accept me as a disciple, as a true believer, from this day forth, as long as life endures M' ^ ^ This is a stock phrase constituting the final answer of a hitherto unconverted man at the end of one of those argumentative dialogues by which Gotama overcame opposition or expounded the truth. After a discussion of exalted themes it fits in very appropriately ; here and elsewhere it is incongruous and strained. See below, V, 50. 8o THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 44. Now Pukkusa, the young Mallian, addressed a certain man, and said : ' Fetch me, I pray you, my good man, a pair of robes of cloth of gold, burnished and ready for wear.' ' So be it, sir ! ' said that man, in assent, to Pukkusa, the young Mallian ; and he brought a pair of robes of cloth of gold, burnished and ready for wear. 45. And the Mallian Pukkusa presented the pair of robes of cloth of gold, burnished and ready for wear, to the Blessed One, saying, ' Lord, this pair of robes of burnished cloth of gold is ready for wear. May the Blessed One show me favour and accept it at my hands !' * In that case, Pukkusa, robe me in one, and Ananda in one.' ' Even so. Lord ! ' said Pukkusa, in assent, to the Blessed One ; and in one he robed the Blessed One, A and in one, Ananda. 46. Then the Blessed One instructed and aroused and incited and gladdened Pukkusa, the young Mal- lian, with religious discourse. And Pukkusa, the young Mallian, when he had been instructed and aroused and incited and gladdened by the Blessed One with religious discourse, arose from his seat, and bowed down before the Blessed One ; and keep- ing him on his right hand as he past him, departed thence. 47. Now not long after the Mallian Pukkusa had gone, the venerable Ananda placed that pair of jj robes of cloth of gold, burnished and ready for wear, on the body of the Blessed One, and when it was so IV. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 8 1 placed on the body of the Blessed One it appeared to have lost its splendour ^ ! A 48. And the venerable Ananda said to the Blessed One : ' How wonderful a thing is it, Lord, and how marvellous, that the colour of the skin of the Blessed One should be so clear, so exceeding bright ! For when I placed even this pair of robes of burnished cloth of gold and ready for wear on the body of the Blessed One, lo ! it seemed as if it had lost its splendour ! ' 49. 'It is even so, Ananda. Ananda, there are two occasions on which the colour of the skin of a Tatha- gata becomes clear and exceeding bright. What are the two ?' 50. ' On the night, Ananda, on which a Tatha- gata attains to the supreme and perfect insight, and on the night in which he passes finally away in that utter passing away which leaves nothing whatever to remain — on these two occasions the colour of the skin of the Tathagata becomes clear and exceeding bright. 51. 'And now this day, Ananda, at the third watch of the night, in the Upavattana of Kusinara, in the Sala Grove of the Mallians, between the twin Sala ^ The commentator says, Bhagavato kayam upanamitan ti nivasana-parupana-vasena alliyapitaw : Bhagava pi tato eka;« nivasesi ekaw parupi. VitaX'/Jikawi (MS. kk/i) viya ti yatha (MS. tatha) vita/^^'iko ahgaro antanten' eva ^otiti bahi pan' assa pabha n' atthi, evam bahi pa-kk/iinna.- (MS. pay&/^/n««a-) pabha hutva khayati ti. My MS. of the text reads vitasikaw (as did YatramuUe's MS. here, and one MS. of FausboU's at G^ataka I, 153, 154). There the word is used of embers in which food is cooked, 'without flame,' = ' glowing, smoldering.' Vita/^-^^^ika, 'an eruption on the skin,' belongs to the root ka.rk. [II] G 82 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. trees, the utter passing away of the Tathagata will A take place. Come, Ananda ! let us go on to the river Kakuttha.' 'Even so. Lord!' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. 52. The pair of robes of cloth of gold. All burnished, Pukkusa had brought, Clad on with them the Master then Shone forth in colour like to gold ^ ! 53. Now the Blessed One with a great company of the brethren went on to the river Kakuttha ; and when he had come there, he went down into the water, and bathed, and drank. And coming up out again on the other side he went on to the Mango Grove. 54. And when he was come there he addressed the venerable A'undaka, and said : ' Fold, I pray you, A'undaka, a robe in four and spread it out. I am weary, A^undaka, and would lie down.' * Even so. Lord !' said the venerable A"undaka, in assent, to the Blessed One. And he folded a robe in four, and spread it out. ^ We have here the commencement of the legend which after- wards grew into an account of an actual ' transfiguration ' of the Buddha. It is very curious that it should have taken place soon after the Buddha had announced to Ananda his approaching death, and that in the Buddhist Sutta it should be connected so closely with that event ; for a similar remark applies also to the Trans- figuration mentioned in the Gospels. The Malalahkara-vatthu, for instance, says, 'His body appeared shining like a flame. Ananda was exceedingly surprised. Nothing of this kind had, as yet, happened. " Your exterior appearance," said he to Budha, " is all at once white, shining, and beautiful above all expression." "What you say, O Ananda, is perfectly true. There are two occasions [&c., much as above]. The shining light emanating from my body is a certain forerunner of this great event [his Parinibbana]." ' IV. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 83 55. And the Blessed One laid himself down on his right side, with one foot resting on the other ; and calm and self-possessed, he meditated on the idea of rising up again in due time. And the venerable A'undaka seated himself there in front of the Blessed One. 56. The Buddha to Kakuttha s river came, Whose clear and pleasant waters limpid flow, He plunged beneath the stream wearied and worn. The Buddha without equal in the world! When he had bathed and drunk, the teacher then Crossed o'er, the brethren thronging round his steps ; The Blessed Master, preaching the while the truth, The Mighty Sage came to the Mango Grove. There spake he to the brother A'undaka : ' Spread me the fourfold robe out as a couch.' Cheered by the Holy One, he quickly spread The fourfold robe in order on the ground. The Master laid him down, wearied and worn ; And there, before him, A'unda took his seat. 57. And the Blessed One addressed the vener- A able Ananda, and said : ' Now it may happen, Ananda, that some one should stir up remorse in A!'unda the smith, by saying, " This is evil to thee, Ai'unda, and loss to thee in that when the Tathagata had eaten his last meal from thy provision, then he died." Any such remorse, Ananda, in A'unda the smith should be checked by saying, " This is good to thee, isfunda, and gain to thee, in that when G 2 84 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. the Tathagata had eaten his last meal from thy provision, then he died. From the very mouth of the Blessed One, isfunda, have I heard, from his own mouth have I received this saying, ' These two offerings of food are of equal fruit, and of equal profit, and of much greater fruit and much greater profit than any other — and which are the two ? The offering of food which, when a Tathagata has eaten, he attains to supreme and perfect insight ; and the offering of food which, when a Tathagata has eaten, he passes away by that utter passing away in which nothing whatever remains behind — these two offerings of food are of equal fruit and of equal profit, and of much greater fruit and much greater profit than any others. There has been laid up by A'unda the smith a karma redounding to length of life, redounding to good birth, redounding to good fortune, redounding to good fame, redound- ing to the inheritance of heaven, and of sovereign power.'" In this way, Ananda, should be checked any remorse in A'unda the smith.' 58. Then the Blessed One perceiving how the matter stood, uttered, even at that time, this hymn of exultation : ' To him who gives shall virtue be increased ; In him who curbs himself, no anger can arise ; ' The righteous man casts off all sinfulness. And by the rooting out of lust, and bitterness. And all delusion, doth to Nirva;2a reach !' End of the Fourth Portion for Recitation, containing \i the Episode of A/ara. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 85 Chapter V. 1. Now the Blessed One addressed the venera- ble Ananda, and said : ' Come, Ananda, let us go on to the Sala Grove of the Mallas, the Upavattana of Kusinara, on the further side of the river Hira- nyavati.' ' Even so, Lord ! ' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. 2. And the Blessed One proceeded with a great company of the brethren to the Sala Grove of the Mallas, the Upavattana of Kusinara, on the further side of the river Hiranyavati : and when he had come there he addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : 3. ' Spread over for me, I pray you, Ananda, the couch with its head to the north, between the twin Sala trees \ I am weary, Ananda, and would lie down.' * Even so, Lord!' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. And he spread a ' According to the commentator ' tradition says that there was a row of Sala trees at the head (sisa) of that couch (mznka), and another at its foot, one young Sala tree being close to its head, and another close to its foot. The twin Sala trees were so called because the two trees were equally grown in respect of the roots, trunks, branches, and leaves. There was a couch there in the park for the special use of the (periodically elected) ra^a of the Mallas, and it was this couch which the Blessed One asked Ananda to make ready.' There is no further explanation of the term uttara-sisaka?;/, which may have been the name for a slab of wood or stone reserved on great occasions for the use of the leaders of the neighbouring republic, but available at other times for passers by. 86 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. coverine over the couch with its head to the north, between the twin Sala trees. And the Blessed One laid himself down on his right side, with one leg resting on the other ; and he was mindful and self- possessed. 4. Now at that time the twin Sala trees were all one mass of bloom with flowers out of season ^ ; and all over the body of the Tathagata these dropped and sprinkled and scattered themselves, out of reverence for the successor of the Buddhas of old. And heavenly Mandarava flowers, too, and hea- venly sandal - wood powder came falling from the sky, and all over the body of the Tathagata they descended and sprinkled and scattered them- selves, out of reverence for the successor of the Buddhas of old. And heavenly music was sounded in the sky, out of reverence for the successor of the Buddhas of old. And heavenly songs came wafted from the skies, out of reverence for the successor of the Buddhas of old ! 5. Then the Blessed One addressed the vene- rable Ananda, and said : ' The twin Sala trees are all one mass of bloom with flowers out of season ; all over the body of the Tathagata these drop and sprinkle and scatter themselves, out of rever- ence for the successor of the Buddhas of old. And heavenly Mandarava flowers, too, and heavenly sandal-wood powder come falling from the sky, and all over the body of the Tathagata they descend and sprinkle and scatter themselves, out of rever- ' Sabbaphaliphulla ti sabbe samantato pupphita mulato pa////aya yava agga eka>^'X7ianna ahesu;//. (S.V.////u.) Com- pare ekaphaliphullaw vana/;; at Gataka I, 52. V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. Sy ence for the successor of the Buddhas of old. And heavenly music sounds in the sky, out of reverence for the successor of the Buddhas of old. And hea- venly songs come wafted from the skies, out of rever- ence for the successor of the Buddhas of old ! ' A 6. ' Now it is not thus, Ananda, that the Tatha- gata is rightly honoured, reverenced, venerated, held sacred or revered. But the brother or the sister, the devout man or the devout woman, who continually fulfils all the greater and the lesser duties, who is correct in life, walking according to the precepts — it is he who rightly honours, reverences, venerates, holds sacred, and reveres the Tathagata with the worthiest homage. Therefore, O Ananda, be ye constant in the fulfilment of the greater and of the lesser duties, and be ye correct in life, walking according to the precepts ; and thus, Ananda, should it be taught.' 7. Now at that time the venerable Up^vana. was standing in front of the Blessed One, fanning him. And the Blessed One was not pleased with Upava?^a, and he said to him : ' Stand aside, O brother, stand not in front of me ! ' 8. Then this thought sprung up in the mind of the venerable Ananda: 'The venerable Upava/^a has long been in close personal attendance and ser- vice on the Blessed One. And now, at the last moment, the Blessed One is not pleased with Upa- va;2a, and has said to him, " Stand aside, O brother, stand not in front of me ! " What may be the cause and what the reason that the Blessed One is not pleased with Upava;^a, and speaks thus with him?' 9. And the venerable Ananda said to the Blessed One : ' The venerable Upava;/a has long 88 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. been in close personal attendance and service on the Blessed One. And now, at the last moment, the Blessed One is not pleased with Upava/^a, and has said to him, " Stand aside, O brother, stand not in front of me!" What may be the cause and what the reason that the Blessed One is not pleased with Upava;?a, and speaks thus with him?' ID. 'In great numbers, Ananda, are the gods of the ten world-systems assembled together to be- hold the Tathaorata. For twelve leagues, Ananda, around the Sala Grove of the Mallas, the Upavattana of Kusinara, there is no spot in size even as the pricking of the point of the tip of a hair which is not pervaded by powerful spirits \ And the spirits, Ananda, are murmuring, and say, " From afar have we come to behold the Tathagata. Few and far between are the Tathagatas, the Arahat Buddhas who appear in the world : and now to-day, in the last watch of the night, the death of a Tathagata will take place ; and this eminent brother stands in ^ Buddhaghosa explains that even twenty to sixty angels or gods (devatayo) could stand aragga-ko/i-nittudana- (MS. nittad- dana-) matte pi, 'on a point pricked by the extreme point of a gimlet,' without inconveniencing one another {zomzm a.nna?n avyabadhenti). It is most curious to find this exact analogy to the notorious discussion as to how many angels could stand on the point of a needle in a commentary written at just that period of Buddhist history which corresponds to the Middle Ages of Christen- dom. The passage in the text does not really imply or suggest any such doctrine, though the whole episode is so absurd that the author of the text could not have hesitated to say so, had such an idea been the common belief of the early Buddhists. With these sections should be compared the similar sections in Chapter VI, of which these are perhaps merely an echo. There is no comment on nittfidana, but there can be little doubt that Childers's conjectural reading is correct. V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 89 front of the Tathagata, concealing him, and in his last hour we are prevented from beholding the Tathagata ; " thus, Ananda, do the spirits murmur.' 11. ' But of what kind of spirits is the Blessed One thinkinor ?' O 12. ' There are spirits, Ananda, in the sky, but of worldly mind, who dishevel their hair and weep, who stretch forth their arms and weep, who fall prostrate on the ground, and roll to and fro in anguish at the thought : "Too soon will the Blessed One die ! Too soon will the Happy One pass away! Full soon will the Light of the world vanish away ^ \" ' A 13. ' There are spirits, too, Ananda, on the earth, and of worldly mind, who tear their hair and weep, who stretch forth their arms and weep, who fall pros- trate on the ground, and roll to and fro in anguish at the thought: "Too soon will the Blessed One die! Too soon will the Happy One pass away! Full soon will the Eye of the world disappear from sight!" 14. 'But the spirits who are free from passion bear it, calm and self-possessed, mindful of the saying which begins, " Impermanent indeed are all compo- nent things. How then is it possible [whereas any- thing whatever, when born, brought into being, and ^ ^akku/« loke antaradhayissati, on which there is no com- ment. It is literally, ' the Eye in the world will vanish away,' where Eye is of course used figuratively of that by the aid of which spiritual truths can be perceived, corresponding exactly to the similar use in Europe of the word Light. The Master is often called A'akkhuma, 'He with the Eye,' 'He of the spiritual Eye' (see, for instance, the last verses in this Sutta), and here by a bold figure of speech he is called the Eye itself, which was shortly about to vanish away from the world, the means of spiritual insight which was no longer to be available for the common use of all men. But this is, it will be noticed, only the lament of the foolish and ignorant. go THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. organised, contains within itself the inherent neces- sity of dissohition — how then is it possible that such a being should not be dissolved ? No such condition can exist !"]^ 15. 'In times past, Lord, the brethren, when they had spent the rainy season in different districts, used to come to see the Tathagata, and we used to receive those very reverend brethren to audience, and to wait upon the Blessed One. But, Lord, after the end of the Blessed One, we shall not be able to receive those very reverend brethren to audience, and to wait upon the Blessed One.' 16. 'There are these four places, Ananda, which the believing man should visit with feelings of rever- ence and awe. Which are the four ? 17. 'The place, Ananda, at which the believing man can say, "Here the Tathagata was born!" is a spot to be visited with feelings of reverence and awe. 18. ' The place, Ananda, at which the believing man can say, " Here the Tathagata attained to the supreme and perfect insight!" is a spot to be visited with feelings of reverence and awe. 19. ' The place, Ananda, at which the believing man can say, " Here was the kingdom of righteous- ness set on foot by the Tathagata ! " is a spot to be visited with feelings of reverence and awe. A 20. ' The place, Ananda, at which the believing man can say, " Here the Tathagata passed finally away in that utter passing away which leaves nothing whatever to remain behind !" is a spot to be visited with feelings of reverence and awe. ^ The words in brackets have been inserted from par. Ill, 63 above. See par. VI, 39 below. V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 9 1 21. ' And there will come, Ananda, to such spots, behevers, brethren and sisters of the order, or devout men and devout women, and will say, " Here was the Tathagata born!" or, " Here did the Tathagata attain to the supreme and perfect insight!" or, " Here was the kingdom of righteousness set on foot by the Tathagata !" or, " Here the Tathagata passed away in that utter passing away which leaves nothing whatever to remain behind!" 22. 'And they, Ananda, who shall die while they, with believing heart, are journeying on such pilgrim- age, shall be reborn after death, when the body shall dissolve, in the happy realms of heaven.' 23. ' How are we to conduct ourselves, Lord, with regard to womankind?' ' Don't see them, Ananda.' ' But if we should see them, what are we to do ?' ' Abstain from speech, Ananda.' ' But if they should speak to us, Lord, what are we to do ?' ' Keep wide awake, Ananda.' 24. ' What are we to do, Lord, with the remains of the Tathagrata ?' ' Hinder not yourselves, Ananda, by honouring the remains of the Tathagata. Be zealous, I beseech you, Ananda, in your own behalf! Devote your- selves to your own good ! Be earnest, be zealous, be intent on your own good ! There are wise men, Ananda, among the nobles, among the Brahmans, among the heads of houses, who are firm believers in the Tathagata ; and they will do due honour to the remains of the Tathagata.' 92 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 25. ^ ' What should be done, Lord, with the remains of the Tathaofata?' ' As men treat the remains of a king of kings, so, Ananda, should they treat the remains of a Tathagata.' ' And how, Lord, do they treat the remains of a king of kings^?' 26. 'They wrap the body of a king of kings, Ananda, in a new cloth. When that is done they wrap it in carded cotton wool ^. When that is done they wrap it in a new cloth, — and so on till they have wrapped the body in five hundred successive layers of both kinds. Then they place the body in an oil vessel of iron ^, and cover that close up with another ^ This conversation occurs also below (VI, 33), and the older tradition probably had it only in that connection. ^ King of kings is an inadequate rendering of ^akkavatti Ra^^a. It is a king whose power no other king can dispute, who is the acknowledged overlord in India. The idea can scarcely have existed before ^andragupta, the first ^akravarti, had raised himself to power. This passage, therefore, is a guide to the date at which the Maha-parinibbana Sutta assumed its present form. ^ Vihatena kappasena ti supho/itena kappasena: Kasika- vatthawz hi sukhumatta telaw na gawhati, tasma vihatena kappasena ti aha. 'As Benares cloth, by reason of its fineness of texture, does not take the oil, he therefore says, "with vihata cotton wool," that is, with cotton wool that has been well forced asunder.' That pho/ita is here the participle of the causal verb, and not of the simple verb, follows of necessity from its being used as an explanation of vihata, 'torn to pieces.' The technical use of the word, as applied to cotton wool, has only been found in this passage. It usually means ' torn with grief.' * Ayasaya tela-do«iya, where one would expect ayasaya, but my MS. of the Digha Nikaya confirms twice over here, and twice again below, § VI, 33, 35, the reading given by Childers. Buddha- ghosa says, Ayasan ti suva«;/a;«, suvawwamhi idha ayasan ti adhippeto, but here again we should expect the second time to find ayo or ay as aw. The meaning of the word is also not V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 93 oil vessel of iron \ They then build a funeral pile of all kinds of perfumes, and burn the body of the king of kings. And then at the four cross roads they erect a dagaba ^ to the king of kings. This, Ananda, is the way in which they treat the remains of a king of kings. ' And as they treat the remains of a king of kings, so, Ananda, should they treat the remains of the Tathagata. At the four cross roads a dagaba should be erected to the Tathagata. And whosoever shall there place garlands or perfumes or paint, or make salutation there, or become in its presence calm in heart — that shall long be to them for a profit and a joy.' 27. 'These men, Ananda, worthy of a dagaba^, are four in number. Which are the four ? * A Tathagata, or Arahat-Buddha, is worthy of a dagaba. A Pa/v'/C-eka-Buddha is worthy of a dagaba^. quite clear. It no doubt was originally used for bronze, and only later for iron also, and at last exclusively of iron. As ka?;/sa is already a common word for bronze in very early Buddhist Pali texts, I think ayasa or ayasa must here mean 'of iron.' When Buddhaghosa says it is here a name for gold, we can only conclude that iron had become, in his time, a metal which he might fairly consider too base for the purpose proposed. ^ Buddhaghosa has no note on pa/iku^^etva; but from its use at Gataka I, 50, 29: 69, 23, it must, I think, have this meaning. I am not certain to what root it ought to be referred. I should mention that pakkhipati seems to me never to mean in Pali, 'to hurl forth into, to throw forth/ but always ' to place (slowly and carefully) into.' ^ A solid mound or tumulus, in the midst of which the bones and ashes are to be placed. The dome of St. Paul's as seen from the Thames Embankment gives a very good idea of one of the later Buddhist dagabas. The Pali word here and below is Thupa. ^ A Pa-^/('eka-Buddha, who has attained to the supreme and per- fect insight ; but dies without proclaiming the truth to the world. 94 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. A true hearer of the Tathagata is worthy of a da- gaba. A king of kings is worthy of a dagaba, 28. ' And on account of what circumstance, A Ananda, is a Tathagata, an Arahat-Buddha, worthy of a dasfaba ? * At the thought, Ananda, " This is the dagaba of that Blessed One, of that Arahat-Buddha," the hearts of many shall be made calm and happy ; and since they there had calmed and satisfied their hearts they will be reborn after death, when the body has dissolved, in the happy realms of heaven. It is on account of this circumstance, Ananda, that a Tathagata, an Arahat-Buddha, is worthy of a dagaba.' 29. ' And on account of what circumstance, A Ananda, is a Pa/^Z'eka-Buddha worthy of a dagaba? A ' At the thought, Ananda, " This is the dagaba of that Blessed One, of that Pa/('-('eka-Buddha," the hearts of many shall be made calm and happy ; and since they there had calmed and satisfied their hearts they will be reborn after death, when the body has dissolved, in the happy realms of heaven. It is on account of this circumstance, Ananda, that a Pa/C'/('eka-Buddha is worthy of a dagaba. 30. ' And on account of what circumstance, Ananda, is a true hearer of the Blessed One, the Arahat-Buddha, worthy of a dagaba ? A * At the thought, Ananda, " This is the dagaba of that true hearer of the Blessed Arahat-Buddha," the hearts of many shall be made calm and happy ; and since they there had calmed and satisfied their hearts they will be reborn after death, when the body has dissolved, in the happy realms of heaven. It is on account of this circumstance, Ananda, that a true V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 95 hearer of the Blessed One, the Arahat-Buddha, is worthy of a dagaba. 31. 'And on account of what circumstance, Ananda, is a king of kings worthy of a dagaba ? A ' At the thought, Ananda, " This is the dagaba of that righteous king who ruled in righteousness," the hearts of many shall be made calm and happy ; and since they there had calmed and satisfied their hearts they will be reborn after death, when the body has dissolved, in the happy realms of heaven. A It is on account of this circumstance, Ananda, that a king of kings is worthy of a dagaba. ' These four, Ananda, are the persons worthy of a dagaba.' 32. ' Now the venerable Ananda went into the Vihara, and stood leaning against the lintel of the door^, and weeping at the thought : "Alas! I remain still but a learner, one who has yet to work out his own perfection ^. And the Master is about to pass away from me — he who is so kind ! " ' 2)3. Now the Blessed One called the brethren, and said : ' Where, then, brethren, is Ananda ?' The venerable Ananda, Lord, has gone into the ^ Kapisisawz. Buddhaghosa says, Kapisisakan ti dvara- baha-ko/iyaw? /^itam aggala-rukkhaw, 'a piece of wood fixed as a bolt at the top of the door posts.' The Sanskrit lexicographers give kapi-i-irsha in the sense of 'coping of a wall.' Compare Patimokkha, Pa/('ittiya, No. 19. The expression that Ananda went 'into the Vihara' at the end of a conversation represented as having taken place in the Sala Grove, would seem to point to the fact that this episode originally stood in some other connection. Buddhaghosa attempts to explain away the discrepancy by saying that Vihara here means Manda-la.. ^ Ananda had entered the Noble Path, but had not yet reached the end of it. He had not attained to Nirvawa. 96 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. Vihara, and stands leaning against the lintel of the door, and weeping at the thought : ' Alas ! I remain still but a learner, one who has yet to work out his own perfection. And the Master is about to pass away from me — he who is so kind !' 34. And the Blessed One called a certain brother, and said : ' Go now, brother, and call Ananda in my name, and say, " Brother Ananda, the Master calls for thee." ' 'Even so. Lord!' said that brother, in assent, to the Blessed One. And he went up to the place where the Blessed One was ; and when he had come A there, he said to the venerable Ananda : ' Brother Ananda, the Master calls for thee.' A * Very well, brother,' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to that brother. And he went up to the place where the Blessed One was, and when he had come there, he bowed down before the Blessed One, and took his seat respectfully on one side. 35. Then the Blessed One said to the venerable Ananda, as he sat there by his side : ' Enough, Ananda ! Do not let yourself be troubled ; do not weep ! Have I not already, on former occasions, told you that it is in the very nature of all things most near and dear unto us that we must divide ourselves from them, leave them, sever ourselves from them ? How, then, Ananda, can this be possible — whereas anything whatever born, brought into being, and organised, contains within itself the inherent neces- sity of dissolution — how, then, can this be possible, that such a being should not be dissolved .'* No A such condition can exist ! For a long time, Ananda, have you been very near to me by acts of love, kind and good, that never varies, and is beyond all V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 97 A measure. For a long time, Ananda, have you been very near to me by words of love, kind and good, that never varies, and is beyond all measure. For A a long time, Ananda, have you been very near to me by thoughts of love, kind and good, that never varies ^ and is beyond all measure. You have done well, Ananda ! Be earnest in effort, and you too shall soon be free from the great evils — from sensuality, from individuality, from delusion, and from io-norance M' 36. ^ Then the Blessed One addressed the bre- thren, and said : ' Whosoever, brethren, have been Arahat-Buddhas through the long ages of the past, there were servitors just as devoted to those Blessed Ones as Ananda has been to me. And whosoever, brethren, shall be Arahat-Buddhas In the long ages of the future, there shall be servitors just as devoted to those Blessed Ones as Ananda has been to me. A 37. 'He is a wise man, brethren, — is Ananda. ^ Advayena, which Buddhaghosa explains as not being that kind of love which is now one thing and now another, or which varies in the presence or the absence of the object loved. When the Buddha is called in the Amara Kosha I, i, i, 9, advaya- vadin, that must mean in a similar way, 'One whose teaching does not vary.' ^ Literally, thou shalt become an Anasava, that is, one who is free from the four Asavas, all which are explained above in § I, 1 2, from which I have taken the details suggested to a Buddhist by the word used. The state of mind to which an Anasava has reached is precisely the same, though looked at from a different point of view, as the state of mind expressed by the better known word Nirvana. 2 What follows is repeated in the Satipattha«a Vagga of the Sa;«yutta Nikaya; but in regard to Sariputta (Upatissa) and Moggallana, and reading savaka-yugaw for upa///rako. [II] H 98 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. He knows when it is the right time for him to come and visit the Tathagata, and when it is the right time for the brethren and sisters of the order, for devout men and devout women, for a king, or for a king's ministers, for other teachers or their disciples, to come and visit the Tathagata. 38. 'Brethren, there are these four wonderful and marvellous qualities in Ananda. Which are the four ? ' If, brethren, a number of the brethren of the order should come to visit Ananda, they are filled A with joy on beholding him; and if Ananda should then preach the truth to them, they are filled with joy at the discourse ; while the company of brethren is ill at ease, brethren, when Ananda is silent. * If, brethren, a number of the sisters of the order, or of devout men, or of devout women, A should come to visit Ananda, they are filled with joy on beholding him ; and if Ananda should then preach the truth to them, they are filled with joy at the discourse ; while the company of sisters is ill at A ease, brethren, when Ananda is silent. 39. ' Brethren, there are these four wonderful and marvellous qualities in a king of kings. What are the four ? ' If, brethren, a number of nobles, or Brahman, or |i heads of houses, or Sama;/as should come to visit a king of kings, they are filled with joy on behold- [j ing him; and if the king of kings should then speak, they are filled with joy at what is said ; while they are ill at ease, brethren, when the king of kings is silent. 40. ' Just so, brethren, are the four wonderful and: A marvellous qualities in Ananda. ' If, brethren, a number of the brethren of the V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 99 order, or of the sisters of the order, or of devout men, or of devout women, should come to visit Ananda, they are filled with joy on beholding him ; and if Ananda should then preach the truth to them, they are filled with joy at the discourse ; while the company of brethren is ill at ease, brethren, when A Ananda is silent. * Now these, brethren, are the four wonderful and A marvellous qualities that are in Ananda.' 41. When he had thus spoken \ the venerable Ananda said to the Blessed One : ' Let not the Blessed One die in this little wattel and daub town, in this town in the midst of the jungle, in this branch townships For, Lord, there are other great cities, such as A'ampa, Ra^agaha, Savatthi, Saketa, Kosambi, and Benares. Let the Blessed One die in one of them. There there are many wealthy nobles and Brahmans and heads of houses, believers in the Tathagata, who will pay due honour to the remains of the Tathagata ^' ^ From here down to the end of section 44 is found also, nearly word for word, in the beginning of the Maha-Sudassana Sutta, translated below; compare also INIaha-Sudassana Gataka, No. 95. ^ Kufl'f/a-nagarake ti pa/irupake sambadhe khuddaka- nagare: U^^ahgala-nagarake ti visama-nagarake. (S.V.fol. ihzu.) l^xxddz., if this explanation be right, seems to be merely an old and unusual form for kshudra, and the Burmese correction into khudda to be unnecessary: but I venture to think it is more likely to be=kufl'ya, and to mean a wall built of mud and sticks, or what is called in India, of wattel and daub. When Buddhaghosa explains u^^ahgala as 'lawless,' he is expressing his view that a town in the jungle is likely to be a heathen, pagan sort of place. ^ With reference to Childers's note in his Dictionary on maha- sala, with which every one must entirely agree, Buddhaghosa's H 2 lOO THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH A A 42. 'Say not SO, Ananda! Say not so, Ananda, that this is but a small wattel and daub town, a town in the midst of the jungle, a branch township. Long A ago, Ananda, there was a king, by name Maha-Sudas- sana, a king of kings, a righteous man who ruled in righteousness. Lord of the four quarters of the earth, conqueror, the protector of his people, possessor of the seven royal treasures. This Kusinara, Ananda, was the royal city of king Maha-Sudassana, under the name of Kusavati, and on the east and on the west it was twelve leagues in length, and on the north and on the south it was seven leagues in breadth. A 43. 'That royal city Kusavati, Ananda, was mighty, and prosperous, and full of people, crowded with men, and provided with all things for food ^ Just, A A Ananda, as the royal city of the gods, A/akamanda by name, is mighty, prosperous, and full of people, crowded with the gods, and provided with all kinds of food, so, Ananda, was the royal city Kusavati mighty and prosperous, full of people, crowded with men, and provided with all kinds of food. A 44. ' Both by day and by night, Ananda, the royal city Kusavati resounded with the ten cries ; that is to say, the noise of elephants, and the noise of horses, and the noise of chariots ; the sounds of the li explanation of the word will be interesting as a proof (if proof be needed) that the Ceylon scholars are not always trustworthy, He says, Khattiya-mahasala ti khattiya-mahasara sara- patta maha-khattiya, Eso nayo sabbattha. ^ The first three of these adjectives are apj^lied at G^ataka I, 29 ) (v. 212) to the religion of the Buddhas ; and I think the right | reading there must be phi taw, in accordance with the corrections in two MSS. as noted by Mr. Fausboll, and not pita;« as he has preferred to read. The whole set of epithets is often used of cities. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. lOI drum, of the tabor, and of the kite ; the sound of singing, and the sounds of the cymbal and of the gong ; and lastly, with the cry, " Eat, drink, and be merry ^ ! " A 45. ' Go now, Ananda, and enter into Kusinara, and inform the Mallas of Kusinara, saying, " This day, O Vase^///as, in the last watch of the night, the final passing away of the Tathagata will take place. Be favourable herein, O Vase///^as, be favourable. Give no occasion to reproach yourselves hereafter, saying, ' In our own village did the death of our Tathagata take place, and we took not the opportu- nity of visiting the Tathagata in his last hours.' " ' * Even so, Lord,' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One ; and he robed himself, and taking his bowl 2, entered into Kusinara attended by another member of the order. ^ This enumeration is found also at (rataka, p. 3, only that the conch shell is added there — wrongly, for that makes the number of cries eleven. The Maha-Sudassana Sutta has in the corresponding passage, like the Burmese MS. noted here by Childers, conch instead of cymbal. My MS. reads cymbal here. ^ Nivasetva patta--^ivara7/i adaya atta-dutiyo. Buddha- ghosa has, naturally enough, no comment on this oft-recurring phrase. It cannot be meant that he put on only his under-gar- ments, and carried his upper robe with him ; for then his shoulders would have been bare ; and it is quite against the rules to go into a village without all the robes having been put carefully on (Pati- mokkha, Sekhiya 1-3). I do not even understand how Ananda, with due regard to the rules of the brotherhood (see Patimokkha, Nisaggiya 21-29), could have had a spare robe then with him. And patta-z^ivara;;/ can scarcely mean simply 'bowl-robe,' refer- ring to the length of cotton cloth in which the bowl was carried over the shoulder ('Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 71). 'With both his under-garments on, he entered Kusinara duly bowled and robed' may be impossible English, but it probably correctly catches the 102 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 46. Now at that time the Mallas of Kusinara were assembled hi the council hall on some public affair ^ A And the venerable Ananda went to the council hall of the Mallas of Kusinara ; and when he had arrived there, he informed them, saying, ' This day, O Vase////as, in the last watch of the night, the final passing away of the Tathagata will take place. Be favourable herein, O Vase/^'/^as, be favourable. Give no occasion to reproach your- selves hereafter, saying, "In our own village did the death of our Tathagata take place, and we took not the opportunity of visiting the Tathagata in his last hours." ' 47. And when they had heard this saying of the venerable Ananda, the Mallas with their young men and maidens and their wives were grieved, and sad, and afflicted at heart. And some of them Avept, dis- hevelling their hair, and stretched forth their arms and wept, fell prostrate on the ground, and rolled to and fro in anguish at the thought : ' Too soon will the Blessed One die ! Too soon will the Happy One pass away ! Full soon will the Light of the world vanish away ! ' 48. Then the Mallas, with their young men and idea involved, though of course one (at least) of the under-cloths had been put on long before. See p. 122. A Thera never goes about in public alone, he is always accompanied by a Samawera. ^ Kena^id eva kara«iyena. Professor Pischel, in his edition of the Assalayana Sutta (p. i), prints this expression kena/('i deva- kara«iyena, and translates it (p. 28), 'for some religious pur- poses.' It seems to me that he has been misled by the commentary, which really presupposes the more correct division adopted by Childers. V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. IO3 maidens and their wives, being grieved and sad and afflicted at heart, went to the Sala Grove of the Mallas, to the Upavattana, and to the place where the venerable Ananda was, A 49. Then the venerable Ananda thought : ' If I allow the Mallas of Kusinara, one by one, to pay their respects to the Blessed One, the whole of the Mallas of Kusinara will not have been presented to the Blessed One until this night brightens up into the dawn. Let me, now, cause the Mallas of Kusinara to stand in groups, each family in a group, and so present them to the Blessed One, saying, " Lord ! a Malla of such and such a name, with his children, his wives, his retinue, and his friends, humbly bows down at the feet of the Blessed One." ' 50. And the venerable Ananda caused the Mallas of Kusinara to stand in groups, each family in a group, and so presented them to the Blessed One, and said : ' Lord ! a Malla of such and such a name, with his children, his wives, his retinue, and his friends, humbly bows down at the feet of the Blessed One.' 51. And after this manner the venerable Ananda presented all the Mallas of Kusinara to the Blessed One in the first watch of the night. 52. Now at that time a mendicant named Su- bhadda, who was not a believer, was dwelling at Kusinara. And the mendicant Subhadda heard the news : ' This very day, they say, in the third watch of the night, will take place the final passing away of the Sama/za Gotama.' 53. Then thought the mendicant Subhadda : ' This have I heard from fellow mendicants of mine, old and well stricken in years, teachers and I04 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. en. disciples, when they said : " Sometimes and full seldom do Tathagatas appear in the world, the Arahat Buddhas," Yet this day, in the last watch of the night, the final passing away of the Sama;/a Gotama will take place. Now a certain feeling of uncertainty has sprung up in my mind ; and this faith have I in the Sama/^a Gotama, that he, me- thinks, is able so to present the truth that I may get rid of this feeling of uncertainty.' 54. Then the mendicant Subhadda went to the Sala Grove of the Mallas, to the Upavattana of Kusi- A nara, to the place where the venerable Ananda was. 55. And when he had come there he said to the A venerable Ananda : ' Thus have I heard from fellow mendicants of mine, old and well stricken in years, teachers and disciples, when they said : " Sometimes and full seldom do Tathagatas appear in the world, the Arahat Buddhas." Yet this day, in the last watch of the night, the final passing away of the Sama?/a Gotama will take place. Now a certain feeling of uncertainty has sprung up in my mind ; and this faith have I in the Sama;^a Gotama, that he, methinks, is able so to present the truth that I may get rid of this A feeling of uncertainty. O that I, even I, Ananda, might be allowed to see the Sama;2a Gotama ! ' 56. And when he had thus spoken the vener- able Ananda said to the mendicant Subhadda : ' Enough ! friend Subhadda. Trouble not the Tatha- gata. The Blessed One is weary.' 57. And again the mendicant Subhadda [made the same request in the same words, and received the same reply] ; and the third time the mendicant Subhadda [made the same request in the same words, and received the same reply]. V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. IO5 58. Now the Blessed One overheard this con- A versation of the venerable Ananda with the men- dicant Subhadda. And the Blessed One called the venerable Ananda, and said : ' It is enough, A Ananda ! Do not keep out Subhadda. Subhadda, A Ananda, may be allowed to see the Tathagata. Whatever Subhadda may ask of me, he will ask from a desire for knowledge, and not to annoy me. And whatever I may say in answer to his questions, that he will quickly understand.' A 59. Then the venerable Ananda said to Subhadda, the mendicant : ' Enter in, friend Subhadda ; for the Blessed One gives you leave.' 60. Then Subhadda, the mendicant, went in to the place where the Blessed One was, and saluted him courteously, and after exchanging with him the compliments of esteem and of civility, he took his seat on one side. And when he was thus seated, Subhadda, the mendicant, said to the Blessed One : ' The Brahmans by saintliness of life ^ Gotama, who ^ Sama«a-br^hma«a, which compound may possibly mean Samawas and Brahmans as it has usually been rendered, but I think not necessarily. Not one of those here specified were Brahmans by caste, as is apparent from the Sumangala Vilasini on the Sa- maT/ila Phala Sutta, p. 114. Compare the use of Kshatriya- brahmawo, 'a soldier priest,' a Kshatriya who oflfered sacrifice; and of Brahma«o, absolutely, as an epithet of an Arahat. In the use of the word sama?/a there seems to me to be a hopeless confusion between, a complete mingling of the meanings of, the two roots j-ram and sa.m (which, in Pali, would both become sam). It connotes both asceticism and inward peace, and might best be rendered ' devotee,' were it not for the intellectual inferiority im- plied by that word in our language. A Samawa Brahman should therefore mean a man of any caste, who by his saintliness of life, by his renunciation of the world, and by his reputation as a reli- gious thinker, had acquired the position of a quasi Brahman, and I06 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. are heads of companies of disciples and students, teachers of students, well known, renowned, founders of schools of doctrine, esteemed as good men by the multitude — to wit, PCira/^a Kassapa, Makkhali of the cattle-pen, Aj^ita of the garment of hair, Ka/'/Cayana of the Pakudha tree, Sa/Xfaya the son of the Be- la////i slave-Qfirl, and Nioa/^///a of the Natha clan — have they all, according to their own assertion, thoroughly understood things ? or have they not ? or are there some of them who have understood, and some who have not ^ ? ' 6 1. 'Enough, Subhadda! Let this matter rest whether they, according to their own assertion, have thoroughly understood things, or whether they have not, or whether some of them have A understood and some have not ! The truth, Ananda, will I teach you. Listen well to that, and give ear attentively, and I will speak.' * Even so. Lord ! ' said the mendicant Subhadda, in assent, to the Blessed One. 62. And the Blessed One spake : ' In whatso- ever doctrine and discipline, Subhadda, the noble eightfold path is not found, neither in it is there found a man of true saintliness of the first or of the second or of the third or of the fourth degree ^. was looked up to by the people in the same way as that in which they looked up to a Brahman by caste. Compare further my 'Buddhist Birth Stories,' vol. i. p. 260; and also Mr. Beal's remarks in the Indian Antiquary for May, 1880; and Professor Max Muller's note on Dhammapada, verse 265. ^ Buddhaghosa has an exegetical note on abbhawjlamsu, but passes over those celebrated Six Teachers in silence. The little that is thus far known of them will be discussed in another place. ^ This refers to the four divisions of the Noble Eightfold Path. See above, chap. II, § 8, where their characters are described. The V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. IO7 And in whatsoever doctrine and discipline, Su- bhadda, the noble eightfold path is found, is found the man of true saintliness of the first and the second and the third and the fourth degree. Now in this doctrine and discipline, Subhadda, is found the noble eightfold path, and in it alone, Subhadda, is the man of true saintliness. Void are the sys- tems of other teachers — void of true saints. And in this one, Subhadda, may the brethren live the Life that's Right, so that the world be not bereft of Arahats ^ word translated ' man of true saintliness,' or ' true saint/ is in the text Sama;2 0, on which see the note on page 105. I am at a loss how to render the word adequately here. ^ Arahats are those who have reached Nirvawa, the 'supreme goal,' the ' highest fruit ' of the Noble Eightfold Path. To live ' the Life that's Right' (samma) is to live in the Noble Path, each of the eight divisions of which is to be samma, round, right and perfect, normal and complete. To live right (samma) is therefore to have — i. Right views, free from superstition. 2. Right aims, high and worthy of the intelligent and earnest man. 3. Right speech, kindly, open, truthful. 4. Right conduct, in all concerns of life. 5. Right livelihood, bringing hurt or danger to no living thing. 6. Right perseverance, in all the other seven. 7. Right mindfulness, the watchful, active mind. 8. Right contemplation, earnest thought on the deep mysteries of life. In each of these the word right is samma, and the whole paragraph being on the Noble Path, the allusion is certainly to this central doctrine of the Buddhist Dhamma. Buddhaghosa says that that bhikkhu samma viharati, who, having himself entered the Noble Path, leads his brother into it, and this is, no doubt, good Buddhism. But it is a practical appli-» cation of the text, a theological exegesis, and not a philological explanation. Even so it seems to lay the stress too much on ' bereft,' and too little on ' Arahats.' In the last words of the prose we seem to have a reminiscence of what were once verses, which may have run — SuiiTla pavada sama;/ehi ^nuQ] I08 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. * But twenty-nine was I when I renounced The world, Subhadda, seeking after good. For fifty years and one year more, Subhadda, Since I went out, a pilgrim have I been Through the wide realms of virtue and of truth. And outside these no really " saint" can be ^' * Yea, not of the first, nor of the second, nor of the third, nor of the fourth degree. Void are the systems of other teachers — void of true saints. But in this one, Subhadda, may the brethren live the perfect life, that the world be not bereft of those who have reached the highest fruit.' 63. And when he had thus spoken, Subhadda, the mendicant, said to the Blessed One : * Most excellent. Lord, are the words of thy mouth, most excellent! Just as if a man were to set up that which is thrown down, or were to reveal that which is hidden away, or were to point out the right road to him who has gone astray, or were to bring a lamp into the darkness, so that those who have eyes can see external forms; — just even so, Lord, has the truth been made known to me, in many a figure, by the Blessed One. And I, even I, betake myself, Lord, to the Blessed One as my refuge, to the truth, and to the order. May the Blessed One accept me as a disciple, as a true believer, from this day forth, as long as life endures !' Ime ka. samma vihareyyu bhikkhu, Asuwrio loko 'rahatehi assa. ^ I have followed, though with some doubt, Childers's punctua- tion. Buddhaghosa refers padesa-vatti to sama;/o; and it 0, not to padesa, but to magga, understood ; and it is quite pos- sible that this is the correct explanation. On samadhikani see the comment at Gataka II, 383. V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. IO9 64. 'Whosoever, Subhadda, that has formerly been a follower of another doctrine and then desires to be received into the hioher or the lower erade in this doctrine and discipline, he remains on probation for the space of four months ; and at the end of the four months, the brethren, exalted in spirit, receive him into the lower or into the higher grade of the order. Nevertheless in this case I acknowledoe the o difference In persons.' 65. ' If, Lord, whosoever that has formerly been a follower of another doctrine and then desires to be received into the higher or the lower grade in this doctrine and discipline, — if, in that case, such a person remains on probation for the space of four months ; and at the end of the four months, the brethren, exalted in spirit, receive him into the lower or into the higher grade of the order — I too, then, will remain on probation for the space of four months ; and at the end of the four months let the brethren, exalted in spirit, receive me into the lower or into the higher grade of the order!' 66. But the Blessed One called the venerable A A Ananda, and said: 'As it is, Ananda, receive Su- bhadda into the order!' 'Even so. Lord!' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the Blessed One. ^'-j. And Subhadda, the mendicant, said to the vene- A A rable Ananda : ' Great is your gain, friend Ananda, A great is your good fortune, friend Ananda, that you all have been sprinkled with the sprinkling of dis- cipleship in this brotherhood at the hands of the Master himself!' 68. So Subhadda, the mendicant, was received I lO THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. into the higher grade of the order under the Blessed One ; and from immediately after his ordination the venerable Subhadda remained alone and separate, earnest, zealous, and resolved. And e'er long he attained to that supreme goal of the higher life ' for the sake of which men go out from all and every household gain and comfort to become houseless wanderers — yea, that supreme goal did he, by him- self, and while yet in this visible world, bring him- self to the knowledge of, and continue to realise, and to see face to face ! And he became conscious that birth was at an end, that the higher life had been fulfilled, that all that should be done had been accomplished, and that after this present life there would be no beyond ! 69. So the venerable Subhadda became yet another among the Arahats ; and he was the last disciple whom the Blessed One himself converted^. End of the Hira7/;'^avatiya portion, being the Fifth Portion for Recitation. ^ That is, Nirva«a. Compare Mangala Sutta V, 11, and the Dharamapada, verses 180, 354, and above Chap. I, § 7. ^ Buddhaghosa says that the last five words in the text (the last tweh'e words in my translation) were added by the Theras who held the Council. On Subhadda's ordination he has the following interesting note: 'The Thero (that is, Ananda), they say, took him on one side, poured water over his head from a water vessel, made him repeat the formula of meditation on the impermanency of the body (Ta^a-pan-^aka-kamma/Mana»i ; see my "Buddhist Birth Stories," p. 161), shaved off his hair and beard, clad him in the yellow robes, made him repeat the " Three Refuges," and led him back to the Blessed One. The Blessed One himself admitted him then into the higher rank of the brotherhood, and pointed out to him a subject for meditation (kamma//^ana;«; see "Buddhist V. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. Ill Birth Stories," p. 147). He accepted this, and walking up and down in a- quiet part of the grove, he thought and meditated upon it, till overcoming the Evil Spirit, he had acquired Arahatship, and with it the discriminating knowledge of all the Scriptures (Pa/i- sambhida). Then, returning, he came and took his seat beside the Blessed One.' According to this, no set ceremony for ordination (Sahgha- kamma7«), as laid down in theVinaya, took place; and it is other- wise probable that no such ceremony was usual in the earliest days of Buddhism, 112 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. Chapter VI. T. Now the Blessed One addressed the venerable Ananda, and said : * It may be, Ananda, that in some of you the thought may arise, " The word of the Master is ended, we have no teacher more!" But A it is not thus, Ananda, that you should regard it. The truths and the rules of the order which I have set forth and laid down for you all, let them, after I am gone, be the Teacher to you.' 2. 'Ananda! when I am gone address not one another in the way in which the brethren have heretofore addressed each other — with the epithet, that is, of "Avuso" (Friend). A younger brother may be addressed by an elder with his name, or his family name, or the title " Friend." But an elder should be addressed by a younger brother as " Lord" or as " Venerable Sir.'' ' A 3. ' When I am gone, Ananda, let the order, if it should so wish, abolish all the lesser and minor precepts ^.' 4. ' When I am gone, Ananda, let the higher penalty be imposed on brother AV/anna.' ' But what. Lord, is the higher penalty ?' •^ In ^ulla Vagga XI, i, 9, 10, is related how the brotherhood formally considered the permission thus accorded to them, and resolved to adhere to all the precepts as laid down in the Buddha's lifetime. In his comment on this passage Buddhaghosa incident- ally refers to a conversation on the subject between Nagasena and Milinda Rao-a, but makes no mention of the work known as Milinda Pafiha. Compare Trenckner's edition of that v/ork, p. 142. VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. II3 A * Let A'/^anna say whatever he may hke, Ananda, the brethren should neither speak to him, nor exhort him, nor admonish him \' 5. Then the Blessed One addressed the brethren, and said : 'It may be, brethren, that there may be doubt or misgiving in the mind of some brother as to the Buddha, or the truth, or the path, or the way. Enquire, brethren, freely. Do not have to reproach yourselves afterwards with the thought, " Our teacher was face to face with us, and we could not bring ourselves to enquire of the Blessed One when we were face to face with him.'" And when he had thus spoken the brethren were silent. 6. And again the second and the third time the Blessed One addressed the brethren, and said : ' It may be, brethren, that there may be doubt or mis- giving in the mind of some brother as to the Buddha, or the truth, or the path, or the way. Enquire, brethren, freely. Do not have to reproach your- selves afterwards with the thought, " Our teacher was face to face with us, and we could not brine ourselves to enquire of the Blessed One when we were face to face with him." ' And even the third time the brethren were silent. ^ Compare Abulia Vagga I, 25-31: IV, 14, i : XI, i, 12-14. -Oanna is represented as an obstinate, perverse man ; so destitute of the proper ' esprit de corps ' that he dared to take part with the sisterhood, and against the brotherhood, in a dispute which had arisen between them. But after the social penalty here re- ferred to had been duly imposed upon him, even his proud and independent spirit was tamed ; he became humble : his eyes were opened ; and he, also, attained to the ' supreme goal ' of the Buddhist faith. [ri] I ,u^ 114 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 7. Then the Blessed One addressed the brethren, and said : 'It may be, brethren, that )ou put no questions out of reverence for the teacher. Let one friend communicate to another.' And when he had thus spoken the brethren were silent. A 8. And the venerable Ananda said to the Blessed One : ' How wonderful a thing is it, Lord, and how marvellous ! Verily, I believe that in this whole assembly of the brethren there is not one brother who has any doubt or misgiving as to the Buddha, or the truth, or the path, or the way !' 9. ' It is out of the fulness of faith that thou hast A A spoken, Ananda ! But, Ananda, the Tathagata knows for certain that in this whole assembly of the brethren there is not one brother vvho has any doubt or misgiving as to the Buddha, or the truth, or the path, or the way! For even the most back- ward, Ananda, of all these five hundred brethren has become converted, and is no longer liable to be born in a state of suffering, and is assured of final salvation \' 10. Then the Blessed One addressed the brethren, and said : ' Behold now, brethren, I exhort you, saying, " Decay is inherent in all component things! Work out your salvation w^th diligence ! " ' This was the last word of the Tathao-ata ! II. Then the Blessed One entered into the first ^ Compare above, Chap. II, § 7. By 'the most backward,' according to Buddhaghosa, the Blessed One referred to Ananda, and he said this to encourage him. VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. I 1 5 Stage of deep meditation \ And rising out of the first stage he passed into the second. And rising out of the second he passed into the third. And rising out of the third stage he passed into the fourth. And rising out of the fourth stage of deep meditation he entered into the state of mind to which the infinity of space is alone present ^. And passing out of the mere consciousness of the in- finity of space he entered into the state of mJnd to which the infinity of thought is alone present. And passing out of the mere consciousness of the infi- nity of thought he entered into a state of mind to which nothing at all was specially present. And passing out of the consciousness of no special object he fell into a state between consciousness and unconsciousness. And passing out of the state be- tween consciousness and unconsciousness he fell into a state in which the consciousness both of sensations and of ideas had wholly passed away. 12. Then the venerable Ananda said to the venerable Anuruddha : ' O my Lord, O Anuruddha, the Blessed One is dead!' ' Nay ! brother Ananda, the Blessed One is not dead. He has entered into that state in which both sensations and ideas have ceased to be !' 13. Then the Blessed One passing out of the state in which both sensations and ideas have ceased to be, entered into the state between con- sciousness and unconsciousness. And passing out of the state between consciousness and uncon- sciousness he entered into the state of mind to ^ G^y^ana, the full text and an explanation of which will be found in the translator's 'Buddhism,' pp. 174-176. ^ Compare above, Chap. Ill, §§ 37-42. I 2 Il6 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. which nothhig at all is specially present. And passing out of the consciousness of no special object he entered into the state of mind to which the infinity of thought is alone present. And passing out of the mere consciousness of the infi- nity of thought he entered into the state of mind to which the infinity of space is alone present. And passing out of the mere consciousness of the infinity of space he entered into the fourth stage of deep meditation. And passing out of the fourth stage he entered into the third. And passing out of the third stage he entered into the second. And passing out of the second he entered into the first. And passing out of the first stage of deep meditation he entered into the second. And passing out of the second stage he entered into the third. And passing out of the third stage he entered into the fourth stage of deep meditation. And passing out of the last stage of deep meditation he immediately ex- pired. 14. When the Blessed One died there arose, at the moment of his passing out of existence, a mighty earthquake, terrible and awe-inspiring : and the thunders of heaven burst forth. 15. When the Blessed One died, Brahma Saham- pati, at the moment of his passing away from exist- ence, uttered this stanza : ' They all, all beings that have life, shall lay Aside their complex form — that aggregation Of mental and material qualities. That gives them, or in heaven or on earth, Their fleeting individuality ! E'en as the teacher — being such a one, VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. I I 7 Unequalled among all the men that are, Successor of the prophets of old time, Mighty by wisdom, and in insight clear — Hath died M' ^ 16. When the Blessed One died, Sakka, the king of the gods, at the moment of his passing away from existence, uttered this stanza : ' They're transient all, each being's parts and powers, Growth is their nature, and decay. They are produced, they are dissolved again : And then is best, when they have sunk to rest^!' ^ Brahma, the first cause, the highest result of Indian theo- logical speculation, the one God of the Indian Pantheists, is repre- sented as using expressions full of deep allusions to the most characteristic Buddhist doctrines. The Samussaya is the result of the temporary collocation of the 'aggregations' (khandha) of mental and material qualities which give to each being (bhuto, that is, man, animal, god, ghost, fairy, or what not) its outward and visible shape, its individuahty. Loka is here not the world in our sense, but the 'locality' in the Buddhist universe which such an individual occupies until it is dissolved. (Comp. Chap. II, §§ 14, 34.) Brahma appears therefore as a veritable Vibha^^avadi. ^ On this celebrated verse see below the Introduction to Maha- Sudassana Sutta. It must be the original of the first verse in the Chinese work. Fa Kheu Pi Hu (Beal, Dhammapada, p. 32), though it is there so changed that every clause has lost its point. ' Whatever exists is without endurance. And hence the terms "flourishing" and "decaying." A man is born, and then he dies. Oh, the happiness of escaping from this condition!' The very meaning which is here the most essential connotation of sahkhara is lost in the phrase 'whatever exists.' By a misap- prehension of the, no doubt, difficult word Dhamma, which, however, never means ' term,' the second clause has lost its point. And by a grammatical blunder the third clause in the Chinese con- fines the doctrine, erroneously, to man. In a Chinese tale, called Il8 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 1 7. When the Blessed One died, the venerable Anuruddha, at the moment of his passing away from existence, uttered these stanzas : ' When he who from all craving want was free, Who to Nirva/^a's tranquil state had reached. When the great sage finished his span of life, No gasping struggle vexed that steadfast heart ! All resolute, and with unshaken mind, He calmly triumphed o'er the pain of death. E'en as a bright flame dies away, so was His last deliverance from the bonds of life M' 18. When the Blessed One died, the venerable Ananda, at the moment of his passing away from existence, uttered this stanza : ' Then was there terror ! Then stood the hair on end ! W^hen he endowed with every grace — The supreme Buddha — died ^ ! ' Ngan shih niu, translated by Mr. Beal, in the Indian Antiquary for May, 1880, the following verses occur; and they are possibly another reflection of this stanza : 'AH things that exist are transitory. They must of necessity perish and disappear ; Though joined together, there must be separation ; Where there is life there must be death.' ^ ^etaso Vimokho. Kena-^'i dhammena anavara;/a-vimo- kho sabbaso apawfiatti-bhavupagamo, says Buddhaghosa; that is, ' the deliverance which is free from the restraint of each and every mental quality completely vanishing away' (dhamma being here = saTifta and vedana and sahkhara; see 'Bud- dhism,' pp. 91, 92). See also below, p. 153, 2 In these four stanzas we seem to have the way in which the death of the Buddha would be regarded, as the early Buddhist thought, by four representative persons — the exalted God of the theologians ; the Jupiter of the multitude (allowing in the case of VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. II9 19 ^ When the Blessed One died, of those of the brethren who were not yet free from the passions, some stretched out their arms and wept, and some fell headlong on the ground, rolling to and fro in anouish at the thought : ' Too soon has the Blessed One died ! Too soon has the Happy One passed away from existence ! Too soon has the Li^ht eone out in the world ! ' But those of the brethren who were free from the passions (the Arahats) bore their grief collected and composed at the thought: 'Impermanent are all component things ! How is it possible that [they should not be dissolved] ? ' 20. Then the venerable Anuruddha exhorted the brethren, and said : ' Enough, my brethren ! Weep not, neither lament! Has not the Blessed One formerly declared this to us, that it is in the very nature of all things near and dear unto us, that we must divide ourselves from them, leave them, sever ourselves from them ? How then, brethren, can this be possible — that whereas anything whatever born, brought into being", and orgfanised, contains within itself the inherent necessity of dissolution — how then can this be possible that such a being should not be dissolved ? No such condition can exist ! Even the spirits, brethren, will reproach us -. each of these for the change in character resulting from their con- version to Buddhism) ; the holy, thoughtful Arahat ; and the loving, childlike disciple. ' Nearly = V, 11-14; and below, VI, 39. 2 Ugg/iayanti. I have followed the reading of my own MS., which is confirmed by the Sumangala Vilasini and the Mala- lahkara-vatthu. Vi^^/zayanti, which Childers reads, would be questionable Buddhism. The spirits do not become extinct ; that is, not as a general rule, as would be implied by the absolute state- I20 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. * But of what kind of spirits is the Lord, the venerable Anuruddha, thinking ?' 2 1. 'There are spirits, brother Ananda, in the sky, but of worldly mind, who dishevel their hair and weep, and stretch forth their arms and weep, fall prostrate on the ground, and roll to and fro in anguish at the thought : " Too soon has the ment, ' Even the spirits, brethren, become extinct.' It is no doubt true that all spirits, from the lowest to the highest, from the most insignificant fairy to the God of theological speculation, are re- garded as temporary. But when they cease to exist as gods or spirits (devata), they do not go out, they are not extinguished (vi^^-^ayanti); they continue to exist in some other form. And though that other form would, from the European point of view, be a different being, as there would be no continuity of conscious- ness, no passage of a ' soul' from the one to the other ; it would, from the Buddhist point of view, be the same being, as it would be the resultant effect of the same Karma. There would follow on the death of a devata, not extinction, but a transmutation of force, a transmigration of character, a passing on, an inheritance of Karma. Only in the exceedingly rare case of an anagamin, of which an instance will be found above. Chap. II, § 7, could it be said that a spirit becomes extinct. The expression ' of worldly mind,' here and above in V, ii, is in Pali paMavi-saTininiyo, an ambiguous phrase which has only been found in this connection. Buddhaghosa says merely, ' because they made (mapetva) an earth in heaven.' This gloss again may be taken either in a figurative or in a literal sense ; but, if not impossible, it is at least unlikely that the good commentator means calmly to state that the angels created a floor in the skies — for the greater convenience of tumbling ! The word seems to me also to be opposed to vitaraga, 'free from passion,' and I have therefore taken it in a spiritual sense. There is a third possibility, viz. that it is used in an intellectual sense, ' having the idea of the world present to their mind ;' and this would be in accordance with the more usual use of samli. But how easily, especially in Buddhism, the intellectual merges into the religious may be seen from such a phrase as mara^^a-sailnino, used at Mahavawsa 33 of the bhikkhup. Compare also above. III, 14. VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 121 Blessed One died ! Too soon has the Happy One passed away ! Too soon has the Light gone out in the world ! " ' A * There are spirits, too, Ananda, on the earth, and of worldly mind, who tear their hair and weep, and stretch forth their arms and weep, fall prostrate on the ground, and roll to and fro in anguish at the thoueht: " Too soon has the Blessed one died! Too soon has the Happy One passed away ! Too soon has the Light gone out in the world ! " ' But the spirits who are free from passion bear it, calm and self-possessed, mindful of the saying which begins, " Impermanent indeed are all component things. How then is it possible [that such a being should not be dissolved] ? " ' 2 2. Now the venerable Anuruddha and the vener- A able Ananda spent the rest of that night in religious discourse. Then the venerable Anuruddha said to A A the venerable Ananda : ' Go now, brother Ananda, into Kusinara and inform the Mallas of Kusinara, saying, ' The Blessed One, O Vase///^as, is dead : do, then, whatever seemeth to you fit ! ' ' Even so. Lord I ' said the venerable Ananda, in assent, to the venerable Anuruddha. And having robed himself early in the morning, he took his bowl, and went into Kusinara with one of the brethren as an attendant. 23. Now at that time the Mallas of Kusinara were assembled in the council hall concerning that very matter. And the venerable Ananda went to the council hall of the Mallas of Kusinara ; and when he had arrived there, he informed them, saying, ' The 122 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. Blessed One, O Vase////as, is dead ; do, then, what- ever seemeth to you fit ! ' 24. And when they had heard this saying of the venerable Ananda, the Mallas, with their young men and their maidens and their wives, were grieved, and sad, and afflicted at heart. And some of them wept, dishevelling their hair, and some stretched forth their arms and wept, and some fell prostrate on the ground, and some reeled to and fro in anguish at the thoueht : * Too soon has the Blessed One died! Too soon has the Happy One passed away! Too soon has the Light gone out in the world !' 25. Then the Mallas of Kusinara gave orders to their attendants, saying, * Gather together perfumes and garlands, and all the music in Kusinara ! ' 26. And the Mallas of Kusinara took the per- fumes and garlands, and all the musical instruments, and five hundred suits of apparel, and went to the Upavattana, to the Sala Grove of the Mallas, where the body of the Blessed One lay. There they past the day in paying honour, reverence, respect, and homage to the remains of the Blessed One with dancing, and hymns, and music, and with garlands and perfumes ; and in making canopies of their gar- ments, and preparing decoration wreaths to hang thereon \ ^ The dress of the Mallas consisted probably of mere lengths of muslin or cotton cloth ; and a suit of apparel consisted of two or, at the outside, of three of these — one to wrap round the loins, one to throw over the shoulders, and one to use as a turban. To make a canopy on occasions of state they would join such pieces to- gether; to make the canopy into a tent they would simply add walls of the same material ; and the only decoration, as simple as it VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 1 23 27. Then the Mallas of Kiisinara thought : ' It is much too late to burn the body of the Blessed One to-day. Let us now perform the cremation to-morrow.' And in paying honour, re- verence, respect, and homage to the remains of the Blessed One with dancing, and hymns, and music, and with garlands and perfumes ; and in making canopies of their garments, and preparing decoration wreaths to hang thereon, they past the second day too, and then the third day, and the fourth, and the fifth, and the sixth day also. 28. Then on the seventh day the Mallas of Kusinara thought : ' Let us carry the body of the Blessed One, by the south and outside, to a spot on the south, and outside of the city, — paying it honour, and reverence, and respect, and homage, with dance and song and music, with garlands and perfumes, — and there, to the south of the city, let us perform the cremation ceremony ! ' 29. And thereupon eight chieftains among the Mallas bathed their heads, and clad themselves in new crarments with the intention of bearinof the body of the Blessed One. But, behold, they could not lift it up ! 30. Then the Mallas of Kusinara said to the venerable Anuruddha : 'What, Lord, can be the reason, what can be the cause that eight chieftains of the Mallas who have bathed their heads, and clad themselves in new garments with the intention is beautiful, would be wreaths of flowers, or single lotuses, hanging from the roof, or stretched along the sides. 124 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. of bearing the body of the Blessed One, are unable to lift it up ? ' ' It is because you, O Vase///^as, have one pur- pose, and the spirits have another purpose.' 31. ' But what, Lord, is the purpose of the spirits?' ' Your purpose, O Vase////as, is this. Let us carry the body of the Blessed One, by the south and out- side, to a spot on the south, and outside of the city, — paying it honour, and reverence, and respect, and homage, with dance and song and music, with gar- lands and perfumes, — and there, to the south of the city, let us perform the cremation ceremony. But the purpose of the spirits, Vase///ms, is this, Let us carry the body of the Blessed One by the north to the north of the city, and entering the city by the north gate, let us bring it through the midst of the city into the midst thereof. And going out again by the eastern gate, — paying honour, and reverence, and respect, and homage to the body of the Blessed One, with heavenly dance, and song, and music, and garlands, and perfumes, — let us carry it to the shrine of the Mallas called Maku/a-bandhana, to the east of the city, and there let us perform the crema- tion ceremony.' ' Even according to the purpose of the spirits, so, Lord, let it be ! ' 32. Then immediately all Kusinara down even to the dust bins and rubbish heaps became strewn knee-deep with Mandarava flowers from heaven ! and while both the spirits from the skies, and the Mallas of Kusinara upon earth, paid honour, and reverence, and respect, and homage to the body of the Blessed One, with dance and song and music, with garlands and with perfumes, they carried the VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 1 25 body by the north to the north of the city; and entering the city by the north gate they carried it through the midst of the city into the midst thereof; and going out again by the eastern gate they carried it to the shrine of the Mallas, called Maku/a-bandhana ; and there, to the east of the city, they laid down the body of the Blessed One ^ S3. ^ Then the Mallas of Kusinara said to the A venerable Ananda : ' What should be done, Lord, with the remains of the Tathagata ? ' ' As men treat the remains of a king of kings, so, Vase///^as, should they treat the remains of a Tathagata.' ' And how, Lord, do they treat the remains of a kino- of kino;-s ? ' ' They wrap the body of a king of kings, Vase///^as, in a new cloth. When that is done they wrap it in cotton wool. When that is done they wrap it in a new cloth, — and so on till they have wrapped the body in five hundred successive layers of both kinds. Then they place the body in an oil vessel of iron, and cover that close up with another oil vessel of iron. They then build a funeral pile of all kinds of perfumes, and burn the body of the king of kings. And then at the four cross roads they erect a dagaba to the king of kings. This, Vase^'///as, is the way in which they treat the remains of a king of kings. ' And as they treat the remains of a king of kings, so, Vase^'Z/ms, should they treat the remains of the ^ The point of this interesting legend is that the inhabitants of an Indian village of that time would have considered it a desecra- tion or pollution to bring a dead body into or through their village. ^ Compare Chap.V, §§ 25-30. 126 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. Tathagata. At the four cross roads a dagaba should be erected to the Tathagata. And whosoever shall there place garlands or perfumes or paint, or make salutation there, or become in its presence calm in heart — that shall long be to them for a profit and a joy.' 34. Therefore the Mallas gave orders to their attendants, saying, ' Gather together all the carded cotton wool of the Mallas!' 35. Then the Mallas of Kusinara wrapped the body of the Blessed One in a new cloth. And when that was done, they wrapped it in cotton wool. And when that was done, they wrapped it in a new cloth, — and so on till they had wrapped the body of the Blessed One in five hundred layers of both kinds. And then they placed the body in an oil vessel of iron, and covered that close up with another oil vessel of iron. And then they built a funeral pile of all kinds of perfumes, and upon it they placed the body of the Blessed One. ^6. Now at that time the venerable Maha Kas- sapa was journeying along the high road from Pava to Kusinara with a great company of the brethren, with about five hundred of the brethren. And the venerable Maha Kassapa left the high road, and sat himself down at the foot of a certain tree. 37. Just at that time a certain naked ascetic who had picked up a Mandarava flower in Kusinara was coming along the high road to Pava. 38. And the venerable Maha Kassapa saw the naked ascetic coming in the distance ; and when he had seen him he said to the naked ascetic : ' O friend ! surely thou knowest our Master ?' VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 12/ ' Yea, friend ! I know him. This day the Sama/^a Gotama has been dead a week ! That is how I obtained this Mandarava flower.' 39. And immediately of those of the brethren w^ho were not yet free from the passions, some stretched out their arms and wept, and some fell headlong on the ground, and some reeled to and fro in anp-uish at the thouoht : ' Too soon has the Blessed One died ! Too soon has the Happy One passed away from existence ! Too soon has the Lioht eone out in the world!' But those of the brethren who were free from the passions (the Arahats) bore their grief collected and composed at the thought : ' Impermanent are all component things ! How is it possible that they should not be dissolved ? ' 40. Now at that time a brother named Subhadda, who had been received into the order in his old age, was seated there In their company ^ And Subhadda the old addressed the brethren, and said: * Enough, brethren! Weep not, neither lament ! We are well rid of the great Sama;^a. We used to be annoyed by being told, " This beseems you, this beseems you not." But now we shall be able to do whatever we like ; and what we do not like, that we shall not have to do !' ^ At p. xxvi of the Introduction to his edition of the Maha Vagga, Dr. Oldenberg identifies this Subhadda with Subhadda the last convert, mentioned above in Chap. V, §§ 52-68. Tliey are different persons ; the last convert being represented as a young man of high character, incapable of the conduct here ascribed to this Subhadda. The last convert was a Brahman, traditionally supposed to be younger brother to Anna. Kondailila, the first convert ; this Subhadda had been a barber in the village Atuma. 128 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 41. But the venerable Maha Kassapa addressed the brethren, and said : ' Enough, my brethren ! Weep not, neither lament! Has not the Blessed One formerly declared this to us, that it is in the very nature of all things, near and dear unto us, that we must divide ourselves from them, leave them, sever ourselves from them? How then, brethren, can this be possible — that whereas any- thing whatever born, brought into being, and or- ganised contains within itself the inherent necessity of dissolution — how then can this be possible that such a being should not be dissolved ? No such condition can exist !' 42. Now just at that time four chieftains of the Mallas had bathed their heads and clad themselves in new garments with the intention of setting on fire the funeral pile of the Blessed One. But, behold, they were unable to set it alight ! 43. Then the Mallas of Kusinara said to the venerable Anuruddha : ' What, Lord, can be the reason, and what the cause, that four chieftains of the Mallas who have bathed their heads, and clad themselves in new garments, with the intention of » setting on fire the funeral pile of the Blessed One, are unable to set it on fire ? ' Tt is because you, O Vase///^as, have one purpose, and the spirits have another purpose.' 44. 'But what. Lord, is the purpose of the spirits?' ' The purpose of the spirits, O Vase///^as, is this : That venerable brother Maha Kassapa is now journeying along the high road from Pava to Kusi- nari with a great company of the brethren, with five hundred of the brethren. The funeral pile of VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 1 29 the Blessed One shall not catch fire, until the venera- ble Maha Kassapa shall have been able reverently to salute the sacred feet of the Blessed One.' ' Even according to the purpose of the spirits, so, Lord, let it be !' 45. Then the venerable Maha Kassapa went on to Maku/a-bandhana of Kusinara, to the shrine of the Mallas, to the place where the funeral pile of the Blessed One was. And when he had come up to it, he arranged his robe on one shoulder ; and bowing down with clasped hands he thrice walked reverently round the pile ; and then, uncovering the feet, he bowed down in reverence at the feet of the Blessed One. 46. And those five hundred brethren arranged their robes on one shoulder ; and bowing down with clasped hands, they thrice walked reverently round the pile, and then bowed down in reverence at the feet of the Blessed One. 47. And when the homage of the venerable Maha Kassapa and of those five hundred brethren was ended, the funeral pile of the Blessed One caught fire of itself^ ^ It is possible that we have here the survival of some ancient custom. Spence Hardy appropriately refers to a ceremony among Jews (of what place or time is not mentioned) in the following terms : ' Just before a Jew is taken out of the house to be buried, the relatives and acquaintances of the departed stand round the coffin; when the feet are uncovered; and each in rotation lays hold of the great toes, and begs pardon for any offence given to the deceased, and requests a favourable mention of them in the next world.' (Manual of Buddhism, p. 348.) The Buddhist bhikkhus in Siam and the great majority of those in Ceylon (the adherents of the Siyam-samagama) always keep one shoulder uncovered. It is evident that the bhikkhus 130 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. 48. Now as the body of the Blessed One burned itself away, from the skin and the integument, and the flesh, and the nerves, and the fluid of the joints, neither soot nor ash was seen : and only the bones remained behind. Just as one sees no soot or ash when glue or oil is burned ; so, as the body of the Blessed One burned itself away, from the skin and the integu- ment, and the flesh, and the nerves, and the fluid of the joints, neither soot nor ash was seen : and only the bones remained behind. And of those five hundred pieces of raiment the very innermost and outermost were both consumed. 49. And when the body of the Blessed One had been burnt up, there came down streams of water from the sky and extinguished the funeral pile of the Blessed One ; and there burst forth streams of water from the storehouse of the waters (beneath the earth), and extinguished the funeral pile of the Blessed One. The Mallas of Kusinara also brought water scented with all kinds of perfumes, and ex- tinguished the funeral pile of the Blessed One \ in Burma, and those in Ceylon who belong to the Amara-pura- samagama, are more in accordance with ancient custom in wearing the robe ordinarily over both shoulders. ^ There is something very quaint in the way in which the faithful Mallas are here represented as bringing coals to Newcastle. The 'storehouse of the waters' is in Pali udaka-sala, on which Buddhaghosa has two theories : first, that the Sala trees around shed down a miraculous rain from their trunks and branches and leaves; and next, that the waters burst up from the earth and became as it were a diadem of crystal round the pyre. On the belief that water thus burst up miraculously through the earth, see 'Buddhist Birth Stories,' pp. 64, 67. If the reading be correct it is scarcely possible that sala can here have anything to do with Sala trees ; but the other interpretation is open to the objections VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. I ^ I 50. Then the Mallas of Kusinara surrounded the bones of the Blessed One In their council hall with a lattice work of spears, and with a rampart of bows ; and there for seven days they paid honour and reverence and respect and homage to them with dance and song and music, and with garlands and perfumes. 51. Now the king of Magadha, A^atasattu, the son of the queen of the Videha clan, heard the news that the Blessed One had died at Kusinara. Then the king of Magadha, A^atasattu, the son of the queen of the Videha clan, sent a mes- senger to the Mallas, saying, ' The Blessed One belonged to the soldier caste, and I too am of the soldier caste. I am worthy to receive a portion of the relics of the Blessed One. Over the remains of the Blessed One will I put up a sacred cairn, and in their honour will I celebrate a feast ^ !' 52. And the 'LlM/mvls of Vesali heard the news that the Blessed One had died at Kusinara. And the Li/l'/^/^avis of Vesali sent a messenger to the Mallas, saying, ' The Blessed One belonged to the soldier caste, and we too are of the soldier caste. We are worthy to receive a portion of the relics of the Blessed One. Over the remains of the Blessed One will we put up a sacred cairn, and in their honour will we celebrate a feast!' 53. And the Sakiyas of Kapila-vatthu heard the that sala means an open hall rather than a storehouse, and that the belief in a ' storehouse of water ' has not, as yet, been found elsewhere. ^ The commentator gives a long account of A^atasattu's pro- ceedings on this occasion. K 2 132 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. news that the Blessed One had died at Kusinara. And the Sal^iyas of Kapila-vatthu sent a messenger to the Mallas, saying, ' The Blessed One was the pride of our race. We are worthy to receive a portion of the relics of the Blessed One. Over the remains of the Blessed One will we put up a sacred cairn, and in their honour will we celebrate a feast!' 54. And the Bulls of Allakappa heard the news that the Blessed One had died at Kusinara. And the Bulis of Allakappa sent a messenger to the Mallas, saying, ' The Blessed One belonged to the soldier caste, and we too are of the soldier caste. We are worthy to receive a portion of the relics of the Blessed One. Over the remains of the Blessed One will we put up a sacred cairn, and in their honour will we celebrate a feast!' 55. And the Koliyas of Ramagama heard the news that the Blessed One had died at Kusinari. And the Koliyas of Ramagama sent a messenger to the Mallas, saying, ' The Blessed One belonged to the soldier caste, and we too are of the soldier caste. We are worthy to receive a portion of the relics of the Blessed One. Over the remains of the Blessed One will we put up a sacred cairn, and in their honour will we celebrate a feast !' 56. And the Brahman of Ve//^adipa heard the news that the Blessed One had died at Kusinara. And the Brahman of Ve//^adipa sent a messenger to the Mallas, saying, ' The Blessed One belonged to the soldier caste, and I am a Brahman. I am worthy to receive a portion of the relics of the Blessed One. Over the remains of the Blessed One will I put up a sacred cairn, and in their honour will I celebrate a feast!' VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 1 33 57. And the Mallas of Pava heard the news that the Blessed One had died at Kuslnara. Then the Mallas of Pava sent a messenofer to the Mallas, saying, ' The Blessed One belonged to the soldier caste, and we too are of the soldier caste. We are worthy to receive a portion of the relics of the Blessed One. Over the remains of the Blessed One will we put up a sacred cairn, and in their honour will we celebrate a feast ! ' 58. When they heard these things the Mallas of Kusinara spoke to the assembled brethren, saying, * The Blessed One died in our village domain. We will not give away any part of the remains of the Blessed One!' 59. When they had thus spoken, Do;^a the Brah- man addressed the assembled brethren, and said : ' Hear, reverend sirs, one single word from me. Forbearance was our Buddha wont to teach. Unseemly is it that over the division Of the remains of him who was the best of beings Strife should arise, and wounds, and war ! Let us all, sirs, with one accord unite In friendly harmony to make eight portions. Wide spread let Th^ipas rise in every land That in the Enlightened One mankind may trust!' 60. ' Do thou then, O Brahman, thyself divide the remains of the Blessed One equally into eight parts, with fair division ^.' * Be it so, sir!' said Dona., in assent, to the assem- ^ Here again the commentator expands and adds to the com- paratively simple version of the text. 134 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. bled brethren. And he divided the remains of the Blessed One equally into eight parts, with fair division. And he said to them : ' Give me, sirs, this vessel, and I will set up over it a sacred cairn, and in its honour will I establish a feast.' And they gave the vessel to Dom. the Brahman. 6 1. And the Moriyas of Pipphalivana heard the news that the Blessed One had died at Kusinara. Then the Moriyas of Pipphalivana sent a mes- senger to the INTallas, saying, ' The Blessed One belonged to the soldier caste, and we too are of the soldier caste. We are worthy to receive a portion of the relics of the Blessed One. Over the remains of the* Blessed One will we put up a sacred cairn, and in their honour Avill we celebrate a feast!' And when they heard the answer, saying, 'There is no portion of the remains of the Blessed One left over. The remains of the Blessed One are all dis- tributed,' then they took away the embers. 62. Then the king of Magadha, A^atasattu, the son of the queen of the Videha clan, made a mound in Ra^agaha over the remains of the Blessed One, and held a feast. And the hlM/in.vls of Vesali made a mound in Vesali over the remains of the Blessed One, and held a feast. And the Bulls of Allakappa made a mound in Allakappa over the remains of the Blessed One, and held a feast. And the Koliyas of Ramagama made a mound in Ramagama over the remains of the Blessed One, and held a feast. VI. MAHA-PARINIBBANA-SUTTA. 1 35 And Ve//^adipaka the Brahman made a mound in Ve//^adipa over the remains of the Blessed One, and held a feast. And the Mallas of Pava made a mound in Pdva over the remains of the Blessed One, and held a feast. And the Mallas of Kusinara made a mound in Kusinara over the remains of the Blessed One, and held a feast. And Do;^a the Brahman made a mound over the vessel in which the body had been burnt, and held a feast. And the Morlyas of Pipphalivana made a mound over the embers, and held a feast. Thus were there eight mounds [Thilpas] for the remains, and one for the vessel, and one for the embers. This was how it used to be \ [pT,. Eight measures of relics there were of him of the far-seeing eye, Of the best of the best of men. In India seven are worshipped. And one measure in Ramagama, by the kings of the serpent race. One tooth, too, is honoured in heaven, and one in Gandhara's city. One in the Kalinga realm, and one more by the Naga race. ^ Here closes Buddhaghosa's long and edifying commentary. He has no note on the following verses, which he says were added by Theras in Ceylon. The additional verse found in the Phayre MS. was in the same way probably added in Burma. 1 36 THE BOOK OF THE GREAT DECEASE. CH. VI. Through their glory the bountiful earth is made bright with offerings painless — For with such are the Great Teacher's relics best honoured by those who are honoured, By gods and by Nagas and kings, yea, thus by the noblest of monarchs — Bow down with clasped hands ! Hard, hard is a Buddha to meet with through hundreds of ages !] End of the Book of the Great Decease. D HAM MAA'AK KAPPA VAT- TANA-SUTTA. INTRODUCTION TO THE FOUNDATION OF THE KINGDOM OF RIGHTEOUSNESS. This translation is made from a transcript of the text as found in the very beautiful Ceylon MS. on silver plates, now in the British Museum ^. The letters, which are perfectly formed, are cut into the silver ; and the MS. has this peculiarity, that every sentence is repeated with a slight change in the collocation of the words. Thus the first sentence is given as follows : — Evaw me sutam. Ekaw samayaw Bhagava Bara;/asiya?;2 viharati Isipatane Migadaye. Me evaw suta;;/. Eka;// sama.ya.m Bhagava Barawasi- ya.m Isipatane Migadaye viharati. As this repetition is merely carried out for the further se- curity of the text it has not been followed in the translation. This text belongs to the Ahguttara Nikaya. M. Leon Feer has lithographed the Sa7;^yutta treatment in his ' Textes tires du Kandjour ^,' together with the text of the corresponding passage in the Lalita Vistara, and the Tibetan translation from that poem. The Sanskrit text, so far as it runs parallel with our Sutta, will also be found in Rajendra Lai Mitra's edition of the Lalita Vistara (p. 540 and foil.) and the Tibetan text, with a French translation, in M. Foucaux's ' rGya Cher Rol Pa.'' Dr. Oldenberg has just published the Vinaya treatment contained in the Maha Vagga I, 6. It is the same word for word as our Sutta (except § i, which is of course not found there). The Sawyutta expands the idea of the portion numbered below §§ 9-20, having also similar paragraphs in reference to the bhikkhus themselves. The * MS. Egerton, 794 ; bought from a bookseller named Rodel in 1839. * lavraison, No. X. 140 FOUNDATION OF KINGDOM OF RIGHTEOUSNESS. Lalita Vistara differs a good deal in minor details, but is substantially the same as regards the Noble Truths, and the eight divisions of the Noble Path. A translation of this Sutta, found among Mr. Gogerly's papers after his death, was published in the Journal of the Ceylon Asiatic Society for 1865: and the Journal Asiatique for 1870 contained a translation and full analysis by M. Leon Feer. It would be difficult to estimate too highly the historical value of this Sutta. There can be no reasonable doubt that the very ancient tradition accepted by all Buddhists as to the substance of the discourse is correct, and that we really have in it a summary of the words in which the great Indian thinker and reformer for the first time suc- cessfully promulgated his new ideas. And it presents to us in a few short and pithy sentences the very essence of that remarkable system which has had so profound an influence on the religious history of so large a portion of the human race. The name given to it by the early Buddhists — the setting in motion onwards of the royal chariot-wheel of the supreme dominion of the Dhamma — means, as I have shown elsewhere^, not 'the turning of the wheel of the law,' as it has been usually rendered ; but ' the inaugura- tion, or foundation, of the Kingdom of Righteousness.' Is it possible that the praying wheels of Thibet have led to the misapprehension and mistranslation now so common? But who would explain a passage in the New Testament by a superstition current, say, in Spain in the twelfth century? And so when Mr. Da Cufiha thinks that the Dhamma is symbol- ised by the wheel, because ' Gotama ignored the beginning, and was uncertain as to the end^' he seems to me to be following a vicious method of interpreting such figures of speech. It cannot be disputed that the term ' wheel ' might have implied such an idea as he puts into it. But if we want to know what it did imply, we must be guided wholly by the previous use of the word at the ' Buddhism,' p. 45. ^ ' Memoir on the Tooth Relic,' &c., p. 15. INTRODUCTION. I41 time when it was first used in a figurative sense : and that previous use allows only of the interpretation given above. Perhaps, however, Mr. Da Cunha is only copying (not very exactly) Mr. Alabaster, who has said, ' Buddha, as I have tried to show in other parts of this book, did not attempt to teach the beginning of existence, but as- sumed it as a rolling circle of causes or effects. This was his circle or wheel of the law ^.' Mr, Alabaster therefore calls his very useful book on Siamese Buddhism, ^The Wheel of the Law;"* — an ex- pression which he on the first page of his preface takes to be about equivalent to Buddhism. But his theory of the meaning of the term seems to be based upon a misunder- standing of a passage in the Siamese 'Life of Buddha,' which he there translates. At page 78 he renders his text, 'The Holy Wheel which the Law taught is plenteous in twelve ways," and he explains this on p. 169 as referring to the twelve Nidanas, the chain of causes and effects. But the passage in the Siamese text is evidently a reminiscence of the ' twelvefold manner ' spoken of in the same connection in our Sutta (§21), and does not refer to the Nidanas at all. A better comment on the word is the legend of the Treasure of the Wheel, which will be found below in the 'Book of the Great King of Glory ^,' a passage which shows that this figure belonged to that circle of poetical imagery which the early Buddhists so often borrowed from the previous poets of Vedic literature to aid them in their attempts to describe the most important events in the life of their revered Teacher. And, like the day of Pentecost by the early Christians, this Liauguration of the Kingdom of Righteousness was rightly regarded by them as a turning-point in the history of their faith. We find this even in the closing sections of our Sutta ; and in later times the poets of every Buddhist clime have vied one with another in endeavouring to express their sense of the importance of the occasion. ' The evening was like a lovely maiden ; the stars * ' Wheel of the Law,' p. 288. * Chap. I, §§ 10-20. 142 FOUNDATION OF KINGDOM OF RIGHTEOUSNESS. were the pearls upon her neck ; the dark clouds her braided hair ; the deepening space her flowing robe. As a crown she had the heavens where the angels dwell ; these three worlds were as her body ; her eyes were the white lotus flowers which open to the rising moon ; and her voice was as it were the humming of the bees. To do homage to the Buddha, and to hear the first preaching of his word, this lovely maiden came.' The angels (devas) throng to hear the discourse until the heavens are empty ; and the sound of their approach is like the rain of a storm ; all the worlds in which there are sentient beings are made void of life, so that the congregation assembled was in number infinite, but at the sound of the blast of the glorious trumpet of Sakka, the king of the gods, they became still as a waveless sea. And then each of the countless listeners thought that the sage was looking towards himself, and was speaking to him in his own tongue, though the language used was Magadhi ! It is most curious that this last figure should be so closely analogous to the language used with respect to the corresponding event in the history of the Christian church : and I do not know the exact source from which Hardy (Manual of Buddhism, p. 186) derives it. But I think it is highly improbable that there is any borrowing on the one side or on the other. It cannot be denied that there is a real beauty of an Oriental kind in the various expressions which the Bud- dhists use ; and that there was real ground for the enthusiasm which gave them birth. Never in the history of the world had a scheme of salvation been put forth so simple in its nature, so free from any superhuman agency, so independent of, so even antagonistic to the belief in a soul, the belief in God, and the hope for a future life. And we must not allow our estimate of the importance of the event to be influenced by our dis- agreement from the opinions put forth. Whether these be right or wrong, it was a turning-point in the religious history of man when a reformer, full of the most earnest moral purpose, and trained in all the intellectual culture INTRODUCTION. I43 of his time, put forth deliberately, and with a knowledge of the opposing views, the doctrine of a salvation to be found here, in this life, in an inward change of heart, to be brought about by perseverance in a mere system of self-culture and of self-control. That system, it will be seen, is called the Noble Path, and is divided into eight sections or divisions, each of which commences with the word samma — a word for which we have no real equivalent in English, though it has been rendered by such terms as ' right,^ ' perfect,' and ' correct.' Our word ' right,' in some of its uses, would be a sufficiently adequate translation, but it is based on a different derivation, and connotes a set of ideas not alluded to by samma. If used as an adjective this word — signifying Hterally 'going with ^ — means either ' general, common,' or ' corresponding, mutual,' and as an adverb, ' commonly, usually, normally,' or ' fittingly, pro- perly, correctly;' and hence, in a secondary sense, and with allusion to both these ideas, 'round, fit, and perfect, normal and complete.'' When used to characterise such widely different things as language, livelihood, and belief, the meaning of the term is by no means difficult to grasp ; but it is difficult, if not impossible, to find any single English word which in each case would convey its full force without importing also some extraneous idea. From a desire to follow closely the Pali form of expression I had first in my manual of ' Buddhism ' adopted the one word ' right ' throughout the translation of the text ; and I have kept to this below, though I feel that that word quite fails to give the force of the preposition sam {aw-, con-), which is the essential part of the Pali samma. But I think the meaning of the Buddhist ideal, of the summary which is the most essential doctrine, the very pith of Buddhism, would be better brought out by a diversified rendering in the way I afterwards attempted in an article in the Fortnightly Review (No. CLVI) ; or, as above (p. 107), with the authorised interpretation appended. It would then run — 144 FOUNDATION OF KINGDOM OF RIGHTEOUSNESS. 1. Right Views; free from superstition or delusion. 2. Right Aims; high, and worthy of the intelHgent, earnest man. 3. Right Speech; kindly, open, truthful. 4. Right Conduct; peaceful, honest, pure. 5. Right Livelihood; bringing hurt or danger to no living thing. 6. Right Effort; in self-training, and in self-control. 7. Right Mindfulness; the active, watchful mind. 8. Right Contemplation; earnest thought on the deep mysteries of life. It is interesting to notice that Gogerly, who first rendered samma throughout by correct', afterwards adopted the other method ^ ; and as these eight divisions of the perfect life are of such vital importance for a correct understanding of what Buddhism really was, I here add in parallel columns his two versions of the terms used : — 1. Correct views (of truth). Correct doctrines. 2. Correct thoughts. A clear perception (of their nature). 3. Correct words. Inflexible veracity. 4. Correct conduct. Purity of conduct. 5. Correct (mode of obtain- A sinless occupation. ing a) livelihood. 6. Correct efforts. Perseverance in duty. 7. Correct meditation. Holy meditation. 8. Correct tranquillity. Mental tranquillity. The varying expressions in these two lists are intended in all cases, (except perhaps the second,) to convey the same idea. The second division (samma-sahkappo) is not really open to any doubt. Sarikappo is will, volition, determina- tion, desire ; that exertion of the will in the various affairs of life which results from the feeling that a certain result will be desirable. The only variation in the meaning is that sometimes more stress is laid upon the implied exertion of the will, sometimes more stress upon the implied desire Journal of the Ceylon Asiatic Society, 1845. ^ Ibid. 1865. INTRODUCTION. 1 45 which calls it into action. ' Motive ' would be somewhat too impersonal, ' volition ' too metaphysical a rendering ; 'aims' or 'aspirations^ seems to me to best express the sense intended in this passage. In No. 7 (samma-sati) sati is literally 'memory,' but is used with reference to the constantly repeated phrase 'mindful and thoughtful' (sat o sampa^ano); and means that activity of mind and constant presence of mind which is one of the duties most frequently inculcated on the good Buddhist. Gogerly's rendering of the term should have been reserved for the last division (samma-samadhi), that prolonged meditation on the deep mysteries of life, which is stated in the Great Decease ^ to be the necessary complement and accessory to intelligence and goodness. Reason and works are good in themselves, but they require to be made perfect by that samadhi which in Buddhism corresponds to faith in Christianity. This Buddhist ideal of the perfect life has an analogy most instructive from a historical point of view with the ideals of the last pagan thinkers in Europe before the rise of Christianity, and of the modern exponents of what has been called fervent atheism. When after many cen- turies of thought a pantheistic or monotheistic unity has been evolved out of the chaos of polytheism, — which is itself a modified animism or animistic polyd^monism, — there has always arisen at last a school to whom theo- logical discussions have lost their interest, and who have sought for a new solution of the questions to which the theologies have given inconsistent answers, in a new system in which man was to work out here, on earth, his own salvation. It is their place in the progress of thought that helps us to understand how it is that there is so much in common between the Agnostic philosopher of India, the Stoics of Greece and Rome, and some of the newest schools in France, in Germany, and among ourselves. ^ Chap. I, § 12, and often afterwards. [II] L THE FOUNDATION OF THE KINGDOM OF RIGHTEOUSNESS. DHAMMA-A'AKZA-PPAVATTANA-SUTTA. Reverence to the Blessed One, the Holy One, the Fully-Enlightened One. 1. Thus have I heard. The Blessed One was once staying at Benares, at the hermitage called Migadaya. And there the Blessed One addressed the company of the five Bhikkhus \ and said : 2. 'There are two extremes, O Bhikkhus, which the man who has given up the world ^ ought not to follow — the habitual practice, on the one hand, of those things whose attraction depends upon the passions, and especially of sensuality — a low and pagan ^ way (of seeking satisfaction) unworthy, un- profitable, and fit only for the worldly-minded — ' These are the five mendicants who had waited on the Bodisat during his austerities, as described in ' Buddhist Birth Stories,' pp. 88, 89. Their names are given on p. 113 of that book; see below, the note on § 32. 2 Pabba^ito, one who has gone forth, who has renounced worldly things, a ' religious.' ^ Gamma, a word of the same derivation as, and corresponding meaning to, our word ' pagan.' DHAMMA-ZAKKA-PPAVATTANA-SUTTA. 1 47 and the habitual practice, on the other hand, of asceticism (or self-mortification), which is painful, unworthy, and unprofitable. 3. 'There is a middle path, O Bhikkhus, avoiding these two extremes, discovered by the Tathagata ^ — a path which opens the eyes, and bestows under- standing, which leads to peace of mind, to the higher wisdom, to full enlightenment, to Nirva;ea 1 4. ' What is that middle path, O Bhikkhus, avoiding these two extremes, discovered by the Tathagata — that path which opens the eyes, and bestows understanding, w^hich leads to peace of mind, to the higher wisdom, to full enlightenment, to Nirva;^a ? Verily ! it is this noble eightfold path ; that is to say : * Right views ; Right aspirations ; Right speech ; Right conduct ; Right livelihood ; Right effort ; Right mindfulness ; and Right contemplation. 'This, O Bhikkhus, is that middle path, avoiding these two extremes, discovered by the Tathagata — that path which opens the eyes, and bestows under- ^ The Tathagata is an epithet of a Buddha. It is interpreted by Buddhaghosa, in the Samangala Vilasini, to mean that he came to earth for the same purposes, after having passed through the same training in former births, as all the supposed former Buddhas ; and that, when he had so come, all his actions corresponded with theirs. 'Avoiding these two extremes' should perhaps be referred to the Tathagata, but I prefer the above rendering. L 2 148 FOUNDATION OF KINGDOM OF RIGHTEOUSNESS. Standing-, which leads to peace of mind, to the higher wisdom, to full enlightenment, to Nirva/^a! 5. * Now ^ this, O Bhikkhus, is the noble truth concerning suffering. ' Birth is attended with pain 2, decay is painful, disease is painful, death is painful. Union with the unpleasant is painful, painful is separation from the pleasant ; and any craving that is unsatisfied, that too is painful. In brief, the five aggregates which spring from attachment (the conditions of individuality and their cause) ^ are painful. * This then, O Bhikkhus, is the noble truth con- cerning suffering. 6. ' Now this, O Bhikkhus, is the noble truth concerning the origin of suffering. * Verily, it is that thirst (or craving), causing the renewal of existence, accompanied by sensual de- light, seeking satisfaction now here, now there — that is to say, the craving for the gratification of the passions, or the craving for (a future) life, or the craving for success (in this present life) ^. ^ On the following ' four truths ' compare Dhammapada, verse 191, and Maha-parinibbana Sutta II, 2, 3, and IV, 7, 8. " Or ' is painful.' ^ Pa«/('' upadanakkhandha. On the Khandha, or the mate- rial and mental aggregates which go to make up an individual, see my 'Buddhism,' Chap. III. Upadana, or 'grasping' is their source, and the uprooting of this upadana from the mind is Arahatship. One might express the central thought of this First Noble Truth in the language of the nineteenth century by saying that pain results from existence as an individual. It is the struggle to maintain one's individuality which produces pain — a most preg- nant and far-reaching suggestion. See for a fuller exposition the Fortnightly Review for December, 1879. * 'The lust of the flesh, the lust of the eye, and the pride of life' DHAMMA-S-AKKA-PPAVATTANA-SUTTA. 1 49 ' This then, O Bhikkhus, is the noble truth con- cerning the origin of suffering. 7. ' Now this, O Bhikkhus, is the noble truth concerning the destruction of suffering. ' Verily, it is the destruction, in which no passion remains, of this very thirst ; the laying aside of, the getting rid of, the being free from, the harbouring no lono^er of this thirst ' This then, O Bhikkhus, is the noble truth con- cerning the destruction of suffering. 8. ' Now this, O Bhikkhus, is the noble truth concerning the way ^ which leads to the destruction of sorrow. Verily! it is this noble eightfold path^; that is to say : correspond very exactly to the first and third of these three ta;/has. ' The lust of the flesh, the lust of life, and the pride of Hfe,' or ' the lust of the flesh, the lust of life, and the love of this present world,' would be not inadequate renderings of all three. The last two are in Pali bhava-tawha and vibhava-ta«ha, on which Childers, on the authority of Vi^esiwha, says: 'The former applies to the sassata-di/Mi, and means a desire for an eternity of existence; the latter applies to the ukk/ied3.-di/fki, and means a desire for annihilation in the very first (the present) form of existence.' Sassata-di///ii may be called the 'ever- lasting life heresy,' and uA'/('//eda-di/Mi the 'let-us-eat-and-drink- for-to-morrow-we-die heresy.' These two heresies, thus implicitly condemned, have very close analogies to theism and materiahsm. Spence Hardy says ('Manual of Buddhism,' p. 496) : 'Bhawa- tawha signifies the pertinacious love of existence induced by the supposition that transmigatory existence is not only eternal, but felicitous and desirable. Wibhawa-tawha is the love of the present life, under the notion that existence will cease therewith, and that there is to be no future state.' Vibhava in Sanskrit means, i. development ; 2. might, majesty, prosperity ; and 3. property : but the technical Buddhist sense, as will be seen from the above, is something more than this. ^ Pa/ipada. 2 Ariyo atahgiko Maggo. 150 FOUNDATION OF KINGDOM OF RIGHTEOUSNESS. ' Right views ; Right aspirations; Right speech; Right conduct ; Right HveHhood ; Right effort; Right mindfulness; and Right contemplation. ' This then, O Bhikkhus, is the noble truth con- cerning the destruction of sorrow. 9. ' That this was the noble truth concerning sorrow, was not, O Bhikkhus, among the doctrines handed down, but there arose within me the eye (to perceive it), there arose the knowledge (of its nature), there arose the understanding (of its cause), there arose the wisdom (to guide in the path of tranquillity), there arose the light (to dispel darkness from it) ^. 10. ' And again, O Bhikkhus, that I should com- prehend that this was the noble truth concerning sorrow, though it was not among the doctrines handed down, there arose within me the eye, there arose the knowledge, there arose the understanding, there arose the wisdom, there arose the light. 11. 'And again, O Bhikkhus, that I had compre- hended that this was the noble truth concerning sorrow, though it was not among the doctrines handed down, there arose within me the eye, there > The words in parentheses have been added by Gogerly, doubt- less from some comment not accessible to me; and I have included them also, but in parentheses, as they seem to complete the ideas actually involved in the text. DHAMMA-^AKKA-PPAVATTANA-SUTTA. 1 5 I arose the knowledge, there arose the understanding, there arose the wisdom, there arose the lieht. 12. 'That this was the noble truth concernine the origin of sorrow, though it was not among the doctrines handed down, there arose within me the eye ; but there arose within me the knowledge, there arose the understanding, there arose the wisdom, there arose the light. 13. 'And again, O Bhikkhus, that I should put away the origin of sorrow, though the noble truth concerning it was not among the doctrines handed down, there arose within me the eye, there arose the knowledge, there arose the understanding, there arose the wisdom, there arose the light. 14. ' And again, O Bhikkhus, that I had fully put away the origin of sorrow, though the noble truth concerning it was not among the doctrines handed down, there arose within me the eye, there arose the knowledge, there arose the understanding, there arose the wisdom, there arose the light. 1 5. ' That this, O Bhikkhus, was the noble truth concerning the destruction of sorrow, though it was not among the doctrines handed down ; but there arose within me the eye, there arose the knowledge, there arose the understanding, there arose the wis- dom, there arose the light, 16. 'And again, O Bhikkhus, that I should fully realise the destruction of sorrow thoucrh the noble o truth concerning it was not among the doctrines handed down, there arose within me the eye, there arose the knowledge, there arose the understanding, there arose the wisdom, there arose the light. 1 7. ' And again, O Bhikkhus, that I had fully realised the destruction of sorrow, though the noble 152 FOUNDATION OF KINGDOM OF RIGHTEOUSNESS. truth concerning it was not among the doctrines handed down, there arose within me the eye, there arose the knowledge, there arose the understanding, there arose the wisdom, there arose the hght. 18. 'That this was the noble truth concerning the way which leads to the destruction of sorrow, was not, O Bhikkhus, among the doctrines handed down ; but there arose within me the eye, there arose the knowledge, there arose the understanding, there arose the wisdom, there arose the light. 19. 'And again, O Bhikkhus, that I should be- come versed in the way which leads to the destruc- tion of sorrow, though the noble truth concerning it was not among the doctrines handed down, there arose within me the eye, there arose the knowledge, there arose the understanding, there arose the wisdom, there arose the light. 20. 'And again, O Bhikkhus, that I had be- come versed in the way which leads to the destruc- tion of sorrow, though the noble truth concerning it was not among the doctrines handed down, there arose within me the eye, there arose the knowledge, there arose the understanding, there arose the wisdom, there arose the light. 21. 'So long, O Bhikkhus, as my knowledge and insight were not quite clear, regarding each of these four noble truths in this triple order, in this twelve- fold manner — so long was I uncertain whether I had attained to the full insight of that wisdom which is unsurpassed in the heavens or on earth, among the whole race of Sama;^as and Brahmans, or of gods or men. 22. 'But as soon, O Bhikkhus, as my knowledge DHAMMA-isTAKKA-PPAVATTANA-SUTTA. 1 5 3 and insight were quite clear regarding each of these four noble truths, in this triple order, in this twelvefold manner — then did I become certain that I had attained to the full insight of that wisdom which is unsurpassed in the heavens or on earth, among the whole race of Sama/^as and Brahmans, or of gods or men. 23. 'And now this knowledge and this insight has arisen within me. Immovable is the emancipation of my heart. This is my last existence. There will now be no rebirth for me ! ' , ,. 24. Thus spake the Blessed One. The company of the five Bhikkhus, glad at heart, exalted the words of the Blessed One. And when the discourse had been uttered, there arose within the venerable Konda;/;^a the eye of truth, spotless, and without a stain, (and he saw that) whatsoever has an origin, in that is also inherent the necessity of coming to an end\ 25. And when the royal chariot wheel of the truth had thus been set rolling onwards by the Blessed One, the gods of the earth gave forth a shout, saying : ' In Benares, at the hermitage of the Migadaya, the supreme wheel of the empire of Truth has been set rolling by the Blessed One — that wheel which not by any Sama;/a or Brahman, not by any god, ^ It is the perception of this fact which is the Dhamma/^akkhu, the Eye of Truth, or the Eye for QuaHties as it might be rendered with reference to the meaning of Dhamma in the words that follow. They are in Pali yaw kinki samudaya-dhamma/w, sabba/;? tzm nirodha-dhammaw, literally, 'whatever has the quality of beginning, that has the quality of ceasing.' 154 FOUNDATION OF KINGDOM OF RIGHTEOUSNESS. not by any Brahma or Mara, not by any one in the universe, can ever be turned back !' 26. And when they heard the shout of the gods of the earth, the attendant gods of the four great kings ^ (the guardian angels of the four quarters of the globe) gave forth a shout, saying : * In Benares, at the hermitage of the Migadiya, the supreme wheel of the empire of Truth has been set rolling by the Blessed One — that wheel which not by any Sama/^a or Brahman, not by any god, not by any Brahma or Mara, not by any one in the universe, can ever be turned back ! ' 27. [And thus as the gods in each of the heavens heard the shout of the inhabitants of the heaven beneath, they took up the cry until the gods in the highest heaven of heavens] gave forth the shout, saying : ' In Benares, at the hermitage of the Migadaya, the supreme wheel of the empire of Truth has been set rolling by the Blessed One — that wheel which not by any Sama7?a or Brahman, not by any god, not by any Brahma or Mara, not by any one in the universe, can ever be turned backM' ^ Their names are given in the Maha Samaya Sutta in Grim- blot's ' Sept Suttas Palis.' "^ The text repeats § 26 for each of the heavens ; and the gods thus enumerated are as follows, beginning with BhummaDeva in§ 25: 1. Bhumma Deva. 2. A'atumahara^ika Deva. 3. Yama Deva. 4. Tusita Deva. 5. Nimmanarati Deva. 6. Paranimmitavasavatti Deva. 7. Brahmakayika Deva. See the Maha Samaya Sutta in Grimblot's ' Sept Suttas Palis,' and DHAMMA-A'AKKA-PPAVATTANA-SUTTA. I 5 5 28. And thus, in an instant, a second, a moment, the sound went up even to the world of Brahma : and this great ten-thousand-world-system quaked and trembled and was shaken violently, and an immeasurable bright light appeared in the universe, beyond even the power of the gods ! 29. Then did the Blessed One give utterance to this exclamation of joy : ' Konda;Ma hath realised it. Kondaiina. hath realised it ! ' And so the vener- able Konda;/;2a acquired the name of Anuata.- Konda;/;^a (' the Kondauna. who realised ') \ End of the Dhamma-/^akka-ppavattana-sutta. compare Professor Max Miiller's note in 'Buddhaghosha's Parables,' p. xxxiii, and Hardy in the ' Manual of Buddhism/ p. 25. ^ The Maha Vagga completes the narrative as follows : ' And then the venerable A^mata-Kondofifia having seen the truth, having arrived at the truth, having known the truth, having penetrated the truth, having past beyond doubt, having laid aside uncertainty, having attained to confidence, and being dependent on no one beside himself for knowledge of the religion of the teacher, spake thus to the Blessed One : * " May I become, O my Lord, a novice under the Blessed One, may I receive full ordination !" ' " Welcome, O brother !" said the Blessed One, " the truth has been well laid down. Practice holiness to the complete suppression of sorrow !" ' And that was the ordination of the Venerable One,' The other four, Vappa, Bhaddiya, Mahanama, and Assa^i, were converted on the following days, according to the ' Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 113. It is there also said that ' myriads of the angels (devas) had been converted simultaneously with Kondanya.' TEVIGGA-SUTTANTA. INTRODUCTION TO THE TEVIGGA SUTTA. This is the twelfth and last Sutta in the first division of the Digha Nikaya, which is called the Silakkhandha Vaggo, because the whole of its twelve Dialogues deal, from one point of view or another, with Si la, or Right Conduct. There is another Sutta sometimes called by the same name. No. 21 in the Middle Fifty of the Ma^^//ima Nikaya : but it has nothing, except the name, in common with the present. It is called Tevi^^a Sutta merely because Gotama is there described by the complimentary title of Tevi^^a, 'Wise in the Vedasj' and its full name is the Tevi^^a-va/^/^//agotta-sutta ^. I have made the present translation from a text con- stituted from three MSS., — my own MS. of the Digha Nikaya, referred to as D ; the Turnour MS. of the same in the Indian Office, referred to as T ; both in Sinhalese characters : and the Phayre MS. in the same place, in Burmese characters, referred to as P. In this book we have Right Conduct used as a sort of argumentum ad hominem for the conversion of two earnest young Brahmans. They ask which is the true path to a state of union (in the next birth) with God. After arguing, in a kind of Socratic dialogue, that on their own showing, on the ' It may be noted, in passing, that the substance of it recurs as the Yakkha- gotta Samyutta in the Samyutta Nikaya, l6o TEVIGGA SUTTA. basis of facts they themselves admitted, the Brahma.is could have no real knowledge of their God, Gotama maintains that union with a God whom they admitted to be pure and holy must be unattainable by men impure and sinful and self-righteous, however great their know- ledge of the Vedas. And he then lays down, not without occasional beauty of language, that system of Right Conduct, which must be the only direct way to a real union with God. One would think perhaps that such a Sutta might be adapted, without very great difficulty, for use as a mis- sionary tract, so closely does it remind us of the argumetit of many a sermon on the text, ' Except your righteousness shall exceed the righteousness of the Scribes and Pharisees, ye shall in no wise enter the kingdom of heaven!' And it is true that the Tevi^^a — the men of special knowledge in the three Vedas — correspond exactly in most essential particulars with the Scribes and Pharisees of the New Testament. They were the official preservers by repeating, as the Scribes were by copying, the sacred books ; and they were the recognised interpreters, and the sole cus- todians of the traditional interpretation — which too often explained away the real meaning — of those books. It follows that as the law in both cases was included in the sacred books, it was they who, in both cases, were the real lawgivers, and practically the only lawyers. And as almost all learning was confined to, or in close con- nection with the sacred books, the Tevi^^a were the chief Fandits, as the Scribes were the 'Doctors of the Law.' Like the Pharisees, too, the Brahmans laid claim to peculiar sanctity ; and many of them in the pride of their education, their birth, and their wealth, looked down with self-righteous scorn on the masses of the people. And while, on the other hand, the Brahmans further resem- bled the Scribes and Pharisees in that many of them were justly deserving of the respect in which they were held ; it is only the undeserving who, in both cases, are intended to be condemned. But whatever interpretation of the ' kingdom of heaven ' INTRODUCTION. l6l tb" reader may adopt, it must be very different from any- thing the Sutta can mean by 'a state of union with Brahma.' It is not easy to say what opinion is really imputed to the young Brahmans before their conversion. It is probably meant that they were seeking a way by which their Self should become identified, after death, with Brahman ; a way by which they could escape from the immortality of transmigration, from existence alto- gether as separate individuals ^. And in holding out a hope of union with Brahma as a result of the practice of universal love ^, the Buddha is most probably intended to mean ' a union with Brahma ' in the Buddhist sense — that is to say, a temporary companionship as a separate being with the Buddhist Brahma, to be enjoyed by a new individual not consciously identical with its pre- decessor. It is just possible that the argumentum ad hominem should be extended to this part of the Sutta ; and that the statement in III, i should be taken to mean, 'This (universal love) is the only way to that kind of union with your own Brahma which you desire.' But such a yielding to heretical opinion at the close of his own exposition of the truth would scarcely be imputed to a Buddha. Just as during the time of the early Christians, in the way which Archbishop Trench has so instructively pointed out, it was not men only who received a new birth and a new baptism, but old words and terms of common use were also infused with a new spirit; so the Indian reformer, while clothing his new system in the current phraseology, infused a different and in many cases a higher meaning into the old expressions. Thus, for instance, Tevi^^a (Sanskrit Traividya) meant either knowledge of the Three Vedas, or as an adjective, a Brahman possessed of that knowledge ; and then, as a noun of multitude, such an assembly of those Brahmans ^ Compare Professor Max Miiller's Preface to the Sacred Books of the East, vol. i. p. XXX. * See Chapter III, §§ i, 2. [11] M 1 62 TEVIC?GA SUTTA. as is described in the first sections of our Sutta. As there were many Brahmans who had not that knowledge, the word naturally came to imply a person worthy of the respect due to special learning, and was used as a compli- mentary title, not very different from our Doctor. It is preserved as an epithet of Arahats in the Buddhist writings, but as meaning one possessed of the knowledge of a funda- mental threefold doctrine of Buddhism, the doctrine of the impermanency, the inherent pain, and the absence of any abiding principle (any Self) in the confections or compo- nent things ^ That is to say, the knowledge of the Vedas was replaced by a knowledge of the real character of the deceptive and evanescent phenomena by which we are encircled, and of which we form a part. So also with regard to Brahma. The name was retained, but the idea was entirely changed. The course of religious belief had passed among the Indian section of the Aryan tribes through the usual stages of animism and polytheism to a kind of pantheism peculiar to India, in which Brahman was held to be a first cause, the highest self, emotion- less, infinite, absolute. As the Buddhist system was constructed without any use of the previous idea of a separate soul, or self, or ghost, or spirit, supposed to exist inside the human body, this woven chain of previous speculation had as httle importance for it as theological discussions have for positivism. But Buddhism fell into what to the positivist would be the unpardonable sin — perhaps inevitable at the time and place of its youth — of continuing to express a belief in the external spirits, big and little, of the then Hindu pantheon. They were preserved very much in the previous order of precedence, and were all — except Mara, the Evil One, and his personal following, and a few others — supposed to be passably good Buddhists. They were not feared any more ; they were patronized as a kind of fairies, usually beneficent, ^ See KuWa. Vagga VI, 6, 2, = Gataka, vol. i. p. 217; Mahavawzsa, p. 79; D!pava?nsa XV, 80 (where the Arahats are women) ; and on ' confections ' below, in the Introduction to the ' Book of the Great King of Glory.' INTRODUCTION. l6s though always more or less foolish and ignorant. They were of course not worshipped any more, for they were much less worthy of reverence than any wise and good man. And they were not eternal, — all of them, even the very best or highest, being liable, like all things and all other creatures, to dissolution. If they had behaved well they were then reborn under happy outward conditions, and might even look fonvard to being some day born as men, so that they could attain to the supreme goal of the Buddhist faith, to that bliss which passeth not away, — the Nirva;^a of a perfect life in Arahatship. The duty of a Buddhist who had entered the Noble Path towards these light and airy shapes — for to such vain things had the great gods fallen — was the same as his duty towards every fellow creature ; pity for his ignorance, sympathy with his weakness, equanimity (the absence of fear or malice, or the sense of any differing or opposing interest), and the constant feeling of a deep and lasting love, all pervading, grown great, and beyond measure. No exception was made in the case of Brahma. He, like every other creature that had life, was evanescent, was bound by the chain of existence, the result of ignor- ance, and could only find salvation by walking along the Noble Eightfold Path. It must be remembered that the Brahma of modern times, the God of the ardent theism of some of the best of the later Hindus, had not then come into existence : that conception was one effect of the in- fluence of Mohammadan and Christian thought upon Hindu minds. And it would be useless to conjecture how the Buddhist theory might have been modified by contact with that ideal. While regarded however as essentially of the same class as all other external spirits, Brahma was still regarded as a superior spirit, as a very devout Buddhist, and as a kind of king among the angels. The Brahma of this world system, who was living in Gotama's time, and who is living now, acquired his present exalted position from his virtue in a previous birth as a Bhikkhu named Sahaka in the time when Kassapa Buddha's religion flourished M 2 l64 TEVIGGA SUTTA. upon earth ^ According to the author of the 6"ataka com- mentary, he assisted at the future Buddha's birth-; and twice afterwards he rendered service to the Bodisat just before the great conflict with Mara ^. And when after the victory the Blessed One hesitated whether it would be of any use to tell to others the truth he had found, it was Brahma who appeared and besought him to proclaim the truth *. Brahma Sahampati was the first to give utterance to the universal sorrow which follov/ed on the death of the Buddha ^ ; and at a critical period in the later history of the Buddhist church he is represented to have descended from heaven, and to have appeared to the Thera Sa//^a, to confirm his wavering faith". These instances will show the high character ascribed to the Brahma of the world system in which we live ; and in each of the infinite world systems which are scat- tered through space there is supposed to be a like finite, temporary, virtuous Brahma sitting as king over the most exalted of the angel hosts. It must be evident that it follows, without the possi- bility of question, that the early Buddhists cannot with any accuracy be described as ' monotheists,' and it is much to be regretted that even cultured and scholarly writers still speak of them as such, and can suggest that the in- dependent monotheism of the later Jews can be paralleled by a supposed monotheism among the Buddhists'^. And even if the idea of Brahma were at all the same as the idea of God, a union with this Brahma would mean a merely temporary life as an angel in the Brahma heaven — such a life as is represented below to have been the result of the noble life and noble thoughts of the Great King * Teste a comment quoted by Childers, Diet. p. 227. « ' Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 66. ^ Ibid. pp. 92, 97. * Ibid. p. III. Related already in the Maha Vagga I, 2 ; 6, 7. ' Book of the Great Decease, Chapter VI, § 14. ^ Mahava/wsa, p. 17. ^ ' Their (the Jews') monotheism was perhaps independently evolved ; but the Buddhists at least showed a contemporary monotheism.' Mr. Huth, in ' Life &c. of Buckle,' p. 238. INTRODUCTION. 1 65 of Glory. But this was not the supreme goal of the Buddhist faith ; and the angel, though the same person as the king, from the Buddhist point of view (as resulting from, and carrying on, the same Karma), would be a dif- ferent person from the king, according to the Christian point of view ; for there is no mention of the passage of a soul from the earth to heaven, no conscious identity, no continuing memory. We may draw, from the above, two conclusions. Firstly, that the use of a word in Sanskrit authors is but very little guide to the meaning of the corresponding word in the Pali Buddhist scriptures whenever the word has reference to an idea of a religious character. And, secondly, that very little reliance can be placed, without careful investigation, on a resemblance — however close at first sight— between a passage in the Pali Pi/akas and a passage in the New Testament. It is true that many passages in these two litera- tures can be easily shown to have a similar tendency. But when some writers on the basis of such similarities proceed to argue that there must ha,ve been some historical connection between the two, and that the New Testament, as the later, must be the borrower, I venture to think that they are wrong. There does not seem to me to be the slightest evidence of any historical connection between them ; and whenever the resemblance is a real one — and it often turns out to be really least when it first seems to be greatest, and really greatest when it first seems least — it is due, not to any borrowing on the one side or on the other, but solely to the similarity of the conditions under which the two movements grew. This does not of course apply to the later literature of the two religions ; and it ought not to detract from the very great value and interest of the parallels which may be adduced from the earlier books. If we wish to understand what it was that gave such life and force to the stupendous movement which is called Buddhism, we cannot refrain from comparing it — not only in the points t66 tevigga sutta. in which it agrees with it, but also in the points in which it differs from it — with our own faith. I trust I have not been wrong in making use occasionally of this method, though the absence of any historical connection between the New Testament and the Pali Pi/akas has always seemed to me so clear, that it would be unnecessary to mention it. But when a reviewer who has been kind enough to appreciate, I am afraid too highly, what he calls my ' service in giving, for the first time, a thoroughly human, acceptable, and coherent' account of the 'life of Buddha,' and of the ' simple groundwork of his religion ' has gone on to conclude that the parallels I had thus adduced are 'an unanswerable indication of the obligations of the New Testament to Buddhism,' I must ask to be allowed to enter a protest against an inference which seems to me to be against the rules of sound historical criticism. ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. TEVIGGA-SUTTA. Chapter I. 1. This have I heard. At one time when the Blessed One was journeying through Kosala with a great company of the brethren, with about five hundred brethren, he came to the Brahman vil- lage in Kosala which is called Manasaka/a. And there at Manasika/a the Blessed One stayed in the mango grove, on the bank of the river A/('iravati, to the south of Manasaka/a \ 2. Now at that time many very distinguished and wealthy Brahmans were staying at Manasaka/a — to wit, ^aiiki the Brahman, Tarukkha the Brahman, Pokkharasati the Brahman, Ga.7msso7n the Brah- man, Todeyya the Brahman, and other very distin- guished and wealthy Brahmans ^. ^ Burnouf, in a long note at 'Lotus,' &c., p. 491, already attempted to show that the river A/^iravati is the same as the modern Rapti, which he supposed to be a corruption of the latter part of the longer name. Hiouen Thsang mentions a river A-chi- lo-fa-ti, which is doubdess the same. It is evidently the river on which stood the town of Savatthi, and near to which lay the (xeta- vana monastery (see ' Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 331); and it must therefore, in accordance with Burnouf's conjecture, be the Rapti, which is the Sanskrit Iravati. The Phayre Burmese MS. has almost always A/^iravati. ^ Buddhaghosa says that ^ahki lived at Opasada, Tarukkha lived at lkkhsLg3.\a., 1 68 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. 3. Now a conversation sprung up between Va- se///^a and Bharadva^a, when they were taking exercise (after their bath) and walking up and down in thoughtful mood, as to which was the true path, and which the falser 4. The young Brahman Vase///^a spake thus : ' This is the straight path, this the direct way which leads him, who acts according to it, into a state of union with Brahma ^ — I mean that which has been announced by the Brahman Pokkarasati.' 5. The young Brahman Bharadva^a spake thus : Pokkharasadi (sic MS.) lived at Ukka//^a, Ga.jmssom lived at Savatthi, and Todeyya lived at Tudigama. There is some difference in the MSS. as to the spelling of these names : T. reads ifafiki ; P. T. and D. Pokkharasati (Sanskrit Paushkarasadi); P. (?anuyoni, T. Ghmsofii, D. Ganusoni; P. To- reyya, and Burnouf Nodeyya (which is possibly mcr My a misread- ing), Gs-uusoni was converted by the Bhaya-bherava Sutta ; and I think it very probable that the other names are also those of subsequent converts. Buddhaghosa adds that because Manasaka/a was a pleasant place the Brahmans had built huts there on the bank of the rivdr and fenced them in, and used to go and stay there from time to time to repeat their mantras. ^ Gahghaviharaw anu>^ankamantanaz7i anuvi/^arantanawz. On the first word see (7ataka 11, 272 (and comp. II, 240). ^ah- kamati is to walk up and down thinking. I have added ' after their bath ' from Buddhaghosa, who says that this must be understood to have taken place when, after learning by heart and repeating all day, they went down in the evening to the river-side to bathe, and then walked up and down on the sand. 2 Brahma-sahavyataya. The first part of the compound is masculine (see below, § 12), but the Buddhists probably included under the name, when put into the mouth of Brahmans, all that the Brahmans included under both Brahma and Brahman. The Buddhist archangel or god Brahma is different from both, being part of an entirely different system of thought. TEVIGGA SUTTA. I 69 ' This is the straight path, this the direct way which leads him, who acts according to it, into a state of union with Brahma — I mean that which has been announced by the Brahman Tarukkha.' 6. But neither was the young Brahman Vase/Ma able to convince the young Brahman Bharadva^a, nor was the young Brahman Bharadva^a able to convince the young Brahman Vase///^a. 7. Then the young Brahman Vase/Z/za said to the young Brahman Bharadva^a : 'That Sama;^a Gotama, Bharadva^a, of the Sakya clan, who left the Sakya tribe to adopt the religious life, is now staying at Manasaka/a, in the mango grove, on the bank of the river AZ'iravati, to the south of Manasaka/a. Now regarding that vener- able Gotama, such is the high reputation that has been noised abroad, that he is said to be " a fully enlightened one, blessed and worthy, abounding in wisdom and goodness, happy, with knowledge of the world, unsurpassed as a guide to erring mortals, a teacher of gods and men, a blessed Buddha \" Come, then, Bharadva^a, let us go to the place where the Sama/^a Gotama is ; and when we have come there, let us ask the Sama;^a Gotama touch- ing: this matter. What the Sama;^a Gotama shall declare unto us, that let us bear in mind.' 'Very well, my friend!' said the young Brahman Bharadva^a, in assent, to the young Brahman Vase/Z/^a. 8. Then the young Brahman Vase^'///a and the young Brahman Bharadvafa went on to the place where the Blessed One was. ^ See below, § 46. 170 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. And when they had come there, they exchanged with the Blessed One the greetings and compH- ments of friendship and civiHty, and sat down beside him. And while they were thus seated the young Brahman Vase///^a said to the Blessed One : * As we, Gotama, were taking exercise and walking up and down, there sprung up a con- versation between us on which was the true path and which the false. I said thus : ' " This is the straight path, this the direct way which leads him, who acts according to it, into a state of union with Brahma — I mean that which has been announced by the Brdhman Pokkarasati." ' Bharadva^a said thus : * ** This is the straight path, this the direct way which leads him, who acts according to it, into a state of union with Brahma — I mean that which has been announced by the Brahman Tarukkha." ' Regarding this matter, Gotama, there is a strife, a dispute, a difference of opinion between us.' 9, ' So you say, Vase//^a, that you said thus : ' " This is the straight path, this the direct way which leads him, who acts according to it, into a state of union with Brahma — I mean that which has been announced by the Brahman Pokkarasati." ' While Bharadva^a said thus : ' " This is the straight path, this the direct way which leads him, who acts according to it, into a state of union with Brahmd — I mean that which has been announced by the Brahman Tarukkha." TEVIGGA SUTTA. 171 'Wherein, then, O Vase////a, is there a strife, a dispute, a difference of opinion between you ^ ?' 10. ' Concerning the true path and the false, Go- tama. Various Brahmans, Gotama, teach various paths — the Addhariya Brahmans, the Tittiriya Brahmans, the A7/andoka Brahmans, the A'/^andava Brahmans, the Brahma-^ariya Brahmans ^. Are all those saving paths ? Are they all paths which will lead him, who acts according to them, into a state of union with Brahma ? 'Just, Gotama, as near a village or a town there are many and various paths ^, yet they all meet together in the village — just in that way are all the various paths taught by various Brahmans — the Addhariya Brahmans, the Tittiriya Brahmans, the -AV^andoka Brahmans, the AV/andava Brahmans, the Brahma/^ariya Brahmans. Are all these saving paths ? Are they all paths which will lead him, who acts according to them, into a state of union with Brahma ?' II.' Do you say that they all lead aright, Vase////a ? ' ' I say so, Gotama.' ' Do you really say that they all lead aright, Vase////a ?' ' So I say, Gotama.' ^ This is either mildly sarcastic — as much as to say, ' that is six to one, and half a dozen to the other ' — or is intended to lead on Vase///za to confess still more directly the fact that the different theologians held inconsistent opinions. 2 P. here Atthariya, but below Addhariya (Sans. Adhvaryu); D. Titittiriya, T. Tattiriya, P. apparently Titthiriya (Sans. Taitti- riya); D. i^^andava, T. P. omit (? Sans, ^/^andasa); all three MSS. ^/^andoka (Sans. AVzandoga); P. Bavhadi^a here and below A'av- hadi^a for Brahma/^ariya (? Sans. BrahmaHri). See ' Lotus,' p. 493. ^ Maggani, which is noteworthy as a curious change of gender. 172 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. 12. 'But then, Vase///^a, is there a single one of the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas who has ever seen Brahma face to face ? ' ' No, indeed, Gotama.' ' But is there then, Vase///^a, a single one of the teachers of the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas who has seen Brahma face to face ?' * No, indeed, Gotama!' ' But is there then, Vase////a, a single one of the pupils of the teachers of the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas who has seen Brahma face to face?' * No, indeed, Gotama!' ' But is there then, Vase///^a, a single one of the Brahmans up to the seventh generation who has seen Brahma face to face?' * No, indeed, Gotama!' 1 3. ' Well then, Vase////a, those ancient i?/shis of the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas, the authors of the verses, the utterers of the verses, whose ancient form of words so chaunted, uttered, or composed, the Brahmans of to-day chaunt over again or repeat ; intoning or reciting exactly as has been intoned or recited — to wit, A////aka, Vamaka, Vamadeva, Vessamitta, Yamataggi, Arigirasa, Bha- radva^a, Vase///^a, Kassapa, and Bhagu ^ — did even they speak thus, saying : " We know it, we have seen it, where Brahma is, whence Brahma is, whither Brahma is ?'" 'Not so, Gotama!' 14. ' Then you say, Vase/Ma [that not one of the Brahmans, or of their teachers, or of their pupils, even up to the seventh generation, has ever seen Brahma face to face. And that even the 7?2shis of ^ See Maha Vagga VI, 35, 2. TEVIGGA SUTTA. I 73 old, the authors and iitterers of the verses, of the ancient form of words which the Brahmans of to-day so carefully intone and recite precisely as they have been handed down — even they did not pretend to know or to have seen where or whence or whither Brahma is] ^ So that the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas have forsooth said thus : " What we know not, what we have not seen, to a state of union with that we can show the way, and can say : ' This is the straight path, this is the direct way which leads him, who acts according to it, into a state of union with Brahma!'" ' Now what think you,Vase///2a ? Does it not follow, this being so, that the talk of the Brahmans, versed though they be in the Three Vedas, is foolish talk ? ' ' In sooth, Gotama, that being so, it follows that the talk of the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas is foolish talk !' 15. ' Verily, Vase////a, that Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas should be able to show the way to a state of union with that which they do not know, neither have seen — such a condition of things has no existence ! 'Just, Vase///^a, as when a string of blind men are clinging one to the other ^, neither can the foremost ^ In the text §§ 12, 13 are repeated word for word. ^ Andhavewi parampara;?2 saw/satta. The Phayre MS. has replaced ve«t by pave«i, after the constant custom of the Bur- mese MSS. to improve away unusual or difficult expressions. Buddhaghosa explains andhavewi by andhapavewi, and tells a tale of a wicked wight, who meeting a company of blind men, told them of a certain village wherein plenty of good food was to be had. When they besought him for hire to lead them there, he took the money, made one blind man catch hold of his stick, the next of that one, and so on, and then led them on till they came to a wilderness. There he deserted them, and they all — still A I 74 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. see, nor can the middle one see, nor can the hindmost see — just even so, methinks, Vase///^a, is the talk of the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas but blind talk : the first sees not, the middle one sees not, nor can the latest see. The talk then of these Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas turns out to be ridiculous, mere words, a vain and empty thing ! ' 1 6. ' Now what think you, Vase////a ? Can the Brah- mans versed in the Three Vedas — like other, ordinary, folk — see the sun and the moon as they pray to, and praise, and worship them, turning round with clasped hands towards the place whence they rise and where they set ?' * Certainly, Gotama, they [can] \' 1 7. ' Now what think you, Vase/Z/^a ? The Brah- mans versed in the Three Vedas, who can very well — like other, ordinary, folk — see the sun and the moon as they pray to, and praise, and worship them, turning round with clasped hands to the place whence they rise and where they set — are those Brahmans, versed in the Three Vedas, able to point out the way to a state of union with the sun or the moon, saying : " This is the straight path, this the direct way which leads him, who acts according to it, to a state of union with the sun or the moon ? " ' ' Certainly not, Gotama !' 18. 'So you say, Vase///^a, that the Brahmans [are not able to point out the way to union with that holding each the other, and vainly, and with tears, seeking both their guide and the path — came to a miserable end I ^ The words of the question are repeated in the text in this and the following answers. It must be remembered, for these sections, that the sun and moon were Gods just as much as Brahma. I. TEVIGGA SUTTA. 1 75 which they have seen], and you further say that [neither any one of them, nor of their pupils, nor of their predecessors even to the seventh generation has ever seen Brahma]. And you further say that even the ^/shis of old, [whose words they hold in such deep respect, did not pretend to know, or to have seen where, or whence, or whither Brahma is. Yet these Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas say, forsooth, that they can point out the way to union with that which they know not, neither have seen !]^ Now what think you, Vase/Z/^a? Does it not follow that, this being so, the talk of the Brahmans, versed though they be in the Three Vedas, is foolish talk ?' ' In sooth, Gotama, that being so, it follows that the talk of the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas is foolish talk ! ' 19. 'Very good, Vdse///^a. Verily then, Vase/Z/^a, that Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas should be able to show the way to a state of union with that which they do not know, neither have seen — such a condition of things has no existence. 'Just, Vase/Z/^a, as if a man should say, "How I long for, how I love the most beautiful woman in this land !" 'And people should ask him, " Well ! good friend! this most beautiful woman in the land whom you thus love and long for, do you know whether that beautiful woman is a noble lady or a Brahman woman, or of the trader class, or a vS'udra ?" * But when so asked he should answer " No." 'And when people should ask him, "Well! good ^ The text repeats at length the words of §§ 12, 13, 14. 176 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. friend ! this most beautiful woman in all the land, whom you so love and long for, do you know what the name of that most beautiful woman is, or what is her family name, whether she be tall or short, dark or of medium complexion, black or fair, or in what village or town or city she dwells ? " ' But when so asked he should answer " No." ' And then people should say to him, " So then, good friend, whom you know not, neither have seen, her do you love and long for ?" 'And then when so asked he should answer Yes. ' Now w4iat think you, Vase///^a ? Would it not turn out, that being so, that the talk of that man was foolish talk ? ' ' In sooth, Gotama, it would turn out, that being so, that the talk of that man was foolish talk ! ' 20. ' And just even so, Vase/Z/^a, though you say that the Brahmans [are not able to point out the way to union with that which they have seen], and you further say that [neither any one of them, nor of their pupils, nor of their predecessors even to the seventh generation has ever seen Brahma]. And you further say that even the J^ishis of old, [whose words they hold in such deep respect, did not pretend to know, or to have seen where, or whence, or whither Brah- ma is. Yet these Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas say, forsooth, that they can point out the way to union with that which they know not, neither have seen!] Now what think you, Vase/Ma? Does it not follow that, this being so, the talk of the Brahmans, versed though they be in the Three Vedas, is foolish talk ? ' ' In sooth, Gotama, that being so, it follows that I. TEVIGGA SUTTA. 1 77 the talk of the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas is foohsh talk ! ' ' Very good, Vdse///2a. Verily then, Vase////a, that Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas should be able to show the way to a state of union with that which they do not know, neither have seen — such a condition of things has no existence.' 21. 'Just, Vase^//^a, as if a man should make a stair- case in the place where four roads cross, to mount up into a mansion. And people should say to him, *' Well, good friend, this mansion, to mount up into which you are making this staircase, do you know whether it is in the east, or in the south, or in the west, or in the north ? whether it is high or low or of medium size .'* ' ' And when so asked he should answer " No." ' 'And people should say to him, " But then, good friend, you are making a staircase to mount up into something — taking it for a mansion — which, all the while, you know not, neither have seen ! " ' And when so asked he should answer " Yes." ' * Now what think you, Vase///^a ? Would it not turn out, that being so, that the talk of that man was foolish talk ? ' * In sooth, Gotama, it would turn out, that being so, that the talk of that man was foolish talk ! ' 22. 'And just even so, Vase/Z/^a, though you say that the Brahmans [are not able to point out the way to union with that which they have seen], and you further say that [neither any one of them, nor of their pupils, nor of their predecessors even to the seventh generation has ever seen Brahma]. And you further say that even the i^/shis of old, [whose [11] N 178 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. words they hold in such deep respect, did not pretend to know, or to have seen where, or whence, or whither Brahma is. Yet these Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas say, forsooth, that they can point out the way to union with that which they know not, neither have seen !] Now what think you, Vase////a ? Does it not follow that, this being so, the talk of the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas is foolish talk?' ' In sooth, Gotama, that being so, it follows that the talk of the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas is foolish talk!' 23. 'Very good, Vase////a. Verily then, Vase////a, that Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas should be able to show the way to a state of union with that which they do not know, neither have seen — such condition of things has no existence.' 24. 'Again, Vase^^/ia., if this river A/6iravati were full of water even to the brim, and over- flowing ^ And a man with business on the other ^ Samatittika kakapeyya, a stock phrase used of a river in flood time. Buddhaghosa says, Samatittika ti samaharita (sic ? samaharita) : kakapeyya ti yatthakattha^i tire //^itena kSkena sakka patun ti kakapeyya, which does not seem to me to solve the question as to the origin and history of these difficult terms. With respect to the right form of samatittika it should be noticed that the northern Buddhist spelling is samatirthaka (Sukhavativyuha, ed. Max Miiller in J. R. A. S. for 1880, p. 182), and that both Childers and Oldenberg have read samatitthika in the Burmese MSS. of Mahaparinibbana Sutta I, 33 = Maha Vagga VI, 28. Now the difference in Burmese letters between tt and tth (83 arid 83) is so very small that the copyists frequently write one for the other ; and even in good ]\ISS. where the two are not confounded, it is sometimes difficult to tell which is really meant. When talking of rivers the mention of tilth as seems so appro- TEVIGGA SUTTA. I 79 side, bound for the other side, should come up, and want to cross over. And he, standing on this bank, should invoke the further bank, and say, " Come hither, O further bank ! come over to this side!" priate that a copyist, and especially a Burmese copyist, would naturally read a doubtful combination as tth ; so that even if all Burmese MSS. spell this word with tth (which is by no means certain), very little reliance should be placed upon the fact. On the other hand, the distinction in Sinhalese between tt and tth is very marked (^ii!) and -id), and the Sinhalese MSS. all read tt. I think therefore that Childers was right in finally adopting sama- tittika as the correct Pali form. In the numerous words in which Buddhist Sanskrit has a form differing in a way which sets philological rules at defiance from the corresponding Pali form, Childers thought (see Diet. p. xi, where the Hst of words might be greatly extended) that the Sanskrit was always derived from the Pali, and the Sanskrit writers had merely blundered. I venture, with great diffidence, to doubt this. It seems more likely that, at least in many instances, both Pali and Sanskrit were alike derived from a previous Prakrit form, and that in differently interpreting a difficult word, both Sanskrit and Pali authors made mistakes. That may be the case here ; and it is almost certain that the original word had nothing to do with tirtha. How easily this idea could be adopted we see from the fact that Childers when first editing the MSS. (in the J. R. A. S. for 1874), and when he had only Sinhalese MSS. then before him, altered their reading into samatitthika, and put this form into his Dictionary; though he afterwards (in the separate edition), and after noting that reading in the Phayre MS., chose the other. But what, after all, does ' having equal or level tirthas or landing-places ' mean, when spoken of a river? Comp. Samatittikawi bhuil^ami (Mil. 213, 214); Sabbato tittaw pokkhara^/i/?/ (Gzi.l, 339, text titthaz?z); and Samatittiko telapatto (ibid. 393, text '^iyo, but see p. 400). The root perhaps is Xie/p. Kakapeyya, according to Buddhaghosa, would mean 'crow- drinkable.' Crows do not drink on the wing ; and they could stand to drink either when a river actually overflowed its banks and formed shallows on the adjoining land; or when in the hot season it had formed shallows in its own bed. * Crovz-drinkable ' might mean therefore just as well ' shallow ' as ' overflowing.' Had the word originally anything to do with kaka after all? N 2 l8o ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. ' Now what think you, Vase////a ? Would the further bank of the river A/('iravati, by reason of that man's invoking and praying and hoping and praising, come over to this side?' ' Certainly not, Gotamaf 25. 'In just the same way, Vase/Ma, do the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas — omitting the practice of those qualities which really make a man a Brahman, and adopting the practice of those qualities which really make men not Brahmans — say thus : " Indra we call upon, Soma we call upon, Varu;^a w^e call upon, Isana we call upon, Pa;c^apati we call upon, Brahma we call upon, Mahiddhi we call upon, Yama we call uponM" Verily, Vase/Z/m, that those Brahmans versed in the ' Three Vedas, but omitting the practice of those qualities which really make a man a Brahman, and adopting the practice of those qualities which really make men not Brihmans — that they, by reason of their in- voking and praying and hoping and praising, should, after death and when the body is dissolved, become united with Brahma — verily such a condition of thing-s has no existence !' 26. ' Just, Vase/^/^a, as if this river A/^iravati were full, even to the brim, and overflowing. And a man with business on the other side, bound for the other side, should come up, and want to cross over. And he, on this bank, were to be bound tightly, with his arms behind his back, by a strong ^ The Sinhalese MSS. omit Mahiddhi and Yama, but repeat the verb ' we call upon ' three times after Brahma. It is possible that the Burmese copyist has wrongly inserted them to remove the strangeness of this repetition. The comment is silent. I. TEVIGGA SUTTA. l8l chain. Now what think you, Vise^'Z/^a, would that man be able to get over from this bank of the river A/^iravati to the further bank ? ' ' Certainly not, Gotama ! ' 27. 'In the same way, Vase/Z/^a, there are five things leading to lust, which are called in the Discipline of the Noble One a " chain " and a " bond." ' 'What are the five?' ' Forms perceptible to the eye ; desirable, agree- able, pleasant, attractive forms, that are accom- panied by lust and cause delight. Sounds of the same kind perceptible to the ear. Odours of the same kind perceptible to the nose. Tastes of the same kind perceptible to the tongue. Substances of the same kind perceptible to the body by touch. These five things predisposing to passion are called in the Discipline of the Noble One a "chain" and a " bond." And these five things predisposing to lust, Vase///^a, do the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas cling to, they are infatuated by them, guilty of them, see not the danger of them, know not how unreliable they are, and so enjoy them. 28. ' And verily, Vase////a, that Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas, but omitting the practice of those qualities which really make a man a Brah- man, and adopting the practice of those qualities which really make men non-Brahmans — clinging to these five things predisposing to passion, infatuated by them, guilty of them, seeing not their danger, knowing not their unreliability, and so enjoying them — that these Brahmans should after death, on the dissolution of the body, become united to Brahma — such a condition of things has no existence.' l82 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. 29. 'Again, Vase///m, if this river A/'iravati were full of water even to the brim, and overflowinor. o And a man with business on the other side, bound for the other side, should come up, and want to cross over. And if he covering himself up, even to his head, were to lie down, on this bank, to sleep. ' Now what think you, Vase////a ? Would that man be able to get over from this bank of the river A/^iravati to the further bank ? ' 'Certainly not, Gotama!' 30. ' And in the same way, Vase^//^a, there are these five hindrances, in the Discipline of the Noble One, which are called "veils'," and are called "hin- drances-," and are called " obstacles ^" and are called "entanglements*." ' Which are the five ?' ' The hindrance of lustful desire, The hindrance of malice. The hindrance of sloth and idleness, The hindrance of pride and self-righteousness, The hindrance of doubt. ' These are the five hindrances, Vase/Z/za, which, in the Discipline of the Noble One, are called veils, and are called hindrances, and are called obstacles, and are called entanglements. 31. 'Now with these five hindrances, Vase/Ma, the Brahmans versed in the Three Vedas are veiled, hindered, obstructed, and entangled. 32. 'And verily, Vase///^a, that Brahmans versed ^ Avarawa. 2 Nivara«a. ' All three MSS. onaha. S. V. reads onaddhawz in the text, and explains it by onaha. * All three MSS. pariyonaha. S. V. reads pariyoddha?« in the text, and explains it by pariyonaha. TEVIGGA SUTTA. 183 in the Three Vedas, but omitting the practice of those qualities which really make a man a Brahman, and adopting the practice of those qualities which really make men non-Brahmans — veiled, hindered, obstructed, and entangled by these Five Hindrances — that these Brahmans should after death, on the dissolution of the body, become united to Brahma — such a condition of things has no existence.' 33. * Now what think you, Vase^/z^a, and what have you heard from the Brahmans aged and well- stricken in years, when the learners and teachers are talking together? Is Brahma in possession of wives and wealth, or is he not \'*' __ ' He is not, Gotama.' ' Is his mind full of anger, or free from anger?' ' Free from anger, Gotama.' ' Is his mind full of malice, or free from malice?' ' Free from malice, Gotama.' ' Is his mind depraved, or pure ^?' ' It is pure, Gotama.' ' Has he self-mastery, or has he not ^?' ' He has, Gotama.' 34. ' Now what think you, Vase/'///a, are the ^ Sapariggaho va Brahma apariggaho va ti. Buddhaghosa says on Vase//^a's reply, ' Kama/^/('/;andassa abhavato itthi- pariggaheno apariggaho,' thus restricting the ' possession ' to women, with especial reference to the first ' hindrance ;' but the word in the text, though doubtless alluding to possession of women in particular, includes more. Compare, on the general idea of the passage, the English expression ' no encumbrances.' ^ Asahkili///ia-/Jitto. That is, says Buddhaghosa, 'free from mental sloth and idleness, self-righteousness, and pride.' ^ Vasavatti va avasavatti va. Buddhaghosa says, in expla- nation of the answer : ' By the absence of doubt he has his mind under control' (vase vatteti). 184 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. Brahmans versed in the Vedas in the possession of wives and wealth, or are they not ?' * They are, Gotama.' ' Have they anger in their hearts, or have they not ?' ' They have, Gotama.' ' Do they bear mahce, or do they not ?' ' They do, Gotama.' ' Are they pure in heart, or are they not ? ' ' They are not, Gotama.' ' Have they self-mastery, or have they not ?' 'They have not, Gotama.' 35. 'Then you say, Vase/^//;a, that the Brahmans are in possession of wives and wealth, and that Brahma is not. Can there, then, be agreement and likeness between the Brahmans with their wives and pro- perty, and Brahma, who has none of these things ?' 'Certainly not, Gotama!' 36. 'Very good, Vase////a. But, verily, that these Brahmans versed in the Vedas, who live married and wealthy should after death, when the body is dis- solved, become united with Brahma, who has none of these things — such a condition of things has no existence.' 37. 'Then you say, too, Vase/Z/za, that the Brah- mans bear anger and malice in their hearts, and are sinful and uncontrolled, whilst Brahma is free from anger and malice, and sinless, and has self-mastery. Now can there, then, be concord and likeness be- tween the Brahmans and Brahma ?' ' Certainly not, Gotama!' 38. * Very good, Vase////a. That these Brahmans versed in the Vedas and yet bearing anger and malice in their hearts, sinful, and uncontrolled, I. TEVIGGA SUTTA. I 85 should after death, when the body is dissolved, become united to Brahma, who is free from anger and malice, sinless, and has self-mastery — such a condition of things has no existence.' 39. 'So that thus then, Vase///^a, the Brahmans, versed though they be in the Three Vedas, while they sit down (in confidence), are sinking down (in the mire) ^ ; and so sinking they are arriving only at despair, thinking the while that they are crossing over into some happier land. ' Therefore is it that the threefold w^isdom of the Brahmans, wise in their Three Vedas, is called a waterless desert, their threefold wisdom is called a pathless jungle, their threefold wisdom is called destruction ! ' 40. When he had thus spoken, the young Brah- man Vase////a said to the Blessed One : ' It has been told me, Gotama, that the Sama;^a Gotama knows the way to the state of union with Brahma. 41. 'What do you think, Vase////a, is not Manasa- ka/a near to this spot, not distant from this spot ?' ' Just so, Gotama. Manasaka/a is near to, is not far from here. 42. ' Now what think you, Vase/^'//a, suppose there were a man born in Manasaka/a, and people should ^ Asiditva sawsidanti. I have no doubt the commentator is right in his explanation of these figurative expressions. Confi- dent in their knowledge of the Vedas, and in their practice of Vedic ceremonies, they neglect higher things ; and so, sinking into sin and superstition, ' they are arriving only at despair, thinking the while that they are crossing over into some happier land.' l86 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. ask him, who never till that time had left Manasa- ka/a, which was the way to Manasaka/a. Would that man, born and brought up in Manasaka/a, be in any doubt or difficulty ?' ' Certainly not, Gotama! And why? If the man had been born and brought up in Manasaka/a, every road that leads to Manasaka/a would be perfectly familiar to him.' 43. ' That man, V^se/Ma, born and brought up at Manasaka/a might, if he were asked the way to Manasaka/a, fall into doubt and difficulty, but to the Tathagata, when asked touching the path which leads to the world of Brahma, there can be neither doubt nor difficulty. For Brahma, I know, Vase///^a, and the world of Brahma, and the path which leadeth unto it. Yea, I know it even as one who has entered the Brahma world, and has been born within it!' 44. When he had thus spoken, Vase///4a the young Brahman said to the Blessed One : 'So has it been told me, Gotama, even that the Sama/za Gotama knows the way to a state of union with Brahma. It is well! Let the venerable Gotama be pleased to show us the way to a state of union with Brahma, let the venerable Gotama save the Brahman race ! ' 45. 'Listen then, Vase///^a, and give ear atten- tively, and I will speak ! ' ' So be it, Lord ! ' said the young Brahman Vase////a, in assent, to the Blessed One. 46. Then the Blessed One spake, and said : ' ^ Know, Vase////a, that^ (from time to time) a ^ From here down to the end of p. 200 is a repetition word for TEVIGGA SUTTA. 187 Tath^gata is born into the world, a fully Enlight- ened One, blessed and worthy, abounding in wisdom and goodness, happy, with knowledge of the world, unsurpassed as a guide to erring mortals, a teacher of gods and men, a Blessed Buddha ^ He, by him- self, thoroughly understands, and sees, as it were, face to face this universe — the world below with all its spirits, and the worlds above, of Mara and of Brahma — and all creatures, Sama7?as and Brah- mans, gods and men, and he then makes his knowledge known to others. The truth doth he proclaim both in its letter and in its spirit, lovely in its origin, lovely in its progress, lovely in its consummation : the higher life doth he make known, in all its purity and in all its perfectness. 47. 'A householder (gahapati), or one of his children, or a man of inferior birth in any class, listens to that truth ^. On hearing the truth he has faith in the Tathagata, and when he has acquired that faith he thus considers with himself: * " Full of hindrances is household life, a path defiled by passion : free as the air is^the life of him who has renounced all worldly things. How difficult is it for the man who dwells at home to live the higher life in all its fulness, in all its purity, in all its bright perfection ! Let me then cut off my hair and beard, let me clothe myself in the word of Samafina Phala Sutta, pp. 133 and following; including the passages there parallel to those in Subha Sutta, p. 157, and in Brahma-^ala Sutta, pp. 5-16. ^ See above, § 7. ^ The point is, that the acceptance of this ' Doctrine and Discipline ' is open to all, not of course that Brahmans never accept it. 1 88 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. orange-coloured robes, and let me go forth from a household life into the homeless state!" 48. ' Then before long, forsaking his portion of wealth, be it great or be it small ; forsaking his circle of relatives, be they many or be they few, he cuts off his hair and beard, he clothes himself in the orange-coloured robes, and he goes forth from the household life into the homeless state, 49. 'When he has thus become a recluse he passes a life self-restrained according to the rules of the Patimokkha ; uprightness is his delight, and he sees danger in the least of those things he should avoid; he adopts and trains himself in the precepts ; he^ encompasses himself with holiness in word and deed; he sustains his life by means that are quite pure ; good is his conduct, guarded tTie door of his senses ; mindful and self-possessed, he is altogether happy M' ' The argument is resumed after the Three Silas, or Descrip- tions of Conduct — a text, doubtless older than the Suttas in which it occurs, setting forth the distinguishing moral characteristics of a member of the Order. The First Sila is an expansion of the Ten Precepts ('Buddhism,' p. 160), but omitting the fifth, against the use of intoxicating drinks. The Second Sila is a further expansion of the first and then of the last four, and finally of the fourth Precept. The Third Sila is directed against auguries, divinations, prophecies, astrology, quackery, ritualism, and the worship of Gods (including Brahma). These Three Silas may perhaps have been inserted in the Sutta as a kind of counterpoise to the Three Vedas. Our Sutta really reads better without them ; but they are interesting in themselves, and the third is especially valuable as evidence of ancient customs and beliefs. ir. TEVIGGA SUTTA. 1 89 Chapter II. The Short Paragraphs on Conduct. THE A'ULA SILAJ/^ 1. 'Now wherein, Vase///^a, Is his conduct good.'*' - ' Herein, O Va.seU/ia., that putting away the mur- der of that which Hves, he abstains from destroying Hfe. The cudgel and the sword he lays aside; and, full of modesty and pity, he is compassionate and kind to all creatures that have life ! ' This is the kind of goodness that he has. 2. * Putting away the theft of that which is not his, he abstains from taking anything not given. He takes only what Is given, therewith is he con- tent, and he passes his life in honesty and in purity of heart ! ' This, too, Is the kind of goodness that he has. 3. ' Putting away inchastity, he lives a life of chastity and purity, averse to the low habit of sexual Intercourse. ' This, too, (&c., see J II, 2.) ^ ^ There is no division into actual chapters in the original, but it is convenient to arrange the following enumeration of moral pre- cepts separately, as they occur in various suttas in the same order ; and are always divided into the three divisions of Lower, Medium, and Higher Morality. ^ The clause ' this, too, is the kind of goodness that he has ' is repeated in the text after each section. The clause, which differs 190 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. __^ 4. ' Putting away lying, he abstains from speaking falsehood. He speaks truth, from the truth he never swerves ; faithful and trustworthy, he injures not his fellow man by deceit. ' This, too, (&c., see §11, 2.) 5. ' Putting away slander, he abstains from ca- lumny. What he hears here he repeats not else- where to raise a quarrel against the people here : w4iat he hears elsewhere he repeats not here to raise a quarrel against the people there. Thus he lives as a binder together of those who are divided, an encourager of those who are friends, a peace- maker, a lover of peace, impassioned for peace, a speaker of words that make for peace. 'This, too, (&c., see ^11, 2.) 6. ' Putting away bitterness of speech, he abstains from harsh language. Whatever word is humane, pleasant to the ear, lovely, reaching to the heart, urbane, pleasing to the people, beloved of the people — such are the words he speaks. 'This, too, (&c., see § II, 2.) 7. ' Putting away foolish talk, he abstains from vain conversation. In season he speaks ; he speaks that which is ; he speaks fact; he utters good doc- trine; he utters good discipline; he speaks, and at the right time, that which redounds to profit, is well- grounded, is well-defined, and is full of wisdom. ' This, too, (&c., see § l\, 2.) 8. ' He refrains from injuring any herb or any creature. He takes but one meal a day ; abstaining in the different suttas in which this enumeration of Buddhist moraUty is found, is distinct from the enumeration itself, and, like the opening reference to Vase/Ma, characteristic only of the par- ticular Sutta, II. TEVIGGA SUTTA. I9I from food at night time, or at the wrong time. He abstains from dancing, singing, music, and theatrical shows. He abstains from wearing, using, or adorning himself with garlands, and scents, and unguents, and he abstains from lofty couches and large beds. ' This, too, (&c., see § H, 2.) 9. ' He abstains from the getting of silver or gold. He abstains from the getting of grain un- cooked. He abstains from the getting of flesh that is raw. He abstains from the getting of any woman or girl. He abstains from the getting of bondmen or bondwomen. He abstains from the getting of sheep or goats. He abstains from the getting of fowls or swine. He abstains from the getting of elephants, cattle, horses, and mares. He abstains from the getting of fields or lands. ' This, too, (&c., see J H, 2.) 10. 'He refrains from carrying out those com- missions on which messengers can be sent. He refrains from buying and selling. He abstains from tricks with false weights, alloyed metals, or false measures. He abstains from bribery, cheating, fraud, and crooked ways. 'This, too, (&c., see § H, 2.) 11. 'He refrains from maiming, killing, im- prisoning, highway robbery, plundering villages, or v obtaining money by threats of violence. -' ' This, too, (&c., see § H, 2.)' End of the Short Paragraphs on Conduct. 192 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. The Middle Paragraphs on Conduct. THE MAGGBI-NLA SILAi^. ^ I. 'Or whereas some Sama;2a-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue addicted to injuring plants or vegetables : that is to say, the germs arising from roots, the germs arising from trunks of trees, the germs arising from joints, the germs arising from buds, or the germs arising from seeds. He, on the other hand, refrains from injuring such plants or animals. ' This, too, (&c., see ^11, 2.) 2. 'Or whereas some Sama;^a-Brahmans, who 'live on the food provided by the faithful, continue addicted to storing up property : that is to say, meat, drink, clothes, equipages, beds, perfumes, and grain. He, on the other hand, refrains from storing up such property. ' This, too, (&c., see J H, 2.) 3. ' Or whereas some Sama;m-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue addicted to witnessing public spectacles : that is to say, dancing, singing, concerts, theatrical representa- tions, recitations, instrumental music, funeral cere- monies, drummings, balls, gymnastics, tumblings, feasts in honour of the dead, combats between elephants, horses, buffaloes, bulls, goats, rams, cocks, and quails, cudgel playing, boxing, wrestling, fencing, musters, marching, and reviews of troops. He, on the other hand, refrains from such public spectacles. II. TEVIGGA SUTTA. 1 93 'This, too, (&c., see § II, 2.) 4. 'Or whereas some Sama^za-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue addicted to occupying their time with games detri- mental to their progress in virtue : that is to say, with a board of sixty-four squares, or of one hun- dred squares ; tossing up ; hopping over diagrams formed on the ground ; removing substances from a heap without shaking the remainder ; dicing ; trap- ball ; sketching rude figures ; tossing balls ; blowing trumpets ; ploughing matches ; tumbling ; forming mimic windmills ; guessing at measures ; chariot races ; archery ; shooting marbles from the fingers ; guessing other people's thoughts ; and mimicking other people's acts. He, on the other hand, refrains from such games detrimental to virtue. ' This, too, (&c., see § II, 2.) 5. ' Or whereas some Sama;^a-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue addicted to the use of elevated and ornamented couches or things to recline upon : that is to say, of large couches ; ornamented beds ; coverlets with long fleece ; embroidered counterpanes ; woollen coverlets, plain or worked with thick flowers ; cotton coverlets, worked with knots, or dyed with figures of animals ; fleecy carpets ; carpets inwrought with gold or with silk ; far-spreading carpets ; rich ele- phant housings, trappings, or harness ; rugs for chariots ; skins of the tiger or antelope ; and pillows or cushions ornamented with gold lace or embroi- dery. He, on the other hand, refrains from the use of such elevated or ornamented couches or things to recline upon. ' This, too, (&c., see ^11, 2.) [II] o 194 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. 6. ' Or whereas some Sama^za-Brahmans, who hve on the food provided by the faithful, continue addicted to the use of articles for the adornment of their persons : that is to say, unguents ; fragrant oils ; perfumed baths ; shampooings ; mirrors ; anti- mony for the eyebrows and eyelashes ; flowers ; cosmetics ; dentifrices ; bracelets ; diadems ; hand- some walking-sticks ; tiaras ; swords ; umbrellas ; embroidered slippers ; fillets ; jewelry ; fans of the buffalo tail ; and long white garments. He, on the other hand, refrains from the use of such articles for the adornment of the person. * This, too, (&c., see § II, 2.) 7. ' Or whereas some Sama;^a-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue addicted to mean talk : that is to say, tales of kings, of robbers, or of ministers of state ; tales of arms, of war, of terror ; conversation respecting meats, drinks, clothes, couches, garlands, perfumes, relation- ships, equipages, streets, villages, towns, cities, pro- vinces, women, warriors, demigods ; fortune-telling ; hidden treasures in jars ; ghost stories ; empty tales; disasters by sea ; accidents on shore ; things which are, and things which are not. He, on the other hand, refrains from such mean conversation. ' This, too, (&c., see §11, 2.) 8. ' Or whereas some Sama72a-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue addicted to wrangling : that is to say, to saying, " You are ignorant of this doctrine and discipline, but I understand them!" "What do you know of doctrine or discipline ? " " You are heterodox, but I am orthodox ! " " My discourse is profitable, but yours is worthless!" "That which you should speak 11. TEVIGGA SUTTA. 195 first you speak last, and that which you should speak last you speak first!" "What you have long studied I have completely overturned ! " "Your errors are made quite plain!" "You are disgraced!" "Go away and escape from this disputation ; or if not, extricate yourself from your difficulties!" He, on the other hand, refrains from such wrangling. 'This, too, (&c., see J II, 2.) 9. ' Or whereas some Sama^^a-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue addicted to performing the servile duties of a go- between : that is to say, between kings, ministers of state, soldiers, Brahmans, people of property, or young men, who say, "Come here!" "Go there!" " Take this to such a place ! " " Bring that here 1 " But he refrains from such servile duties of a messenger. 'This, too, (&c., see ^ II, 2.) 10. ' Or whereas some Sama;^a-Brahmans, who (^/^f.<^i?^< live on the food provided by the faithful, continue addicted to hypocrisy : that is to say, they speak 1 much ; they make high professions ; they disparage others ; and they are continually thirsting after gain. But he refrains from such hypocritical craft. 'This, too, (&c., see § II, 2.)' ^- End of the Middle Paragraphs on Conduct. o 2 196 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. The Long Paragraphs on Conduct. THE MAHA SlLAiJ/. 1. ' Or whereas some Sama?2a-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue to gain a livelihood by such low arts, by such lying practices as these: that is to say, by divination from marks on the body ; by auguries ; by the interpreta- tion of prognostics, of dreams, and of omens, good or bad ; by divinations from the manner in which cloth and other such things have been bitten by rats ; by sacrifices to the god of fire, offerings of Dabba grass, offerings with a ladle, offerings of husks, of bran, of rice, of clarified butter, of oil, and of liquids ejected from the mouth ; and by bloody sacrifices ; by teaching spells for preserving the body, for determining lucky sites, for protecting fields, for luck in war, against ghosts and goblins, to secure good harvests, to cure snake bites, to serve as antidotes for poison, and to cure bites of scorpions or rats ; by divination, by the flight of hawks, or by the croaking of ravens ; by guessing at length of life ; by teaching spells to ward off wounds ; and by pretended knowledge of the lan- guage of beasts. — ' He, on the other hand, refrains from seeking a livelihood by such low arts, by such lying practices. * This, too, (&c., see §11, 2.) 2. ' Or whereas some Sama;^a-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue to gain a livelihood by such low arts, by such lying ir. TEVIGGA SUTTA. 1 97 practices as these : that is to say, by explaining the good and bad points in jewels, sticks, garments, swords, arrows, bows, weapons of war, women, men, youths, maidens, male and female slaves, elephants, horses, bulls, oxen, goats, sheep, fowl, snipe, iguanas, long-eared creatures, turtle, and deer. — 'He, on the other hand, refrains from seeking a livelihood by such low arts, by such lying practices, 'This, too, (&c., see §11, 2.) 3. ' Or whereas some Sama/^a-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue to gain a livelihood by such low arts and such lying practices as these : that is to say, by foretelling future events, as these : ' " There will be a sortie by the king." " There will not be a sortie by the king." " The king within the city will attack." " The king outside the city will retreat." " The king within the city will gain the victory." " The king outside the city will be defeated." " The king outside the city will be the conqueror." " The king inside the city will be van- quished." Thus prophesying to this one victory and to that one defeat. — 'He, on the other hand, refrains from seeking a livelihood by such low arts, by such lying practices. ' This, too, (&c., see f H, 2.) 4. 'Or whereas some Sama;^a-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue to gain a livelihood by such low arts and such lying practices as these : that is to say, by predicting — ' "There will be an eclipse of the moon." "There will be an eclipse of the sun." "There will be an eclipse of a planet." " The sun and the moon will be in conjunction." "The sun and the moon will be in 198 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. opposition." " The planets will be in conjunction." "The planets will be in opposition." "There will be falling meteors, and fiery coruscations in the atmo- sphere." " There will be earthquakes, thunderbolts, and forked lightnings." " The rising and setting of the sun, moon, or planets will be cloudy or clear." And then : "The eclipse of the moon will have such and such a result." " The eclipse of the sun will have such and such a result." " The eclipse of the moon will have such and such a result." "The sun and the moon being in conjunction will have such and such a result." " The sun and the moon being in opposition will have such and such a result." "The planets being in conjunction will have such and such a result." " The planets being in opposition will have such and such a result." " The falling meteors and fiery coruscations in the atmosphere will have such and such a result." " The earth- quakes, thunderbolts, and forked lightnings w^ill have such and such a result." " The rising and setting of the sun, moon, or planets, cloudy or clear, will have such and such a result." 'He, on the other hand, refrains from seeking a livelihood by such low arts, by such lying practices. ' This, too, (&c., see § II, 2.) 5. 'Or whereas some Sama/^a-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue to gain a livelihood by such low arts and such lying practices as these : that is to say, by predicting — ' " There will be an abundant rainfall." "There will be a deficient rainfall." "There will be an abundant harvest." " There will be famine." "There will be tranquillity." "There will be disturbances." "The season will be sickly." "The season will be healthy." II. TEVIGGA SUTTA. 1 99 Or by drawing deeds, making up accounts, giving pills, making verses, or arguing points of casuistry — ' He, on the other hand, refrains from seeking a livelihood by such low arts, by such lying practices. ' This, too, (&c., see J II, 2.) 6. 'Or whereas some Sama;^a-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue to gain a livelihood by such low arts and such lying practices as these : that is to say, by giving advice touching the taking in marriage, or the giving in marriage ; the forming of alliances, or the dissolution of connections; the calling in property, or the laying of it out. By teaching spells to procure prosperity, or to cause adversity to others; to remove sterility; to produce dumbness, locked -jaw, deformity, or deafness. By obtaining oracular responses by the aid of a mirror, or from a young girl, or from a god. By worshipping the sun, or by worshipping Brahma; by spitting fire out of their mouths, or by laying hands on people's heads — 'He, on the other hand, refrains from seeking a livelihood by such low arts, by such lying practices. 'This, too, {&c., see § II, 2,) 7. 'Or whereas some Sama^za-Brahmans, who live on the food provided by the faithful, continue to gain a livelihood by such low arts and such lying practices as these : that is to say, by teaching the ritual for making vows and performing them ; for blessing fields ; for imparting virility and rendering Impotent ; for choosing the site of a house ; for performing a house-warming. By teaching forms of w^ords to be used when cleansing the mouth, when bathing, and when making offerings to the god of 200 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. fire. By prescribing- medicines to produce vomiting or purging, or to remove obstructions in the higher or lower intestines, or to reHeve head-ache. By preparing oils for the ear, collyriums, catholicons, antimony, and cooling drinks. By practising cau- tery, midwifery, or the use of root decoctions or salves — ' He, on the other hand, refrains from seeking a livelihood by such low arts, by such lying practices. ' This, too, (&c., see § U, 2.)' End of the Long Paragraphs on Conduct. in. TEVIGGA SUTTA. 20T Chapter III. 1. ^ ' And he lets his mind pervade one quarter of the world with thoughts of Love, and so the second, and so the third, and so the fourth. And thus the whole wide world, above, below, around, and every- where, does he continue to pervade with heart of Love, far-reaching, grown great, and beyond measure. 2. 'Just, Vasez'///a, as a mighty trumpeter makes himself heard — and that without difficulty — in all the four directions ; even so of all things that have shape or life, there is not one that he passes by or leaves aside, but regards them all with mind set free, and deep-felt love. * Verily this, Vase///^a, is the way to a state of union with Brahma. 3. ' And he lets his mind pervade one quarter of the world with thoughts of pity, sympathy, and equa- nimity, and so the second, and so the third, and so the fourth. And thus the whole wide world, above, below, around, and everywhere, does he continue to pervade with heart of pity, sympathy, and equanimity, far-reaching, grown great, and be- yond measure. 4. ' Just, Vase///^a, as a mighty trumpeter makes himself heard — and that without difficulty — in all the four directions ; even so of all things that have ^ This paragraph occurs frequently; see, inter alia, below, Maha-Sudassana Sutta II, 8. It will be seen from ' Buddhism,' pp. 170, 171, that these meditations play a great part in later Buddhism, and occupy very much the place that prayer takes in Christianity. A fifth, the meditation on Impurity, has been added, at what time I do not know, before the last. All five are prac- tised in Siam (Alabaster, 'Wheel of the Law,' p. 168). 202 ON KNOWLEDGE OF THE VEDAS. CH. shape or life, there Is not one that he passes by or leaves aside, but regards them all with mind set free, and deep-felt pity, sympathy, and equanimity. * Verily this, Vase///^a, is the way to a state of union with Brahma.' 5. ' Now what think you, Vase/^/^a, will the Bhikkhu^ who lives thus be in possession of women and of wealth, or will he not ?' ' He will not, Gotama ! ' * Will he be full of anger, or free from anger ? ' * He will be free from anger, Gotama ! ' ' Will his mind be full of malice, or free from malice ? ' ' Free from malice, Gotama ! ' ' Will his mind be sinful, or pure ? ' ' It will be pure, Gotama !' ' Will he have self-mastery, or will he not ?' ' Surely he will, Gotama ! ' 6. ' Then you say, Vase///^a, that the Bhikkhu is free from household cares, and that Brahma is free from household cares. Is there then agreement and likeness between the Bhikkhu and Brahma ?' ' There is, Gotama !' 7. 'Very good, Vase/Z/^a. Then in sooth, Vase/- thd., that the Bhikkhu who is free from household cares should after death, when the body is dissolved, become united with Brahma, who is the same — such a condition of things is every way possible ! 8. ' And so you say, Vase////a, that the Bhikkhu is free from anger, and free from malice, pure in mind, and master of himself; and that Brahma is ^ Or ' Member of our Order.' See the note on Mahaparinib- bana Sutta I, 6. in. TEVIGGA SUTTA. 203 free from anger, and free from malice, pure in mind, and master of himself. Then in sooth, Vase^//^a, that the Bhikkhu who is free from anger, free from malice, pure in mind, and master of himself should after death, when the body is dissolved, become united with Brahma, who is the same — such a condition of things is every way possible ! ' 9. When he had thus spoken, the young Brahmans Vase////a and Bharadva^a addressed the Blessed One, and said : ' Most excellent, Lord, are the words of thy mouth, most excellent! Just as if a man were to set up that which is thrown down, or were to reveal that which is hidden away, or were to point out the right road to him who has gone astray, or were to bring a lamp into the darkness, so that those who have eyes can see external forms ; — ^just even so. Lord, has the truth been made known to us, in many a figure, by the Blessed One. And we, even we, betake ourselves, Lord, to the Blessed One as our refuge, to the Truth, and to the Brotherhood. May the Blessed One accept us as disciples, as true believers, from this day forth, as long as life endures ! ' End of the Tevi^a Suttanta. AKANKHEYYA-SUTTA. INTRODUCTION TO THE AKANKHEYYA SUTTA. Just as the Tevi^^a Sutta is an argumentum ad hominem to the man wise in the Vedas^ and seeking through that knowledge for union with the Deity, urging him to adopt rather the Buddhist method of a hfe of right- eousness here on earth ; so the present Sutta is a similar argument addressed to the seeker after the various things specified in its different sections. If he should desire any of these things then let him live the life of uprightness as set out in the opening section, and cultivate the intel- ligent earnestness and spiritual insight described in the refrain. The two combined amount, as would naturally be ex- pected, to the Nirvawa of a perfect life in Arahatship — the supreme goal not only of every good Buddhist, but of every good Buddhist argument. As applied in the earlier sections it is only a re-statement of a familiar doc- trine ; as applied in the later sections it has the additional interest of showing us the answer of early Buddhism to the mystics, as the Tevi^a shows us its answer to the theologians. And in the answer we find the details of some curious beliefs which existed in India when Bud- dhism arose, and which in after times, and especially in the northern church, had so disastrous an effect upon it. With regard to the reality of these mystical powers our Sutta gives an uncertain sound ; leaving, however, an impression rather in its favour. The argument is equally good either way, but the author of the Sutta is so en- grossed with Arahatship that he does not stay to say 208 IF HE SHOULD DESIRE . whether he regards the belief in the powers referred to as a delusion or not. I have no doubt that he really- believed in their theoretical possibility, which is elsewhere also in the Pali Pi/akas accepted or implied ; though the practical effect of the belief has greatly varied among Buddhists in different times and countries. In the southern church, which adhered more closely to the simple doctrines of early Buddhism, these beliefs have been relegated to the region of legend and fairy tale ; in the northern church there have been found, from time to time, believers who attached to them a practical importance. There is a useful analogy between the expressions used in i Samuel xxviii, and those in the latter part of our Suttas ; and between the general position of witchcraft in the history of Christianity, and of these beliefs in the history of Bud- dhism ; but it would take too long to carry out the com- parison and contrast in detail here, and with due regard to the necessary limitations under which the comparison should be made. The analogy only reaches to their history, and to their relative importance in the religious systems with which they were connected ; the two sets > of belief themselves are fundamentally different, the Indian beliefs being much more nearly allied to modern spiritual- ism and mesmerism. We have a curious instance of the way in which such I legends grow in a parallel passage of the earlier and later lives of Gotama as accepted by orthodox Buddhists. In the Maha Vagga* it is said that during the first watch : of the night following on Gotama's victory over the Evil One, he fixed his mind upon the Chain of Causation, during the second watch he did the same, and during the third watch he did the same — the only difference in the narrative being the verses with which in each of the three watches the meditation closed. In the life of Gotama prefixed to the (9atakas^, the simplicity of this account is improved away by saying that ' I, I, 2-6. * Gataka I, 75, translated in ' Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 102. INTRODUCTION. 209 in the first watch he acquired the knowledge of Past Births (Pubbe-nivasa-nana, described in our § 17), in the second the knowledge of Present Births (Dibba-/l'akkhu, described in our § 19), and only in the third the knowledge of the Chain of Causation (Pati/^/l'a-samuppada). It is curious that in the corresponding passage of the northern Buddhist Sanskrit poem, the Lalita Vistara \ we find precisely the same tradition, which must therefore have been current in both northern and southern churches before the fifth century of our era. I think it is quite possible that at that time it had become part of the Buddhist theory that every Arahat possessed this supernatural insight ; and as Gotama was supposed by the authors of these two later works to have acquired Arahatship by his victory over the Evil One, it naturally seemed to them proper to say that he then also acquired these particular powers. It is clear that even in the time when the Pi/akas were put into their present form it was considered that the Buddha had acquired them", and that they could be acquired by less exalted persons ^. In the later literature several instances are given of par- ticular persons who possessed one or other of them in a greater or less degree ; but it is instructive to notice that these are always persons who lived long before the time of the writer who records the instances. The early Buddhist doctrine as to witchcraft, astrology, omens, auguries, sacrifices, prophecies, and the like, will be found in the Maha Sila (above, pp. 196-200), and in the Third Fetter (below, p. 322). ' Calcutta edition, pp. 440-448. ^ See, for instance, the Tewigga.--va.kkha.gotta Sutta. ^ Sama«/7a Phala Sutta, pp. 144-154. [XI] IF HE SHOULD DESIRE- AKANKHEYYA-SUTTA. 1. Thus have I heard. The Blessed One was once staying at Savatthi in Anatha Pbidik^i's park. There the Blessed One addressed the Brethren, and said, * Bhikkhus.' ' Yea, Lord ! ' said the Brethren, in assent, to the Blessed One. Then spake the Blessed One : 2. * Continue, Brethren, in the practice of Right Conduct \ adhering to the Rules of the Order ^ ; continue enclosed by the restraint of the Rules of the Order, devoted to uprightness in life ^ ; train yourselves according to the Precepts*, taking them upon you in the sense of the danger in the least offence. 3. ' If a Bhikkhu should desire, Brethren, to be- come beloved, popular, respected among his fellow- disciples, let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within ^ let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation ^, let him look through things ^ let him be much alone!' 1 Sila. 2 patimokkha. ° A>^aragO/('ara. Comp. Tevi^^a Sutta I, 49. * Sikkhapadesu. The Buddhist Decalogue (given in ' Bud- dhism/ p. 160). ^ Kggh2iii^?}i keio samathaTW. ® G/^Sna. ^ Vipassana: it is always used, in contrast to samatha AKANKHEYYA SUTTA. 211 4. 'If a Bhikkhu should desire, Brethren, to receive the requisites — clothing, food, lodging, and medicine, and other necessaries for the sick — let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone !' 5. ' If a Bhikkhu should desire. Brethren, that to those people among whom he receives the requisites — clothing, food, lodging, and medicine, and other necessaries for the sick — that charity of theirs should redound to great fruit and great advantage, let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone !' 6. 'If a Bhikkhu should desire, Brethren, that those relatives of his, of one blood with him, dead and gone, who think of him with believing heart should find therein great fruit and great advantages let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be de- voted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of con- templation, let him look through things, let him be much alone ! ' 7. ' If a Bhikkhu should desire, Brethren, that he (note 5), of insight into objective phenomena. These three quali- ties are constantly referred to as parts of Arahatship. The Rev. David da Silva makes vi pas Sana identical with the sevenfold perception (sa?i?1a, mentioned as conditions of the welfare of a community in the Book of the Great Decease, Chap. I, § 10). ^ Even after death those who remember the Buddha, the Truth, or the Order with believing heart can reap spiritual advantage. Compare the Dhammapada commentary, p. 97. P 2 212 IF HE SHOULD DESIRE . should be victorious over discontent and lust ^ that discontent should never overpower him, that he should master and subdue any discontent that had sprung up within him, let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone ! ' 8. ' If a Bhikkhu should desire. Brethren, that he should be victorious over (spiritual) danger and dismay, that neither danger nor dismay should ever overcome him, that he should master and subdue every danger and dismay, let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone!' 9. ' If a Bhikkhu should desire, Brethren, to realise the hopes of those spiritual men who live in the bliss which comes, even in this present world, from the four G'/^anas, should he desire not to fall into the pains and difficulties (which they avoid), let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone ^V 10. 'If a Bhikkhu should desire, Brethren, to reach with his body and remain in those stages of deliverance which are incorporeal, and pass beyond ^ Aratiratisaho. Arati is the disinclination to fulfil the duties of a Sama?ia, discontent with the restrictions of the Order. ^ The bliss here referred to, and described in detail below, Maha-Sudassana Sutta, Chap. Ill, is the ' ecstasy of contem- plation ' referred to in the refrain. AKANKHEYYA SUTTA. 21 3 phenomena \ let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone!' 11. 'If a Bhikkhu should desire. Brethren, by the complete destruction of the three Bonds to become converted, to be no longer liable to be reborn in a state of suffering, and to be assured of final salva- tion ^, let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone ! ' 12. 'If a Bhikkhu should desire. Brethren, by the complete destruction of the three Bonds, and by the reduction to a minimum of lust, hatred, and delusion, to become a Sakadagamin, and (thus) on his first return to this world to make an end of sorrow, let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone!' 13. 'If a Bhikkhu should desire. Brethren, by the complete destruction of the five Bonds which bind people to this earth, to become an inheritor of the highest heavens^, there to pass entirely away, thence ^ These are the eight Vimokkha, a list of which occurs in the Great Decease, Chap. Ill, §§ 33-42. ^ On this and the two following sections compare J^Iahapari- nibbana Sutta II, 7, and on the Bonds or Fetters below, p. 222. ^ Opapatika. This is another of those words which, from their cdnnoting Buddhist ideas unknown in Europe, are really untranslatable. It means a being who springs into existence without the intervention of parents, and therefore, as it were, 2 14 IF HE SHOULD DESIRE . never to return, let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone!' 14.^ 'If a Bhikkhu should desire, Brethren, to exercise one by one each of the different Iddhis, being one to become multiform, being multiform to become one ; to become visible, or to become in- visible ; to go without being stopped to the further side of a wall, or a fence, or a mountain, as if through air ; to penetrate up and down through solid ground, as if through water ; to walk on the water without dividing it, as if on solid ground ; to travel cross-legged through the sky, like the birds on wing ; to touch and feel with the hand even the sun and the moon, mighty and powerful though they be ; and to reach in the body even up to the heaven of Brahma ; let him then fulfil all righteous- uncaused, and seeming to appear by chance. All the higher devas (angels or gods) are opapatika, there being no sex or birth in the highest heavens ; and it is with especial allusion to this that the word is here used. There is of course from the Buddhist point of view (which admits of nothing without a cause) a very sufficient cause for the sudden appearance of an opapa- tika in heaven, viz. the karma of a being who has past away somewhere else ; but the Buddhist theory necessitated the choice of an expression which would give no countenance to the (here- tical) idea of a soul flying away after the death of its body from one world to another. In the expression ' which bind people to this world,' by world is meant the Rupa-loka, or world of form, which include all those parts of the universe whose inhabitants have an outward form and are subject to lusts. ^ With this paragraph compare Mahaparinibbana Sutta III, 14, and Sama?wa Phala SuUa, p. 145,. AKANKHEYYA SUTTA. 21 5 ness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone ! ' 15.^ 'If a Bhikkhu should desire. Brethren, to hear with clear and heavenly ear, surpassing that of men, sounds both human and celestial, whether far or near, let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone ! ' 16.^ 'If a Bhikkhu should desire, Brethren, to com- prehend by his own heart the hearts of other beings and of other men ; to discern the passionate mind to be passionate, and the calm mind calm ; the angry mind to be angry, and the peaceable peaceable ; the deluded mind to be deluded, and the wise mind wise ; the concentrated thoughts to be concentrated, and the scattered to be scattered ; the lofty mind to be lofty, and the narrow mind narrow ; the sub- lime thoughts to be sublime, and the mean to be mean ; the steadfast mind to be steadfast, and the wavering to be wavering ; the free mind to be free, and the enslaved mind to be enslaved ; let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone !' 17. ' If a Bhikkhu should desire, Brethren, to be able to call to mind his various temporary states in days gone by ; such as one birth, two births, ^ With this paragraph compare SaniaMa Phala Sutta, p. 146. " Compare M. P. S. 1, 16, and Samamla Phala Sulta, p. 147. 2l6 IF HE SHOULD DESIRE . three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred or a thousand, or a hundred thousand births ^ ; his births in many an a^on of destruction, in many an aeon of renovation, in many an Eeon of both destruction and renovation-; (so as to be able to say), "In that place such was my name, such my family, such my caste ^, such my subsistence, such my experience of comfort or of pain, and such the limit of my life ; and when I passed from thence, I took form again in that other place where my name was so and so, such my family, such my caste, such my subsistence, such my experience of comfort or of joy, and such my term of life ; and when I fell from thence, I took form in such and such a place ^;" — should he desire thus to call to mind his temporary states in days gone by in all their modes and all their details let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quie- tude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone !' i8.^ * If a Bhikkhu should desire, Brethren, to see with pure and heavenly vision, surpassing that of ^ The Lalita Vistara (p. 442) characteristically carries this enu- meration further up into innumerable ko/is and niyutas of births. ^ This is based on the Buddhist theory of the periodical destruc- tion and renovation of the universe, each of which takes countless years to be accomplished. * Va««a, colour. * The text of this clause recurs nearly word for word in the Brahma-^ala Sutta, pp. 17-21; and in the Lalita Vistara, Chap. XXII, p. 442 ; and exactly in the Samailfia Phala Sutta, p. 148. ^ This paragraph recurs in the Sama?T?~a Phala Sutta, p. 150, and in nearly the same words in the Lalita Vistara, Chap. XXIL AKANKHEVYA SUTTA. 21 7 men, beings as they pass from one state of existence and take form in others ; beings base or noble, good-looking or ill-favoured, happy or miserable, according to the karma they inherit — (if he should desire to be able to say), " These beings, reverend sirs, by their bad conduct in action, by their bad conduct in word, by their bad conduct in thought, by their speaking evil of the Noble Ones \ by their adhesion to false doctrine, or by their acquiring the karma of false doctrine ^, have been reborn, on the dissolution of the body after death, in some unhappy state of suffering or woe^," "These beings, reverend sirs, by their good conduct in action, by their good conduct in word, by their good conduct in thought, by their not speaking evil of the Noble Ones, by their adhesion to right doctrine, by their acquiring the karma of right doctrine, have been reborn, on the dissolution of the body after death, into some happy state in heaven ;" — should he desire thus to see with pure and heavenly vision, sur- passing that of men, beings as they thus pass from one state of existence and take form in others ; beings base or noble, good-looking or ill-favoured, happy or miserable, according to the karma they inherit ; let him then fulfil all righteousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs ^ This is a collective term, meaning Buddhas, Pa/^^eka Buddhas, Arahats, Anagamins, Sakadagamins, and Sotapannas ; that is, those who are walking in the Noble Eightfold Path. ^ The Pali is mikk/is.- (and below samma-) di///n-kamma- samadana; the Lalita Vistara, whose other expressions are identical with the Pali, has, very strangely, mi thy a- (and below s a m y a g -) di ///i i - k a r m a - d h a r m a - s a m a d a na. ° See note on M. P. S., Chap. I, § 23. 2l8 IF HE SHOULD DESIRE . from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone ! ' 19.^ 'If a Bhikkhu should desire, Brethren, by the destruction of the great evils (Asavas ^), by him- self, and even in this very world, to know and realise and attain to Arahatship, to emancipation of heart, and emancipation of mind, let him then fulfil all right- eousness, let him be devoted to that quietude of heart which springs from within, let him not drive back the ecstasy of contemplation, let him look through things, let him be much alone!' 20. 'Continue therefore, Brethren, in the practice of Right Conduct, adhering to the Rules of the Order; continue enclosed by the restraint of the Rules of the Order, devoted to uprightness in life ; train yourselves according to the Precepts, taking them upon you in the sense of the danger in the least offence. For to this end alone has all, that has been said, been said ! ' 2 1 . Thus spake the Blessed One. And those Brethren, delighted in heart, exalted the word of the Blessed One. A End of the Akankheyya Sutta. ^ Compare Samailna Phala Sutta, p. 151 ; Mahaparinibbana Sutta II, 7 ; and Lalita Vistara, Chap. XXII, p. 442. ^ Sensuality, individuality, delusion, and ignorance. A'ETOKHILA-SUTTA. INTRODUCTION TO THE A^ETOKHILA SUTTA. The following translation has been made from a text, based on the Turnour and Phayre MSS. in the India Office, of which Dr. Morris was kind enough to allow me the use. The Suttas in the Ma.gg/nma. Nikaya are usually distin- guished by the way in which a single thought or one or two allied thoughts are stated shortly at the commence- ment, and are then elaborated and repeated through a number of consecutive and carefully-balanced paragraphs arranged in a literary form that would now be considered monotonous and tiresome in the extreme. The repetitions in the Suttas of the Digha Nikaya are no doubt equally artificial, but the train of reasoning being longer and more varied, there is always the hope of a change in the form, or of a new departure in the thought, to sustain the reader's flagging interest. The argument of this Sutta may be shortly stated thus. The means by which freedom from barrenness and bondage of heart can be reached are zeal and determined effort. But that zeal will be crippled in its struggle against barren- ness by want of confidence in the teacher, his doctrine, his order, or his system of self-culture, and by want of concord with the brethren. And that zeal will be crippled in its struggle against bondage by sensuality, by sloth, or by a craving after a future life in any of its various forms. If the disciple be strenuously diligent in the struggle against these things he need not fear or doubt, he will never fail, but will assuredly reach even to the supreme security of Arahatship. When I first read this Sutta I was irresistibly reminded of that passage in the New Testament where the exhorta- tion to the disciple, ' giving all diligence ' to add to his faith 2 22 BARRENNESS AND BONDAGE. virtue, knowledge, temperance, patience, godliness, and brotherly kindness, is followed by the figure that these things will make him to be ' neither barren nor unfruitful;' and closes with the promise that if he do these things, giving diligence to make his calling and election sure, he shall never fall, but shall enter into that everlasting kingdom which is the supreme goal of the Christian life. The analogy is sufficiently close to throw considerable light upon our Sutta, but it touches only the barrenness. The bondage is specially Buddhistic, and is allied with the doctrine of the Sanyo^anas, or fetters, which the pilgrim along the Noble Path has to break before he can reach the full fruit of Arahatship. It should be compared also with the fivefold bond mentioned in the Tevi^^a Sutta, Chap. I, §§ 26-38, the word there used being bandhana;;/, as against vinibandhanaw here, and the fivefold bond being a fivefold division of our first bondage. The ten fetters are — 1. The delusion of self (sakkaya-di///^i). 2. Doubt (vi^iki/^/{r//a). 3. Reliance on the efficacy of rites and ceremonies (silabbata-paramasa). 4. The bodily lusts or passions (kama). 5. Hatred, ill-feeling (patigha). 6. Desire for a future life in the worlds of form (ruparaga). 7. Desire for a future life in the formless worlds (aruparaga). 8. Pride (ma no). 9. Self-righteousness (uddha-^^a). 10. Ignorance (avi^^a). Here the 4th fetter is correlative to our first bondage ; the 6th fetter to our 2nd and 3rd bondage ; and part of the 3rd fetter to our 5th bondage. The 2nd, 3rd, and 5th bondage are in fact but a new way of stating the fundamental Buddhist doctrine that good must be pursued without any ulterior motive ; and that that man is not spiritually free in whom there is still the least hankering after any future life beyond the grave. BARRENNESS AND BONDAGE. A'ETOKHILA-SUTTA. 1. Thus have I heard. The Blessed One was once dwelling at Savatthi, in the park of Anatha Pi;/^ika. There the Blessed One addressed the brethren, saying, ' Brethren ! ' 'Yea, Lord!' said those brethren, in assent, to the Blessed One. Then the Blessed One spake: 2. 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, has not quite become free from the five kinds of spiritual barrenness^, has not altogether broken through the five kinds of mental bondage^ — that such a one should reach up to the full advantage of, should attain to the full growth in, to full breadth in, this doctrine and discipline^ — that can in no wise be !' 3. 'And who has not become free from the five kinds of spiritual barrenness ?' * In the first place, O Bhikkhus, when a brother 1 Paw/^a /^etokhila. ^ Paw/^a ^etaso vinibandha. ^ Dhamma-vinaye. On the disputed question as to whether this compound is a Dvanda or not, see Dr. Oldenberg, Maha Vagga, p. X. M. Leon Feer ('Etudes Bouddhiques,' p. 203) has taken it as Tatpurusha; and it would be hazardous to say that it is never used as such. Here 1 think it is a Dvandva. 2 24 BARRENNESS AND BONDAGE. doubts in the Teacher (Sattha), is uncertain re- garding him, has not confidence in him, and has not faith in him ; then is his mind not incHned towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. * But whosesoever mind inclineth not towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has not become free from this first spiritual barrenness. 4. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother doubts in the System of Belief (Dhamma), is uncertain regarding it, has not confidence in it, has not faith in it ; then is his mind not inclined towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth not towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has not become free from this second spiritual barren- ness. 5. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother has doubt in the Brotherhood (Sangha), is un- certain about it, has no confidence in it, has no faith in it ; then is his mind not inclined towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth not towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has not become free from this third spiritual barrenness. 6. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother has doubt in the System of Self-culture (Sik- kha), is uncertain about it, has no confidence in it, has no faith in it ; then is his mind not inclined towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth not towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has not become free from this fourth spiritual barrenness. 7. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother is angry with his fellow-disciples, discontented with isTETOKHILA SUTTA. 225 them, excited against them, barren towards them, the mind of the brother, O Bhikkhus, thus angry with his fellow-disciples, discontented with them, excited against them, barren towards them does not incline towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. * But whosesoever mind inclineth not towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has not become free from this fifth spiritual barrenness. ' It is such a one, O Bhikkhus, who is not free from the five kinds of spiritual barrenness.' 8. * And who has not broken through the five kinds of spiritual bondage ? ' ' In the first place, O Bhikkhus, when a brother has not got rid of the passion for lusts (kame), has not got rid of the desire after lusts, has not got rid of the attraction to lusts, has not got rid of the thirst for lusts, has not got rid of the fever of lust, has not got rid of the craving after lusts. — 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, has not got rid of the passion for lusts, has not got rid of the desire after lusts, has not got rid of the attraction to lusts, has not got rid of the thirst for lusts, has not got rid of the fever of lust, has not got rid of the craving after lusts, his mind does not incline to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth not toward zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has not broken through this first spiritual bondage. 9. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother has not got rid of the passion for a body^ (kaye), ^ It is possible that kaya may be used here in a technical sense, as the group or aggregate of qualities, apart from form, which go 2 26 BARRENNESS AND BONDAGE. has not got rid of the desire after a body, has not got rid of the attraction to a body, has not got rid of the thirst for a body, has not got rid of the fever of a body, has not got rid of the craving after a body. — 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, has not got rid of the passion for a body, has not got rid of the desire after a body, has not got rid of the attraction to a body, has not got rid of the thirst for a body, has not got rid of the fever of a body, has not got rid of the craving after a body, his mind does not inchne to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth not toward zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has not broken through this second spiritual bondage. lo. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother has not got rid of the passion for a form (r6pe), has not got rid of the desire after a form, has not got rid of the attraction to a form, has not got rid of the thirst for a form, has not got rid of the fever of a form, has not got rid of the craving after a form. — 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, has not got rid of the passion for a form, has not got rid of the desire after a form, has not got rid of the attraction to a form, has not got rid of the thirst for a form, has not got rid of the fever of a form, has not got rid of the craving after a form, his mind does not incline to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth not toward zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has not broken through this third spiritual bondage. to make up an individual. This paragraph would then correspond to the 7 th SsLfuyogzn^,. ^ETOKHILA SUTTA. 22/ 11. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, a brother may- have eaten enough and to satiety, and begins to follow after the ease of sleep, the ease of softness, the ease of sloth. 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, when he has eaten enough and to satiety, begins to follow after the ease of sleep, the ease of softness, the ease of sloth, his mind does not incline to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth not toward zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has not broken through this fourth spiritual bondage. 12. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, a brother may have adopted the religious life in the aspiration of belonging to some one or other of the angel hosts ^, and thinking to himself: " By this morality, or by this observance, or by this austerity, or by this religious life, I shall become an angel, or one of the angels !" — 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, may have adopted the religious life in the aspiration of be- longing to some one or other of the angel hosts, and thinking to himself: "By this morality, or by this observance, or by this austerity, or by this reli- gious life, I shall become an angel, or one of the angels!" his mind does not incline to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth not toward zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has not broken through this fifth spiritual bondage. ' It is such a one, O Bhikkhus, who has not broken through the five kinds of mental bondage. ^ Awwataraz?? deva-nikaya;^^. Compare Mahaparinibbana Sutta, Chap. I, § ii, Chap. II, § 9. Q 2 2 28 BARRENNESS AND BONDAGE. 13. ' And whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, has not quite become free from the five kinds of spiritual barrenness, has not altogether broken through the five kinds of mental bondage — that such a one should reach up to the full advantage of, should attain to the full growth in, to full breadth in, this doctrine and discipline — that can in no wise be ! 14. ' But whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, has become quite free from the five kinds of mental barrenness, has altogether broken through the five kinds of spiritual bondage — that such a one should reach up to the full advantage of, should attain to full growth in, to full breadth in, this doctrine and discipline — that can well be!' 15. 'And who has become free from the five kinds of spiritual barrenness ? ' * In the first place, O Bhikkhus, when a brother does not doubt in the Teacher (Sattha), is not uncertain regarding him, has confidence in him, and has faith in him ; then his mind does incline to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has become free from this first spiritual barrenness. 16. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother does not doubt in the System of Belief (Dhamma), is not uncertain regarding it, has confidence in it, and has faith in it ; then his mind does incline to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has become free from this second spiritual barrenness. 17. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother ^ETOKHILA SUTTA. 229 does not doubt in the Brotherhood (Sahgha), is not uncertain about it, has confidence in it, and has faith in it ; then his mind does incHne to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has become free from this third spiritual barrenness. 18. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother does not doubt in the System of Self-culture (Sik- kha), is not uncertain about it, has confidence in it, and has faith in it ; then his mind does incline to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has become free from this fourth spiritual barrenness. 19. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother is not angry with his fellow-disciples, is not discon- tented with them, is not excited against them, is not barren towards them, the mind of the brother, O Bhikkhus, who is thus not angry with his fellow- disciples, not discontented with them, not excited against them, not barren towards them, does incline toward zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has become free from this fifth spiritual barrenness.' 20. ' And who has broken through the five kinds of spiritual bondage ?' ' In the first place, O Bhikkhus, when a brother has got rid of the passion after lusts (kame), has got rid of the desire after lusts, has got rid of the attraction to lusts, has got rid of the thirst for 230 BARRENNESS AND BONDAGE. lusts, has got rid of the fever of hist, has got rid of I the craving after hists. — i 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, has got rid ! of the passion after hists, has got rid of the desire ; after lusts, has got rid of the attraction to lusts, has j got rid of the thirst for lusts, has got rid of the ! fever of lust, has got rid of the craving after lusts, \ his mind does incline to zeal, exertion, perseverance, ! and struggle. , ' But whosesoever mind inclineth towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has become ' free from this first spiritual bondage. \ 21. 'And, further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother has got rid of the passion after a body (kaye), has i got rid of the desire after a body, has got rid of the ' attraction to a body, has got rid of the thirst for a body, has got rid of the fever of a body, has got rid j of the craving after a body. — I 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, has got rid j of the passion after a body, has got rid of the desire after a body, has got rid of the attraction to a body, has got rid of the thirst for a body, has got rid of I the fever of a body, has got rid of the craving after j a body, his mind does incline to zeal, exertion, per- severance, and struggle. 'But whosesoever mind inclineth towards zeal, j exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has become | free from this second spiritual bondage 22. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother has got rid of the passion for a form (rupe), has got rid of the desire after a form, has got rid of the attraction to a form, has got rid of the thirst for a form, has got rid of the fever of a form, has got rid of the craving after a form. — A'ETOKHILA SUTTA. 2^1 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, has got rid of the passion for a form, has got rid of the desire after a form, has got rid of the attraction to a form, has got rid of the thirst for a form, has got rid of the fever of a form, has got rid of the craving after a form, his mind does incline to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. 'But whosesoever mind inclineth towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has become free from this third spiritual bondage. 23. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother does not, having eaten enough and to satiety, begin to follow after the ease of sleep, the ease of softness, the ease of sloth. 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, does not, having eaten enough and to satiety, begin to follow after the ease of sleep, the ease of softness, the ease of sloth, his mind does incline to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. ' But whosesoever mind inclineth towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has become free from this fourth spiritual bondage \ 24. 'And further, O Bhikkhus, when a brother has not adopted the religious life in the aspiration of belonging to some one or other of the angel hosts, thinking to himself: "By this morality, or by this observance, or by this austerity, or by this religious life, I shall become an angel, or one of the angels ! " — 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, has not ' In this section, and in section 11, I have rendered sukha by ease, and not by happiness, as I think the former is always its more exact meaning in such passages. 232 BARRENNESS AND BONDAGE. adopted the religious life in the aspiration of be- longing to some one or other of the angel hosts, thinking to himself: " By this morality, or by this observance, or by this austerity, or by this religious life, I shall become an angel, or one of the angels!" his mind does incline to zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle. * But whosesoever mind inclineth towards zeal, exertion, perseverance, and struggle, he has become free from this fifth spiritual bondage. ' It is such a one, O Bhikkhus, who has broken through the five kinds of spiritual bondage. 25. 'Whatsoever brother, O Bhikkhus, has be- come quite free from the five kinds of mental barrenness, has altogether broken through the five kinds of spiritual bondage — that such a one should reach up to the full advantage of, should attain to full growth in, to full breadth in, this doctrine and discipline — that can well be! 26. ' He practises the (first) road to saintship^, which is accompanied by the union of the will to acquire it with earnest contemplation, and with the struggle against sin. He practises the (second) road to saintship, which is accompanied by the union of exertion with earnest contemplation, and with the struggle against sin. He practises the (third) road to saintship, which is accompanied by the union of thought with earnest contemplation, and with the struggle against sin. He practises the (fourth) road to saintship, which is accompanied by the union of investigation with earnest con- ^ Iddhipada/w. Here Iddhi must be (spiritual) welfare. iTETOKHILA SUTTA. 23; templation and the struggle against sin^, — and strong determination too as a fifth. 27. 'The brother, O Bhikkhus, thus endowed with fifteenfold determination - becomes destined to come forth into the hght, capable of the higher wisdom, sure of attaining to the supreme security ^ 28. 'Just, O Bhikkhus, as when a hen has eight or ten or twelve eggs, and the hen has pro- perly brooded over them, properly sat upon them, properly sat herself round them, however much such a wish may arise on her heart as this, " O would that my little chickens should break open the egg- shell with the points of their claws, or with their beaks, and come forth into the light in safety!" yet all the while those little chickens are sure to break the egg-shell with the points of their claws, or with their beaks, and to come forth into the light in safety. 29. ' Just even so, a brother thus endowed with fifteenfold determination is sure to come forth into the light, sure to reach up to the higher wisdom, sure to attain to the supreme security*!' ^ The text of this section, so far, will be found in Childers's dictionary, sub voce Iddhipado. 2 That is, the four Iddhipadas, and UssoZ^i, each multiplied by three. * Anuttarassa Yogakkhemassa ; that is, Nirvana. Com- pare Dhammapada, ver. 23 and p. 180. * The tertium quid of the parable is the absolute certainty of the event which will follow on the hen having duly and diligently followed the law of her instinct, even though she, meanwhile, in her ignorance, be full of doubt and desire. The certainty of the delivery of a woman with child is not unfrequently used as a symbol of what can be absolutely depended upon. So of 'the Avord of the glorious Buddhas,' which endureth for ever, in ' Bud- dhist Birth Stories,' p. 18. I have attempted to imitate the play in the text upon the two words for the ' coming forth into the light,' 2 34 BARRENNESS AND BONDAGE. 30. Thus Spake the Blessed One. And those Brethren, deHghted in heart, exalted the word of the Blessed One. End of the Sutta, the sixth, on barrenness and bondage. figuratively and literally, of the disciple and of the little chicken. The first is in Pali bhabbo abhinibbidaya (from vid), the latter is aho vata . . . sotthina abhinibbhi^^eyyan (from bhid). On samma-paribhavitani, here applied to the Sinda,ni, see above, Mahaparinibbana Sutta, Chap. I, § 12, note. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. INTRODUCTION TO THE MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. The following translation is made from a text based on three MSS. from the same sources as those referred to at the commencement of the Tevi^^a Sutta, and referred to in my notes by the same letters. This Sutta follows in the Digha Nikaya immediately after the Book of the Great Decease, and is based on the same legend as the Maha-Sudassana Cataka, No. 95 in Mr. Fausboll's edition. As the latter differs in several important particulars from our Sutta, it is probably not taken directly from it, but is merely derived from the same source. To facilitate comparison between the two I add here a translation of the 6"ataka, which has not been reached as yet in my ' Buddhist Birth Stories/ and which is very short. The part enclosed in brackets [ ] is the comment, which was probably written in Ceylon in the fifth century of our era, and I have included that part of the comment which is explanatory of the words in the verse, as it is of more than usual interest. There is every reason to believe, for the reasons given in the Introduction to the ' Buddhist Birth Stories,' that the stories themselves belong to a very early period in the history of Buddhism ; and we may be sure that if this particular story had been abstracted by the author of the commentary from our Sutta, he would not have ventured to introduce such serious changes into what he regarded as sacred writ. 238 MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. MAHA-SUDASSAWA GaTAKA. THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. ['How transient are all component things.' This the Master told when lying on his death-couch, con- cerning that word of Ananda the Thera, when he said, ' Do not, O Blessed One, die in this little town,' and so on. When the Tathagata was at the C'etavana^ he thought ' the Thera Sariputta, who was born at Nalagama, has died, on the day of the full moon in the month of Kattika, in that very village ^ ; and Maha Moggallana in the latter, the dark half of that same month. As my two chief disciples are thus dead, I too will pass away at Kusinara.' There- upon he proceeded straight on to that place, and lay down on the Uttara-sisaka couch, between the twin Sala trees, never to rise again. Then the venerable Ananda besought him, saying, ' Let ^ It is not easy with our present materials to reconcile the apparently con- flicting statements with regard to the Buddha's last journey. According to the Malalaiikara-vatthu this refers here to a residence at the Getavana, which took place between the end of § 30 in Chap. II, in the Book of the Great Decease, and the beginning of § 31. It will be noticed that § 31 speaks of ' the monastery,' which is apparently an undesigned confirmation of this tra- dition. (Such undesigned circumstances, however really undesigned, are very far, of course, from proving the actual truth of the tradition. They would only show that it was older than the time when the works in which they occur were put into their present shape.) Mr. Fausboll, by his punctuation, includes these words in the following thought ascribed to the Blessed One, but I think they only describe the time at which the thought is supposed to have arisen. * Or perhaps 'at Varaka.' I do not understand the word varaka, which has puzzled Mr. Fausboll. The modem name of the village, afterwards the site of the famous Buddhist university of Nalanda, is Baragaon. The full- moon day in Kattika is the ist of December. An account of the death of Sariputta will be found in the Malalankara-vatthu (Bigandet, ' Legend,' &c., 3rd ed., II, 1-25), and of the murder of Moggallana by the Niga/i/^as in the Dhammapada commentary (Fausboll, p. 298 seq ), of which Spence Hardy's account (' Manual of Buddhism,' p. 338) is nearly a translation ; and Bigandet's account (loc. cit. pp. 25-27) is an abridgment. INTRODUCTION. 239 not the Blessed One die in this little township^ in this little town in the jungle, in this branch township. Let the Blessed One die in one of the other great cities, such as Ra^agaha, and the rest ! ' But the Master answered, ' Say not, Ananda, that this is a little township, a little town in the jungle, a branch town- ship. I was dwelling formerly in this town at the time when I was Sudassana, the king of kings ; and then it was a great city, surrounded by a jewelled rampart, twelve leagues in length !' And at the request of the Thera, he, telling the tale, uttered the Maha- Sudassana Sutta.] Now on that occasion when Queen Subhadda saw Maha Sudassana, w^hen he had come down out of the Palace of Righteousness, and was lying down, not far off, on the appropriate couch, spread out in the grove of the seven kinds of gems, and when she said : ' Thine, O king, are these four and eighty thousand cities, of which the chief is the royal city of Kusavati. Quicken thy desire after these !' Then replied Maha Sudassana,' Speak not thus, O queen ! but exhort me rather, saying, " Cast away desire for these, long not after them ^ ! " ' And when she asked, 'Why so, O king?' 'To-day my time is come, and I shall die !' was his reply ^. Then the weeping queen, wiping her eyes, brought her- self with difficulty and distress to address him accordingly. And having spoken, she wept, and lamented ; and the other four and eighty thousand women wept too, and lamented ; and of the attendant courtiers not one could restrain himself, but all also wept. But the Bodisat stopped them all, saying, ' Enough my friends! Be still!' And he exhorted the queen, saying, ' Neither do thou, O queen, weep : neither do thou lament. For even unto a grain of sesamum fruit there is no such * Khuddaka-nagarake. See the note on Mahaparinibbana Sutta, ver. 60. " Both these speeches are different from those given on the same occasion in the Sutta below. ^ This question and answer are not in the Sutta. 240 MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. thing as a compound which is permanent ! All are tran- sient, all have the inherent quality of dissolution !' And when he had so said, he further uttered this stanza : ' How transient are all component things ! Growth is their nature and decay : They are produced, they are dissolved again : And then is best, — when they have sunk to rest^!' [In these verses the words 'How transient are all component things!' mean 'Dear lady, Subhadda, where- soever and by whatsoever causes made or come together, compounds^, — that is, all those things which possess the essential constituents (whether material or mental) of exist- ing things^, — all these compounds are impermanence itself. For of these form^ is impermanent, reason*" is imperma- nent, the (mental) eye^ is impermanent, and qualities^ are impermanent. And whatever treasure there be, whether conscious or unconscious, that is transitory. Understand therefore "How transient are all component things !" 'And why? "Growth is their nature and decay." These, all, have the inherent quality of coming into (indi- vidual) existence, and have also the inherent quality of growing old; or (in other words) their very nature is to come into existence and to be broken up. Therefore should it be understood that they are impermanent. 'And since they are impermanent, when "they are produced, they are dissolved again." Having come into existence, having reached a state^, they are surely dissolved. For all these things come into existence, taking an individual form ; and are dissolved, being broken up. To them as soon as there is birth, there is what is called a state ; as soon as there is a state, there is what is called * All this is omitted in the Sutta. It is true the verse occurs there, but it is placed in the Sutta in the mouth of the Teacher, after the account of Maha Sudassana's death. The last clause is literally, ' Blessed is their cessation,' where the word for cessation, upasamo, is derived from the word sam, 'to be calm, to be quiet,' and means cessation by sinking into rest. Compare below. ^ Sankhara. ' Khandayatanadayo. * Riipaw. ■* Vi»«anam, * .K'akkhuw. '' Dhamma. ^ Thiti. INTRODUCTION. 24 1 disintegration^ For to the unborn there is no such thing as state, and there is no such thing as a state which is without disintegration. Thus are all compounds, having attained to the three characteristic marks (of imperma- nency, pain, and want of any abiding principle ^), subject, in this way and in that way, to dissolution. All these component things therefore, without exception, are imper- manent, momentary^, despicable, unstable, disintegrating, trembling, quaking, unlasting, sure to depart^, only for a time^, and without substance ;— as temporary^ as a phan- tom, as the mirage, or as foam ! ' How then in these, dear lady Subhadda, is there any sign of ease? Understand rather that "then is best, when they have sunk to rest ;" but their sinking to rest, their cessation, comes from the cessation of the whole round (of life), and is the same as Nirvawa. That and this are one ^. And hence there is no such thing as ease.'] And when Maha Sudassana had thus brought his dis- course to a point with the ambrosial great Nirvana, he made exhortation also to the rest of the great multitude, saying, ' Give gifts ! Observe the precepts ! Keep the sacred days "^ ! ' and became an inheritor of the world of the gods. [When the Master had concluded this lesson in the truth, he summed up the Cataka, saying, ' She who was then Subhadda the queen was the mother of Rahula, the great adviser was Rahula, the rest of the retinue the Bud- dha's retinue, and Maha Sudassana I myself.'] • Bhango. * Anekkam, dukkhaw, anattaw. See Gataka I, 275; and, on the last, Mahaparinibbana Sutta I, 10, and Maha Vagga I, vi, 38-47. ^ Khanika. See Oldenberg's note on Dipava??!sa I, 53. * Pay at a, literally 'departed.' The forms pay at i and pay a to, given by Childers, should be corrected into payati and payato. See Gataka 1, 146. ^ Tavakalika. See Gataka I, 121, where the word is used of a cart let out on hire for a time only. ^ Tad ev ekam ekarw, which is not altogether without ambiguity. ^ This paragraph, too, is omitted in the Sutta. [II] R 242 MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. The word translated 'component things' or 'compounds' in this Cataka is sahkhara, literally confections, from kar, 'to do,' and sam, 'together.' It is a word very fre- quently used in Buddhist writings, and a word consequently of many different connotations ; and there is, of course, no exactly corresponding word in English. ' Production' would often be very nearly correct, although it fails entirely to give the force of the preposition sam ; but a greater objec- tion to that word is the fact that it is generally used, not of things that have come into being of themselves, but of things that have been produced by some one else. It suggests, if it does not imply, a producer ; which is con- trary to the whole spirit of the Buddhist passages in which the word sahkhara occurs. In this important respect the word ' compound ' is a much more accurate translation, though it lays somewhat too much stress on the sam. The term Confections (to coin a rendering) is sometimes used, as in the first line of these verses (as used in this con- nection), to denote all things which have been brought together, made up, by pre-existing causes ; and in this sense it includes, as the commentator here points out, all those material or mental qualities which unite to form an individual, a separate thing or being, whether conscious or unconscious. It is more usually used, with special reference to their origin from pre-existing causes, and with allusion to the wider class denoted by the same word^ of the mental con- fections only, of all sentient beings generally, or of man alone. In this sense it forms by itself one of the five classes or aggregates (khandha) into which the material and mental qualities of each separate individual are divided in Buddhist writings — the class of dispositions, capabilities, and all that goes together to make what we call character. This class has naturally enough been again divided and subdivided ; and a full list of the Confections in this sense, as now acknowledged by orthodox Buddhists, will be found in my manual ' Buddhism.' At the time when the Pali Pi/akas reached their present form, no such elaborate list of Confections in detail seems to have been made ; but the INTRODUCTION. 243 general sense of the word was, as is quite clear from the passages in which it occurs, the idea which these details together convey. It is this second and more usual meaning of the term which is more especially emphasised in the concluding verse of the above stanza. I have ventured to dwell so far on the word Confections, because the commentator here says that the cessation of these Confections is the same thing as Nirvana ; and the question of Nirvana engrosses so large a share of the attention of those who are interested in Buddhism, Whether it is entitled to do so is open to serious question. The Buddhist salvation was held to consist in a change of heart, a modification of personal character, to be attained to in this world, and forming the subject of Gotama's first discourse, ' The Foundation of the Kingdom of Righteous- ness \' When looked at from different points of view this state of mind was denoted, in the very numerous passages in which it is mentioned or referred to, under a great variety of different names or epithets, suggestive of the different points of view from which it could be regarded. The term Nibbana, or Nirvana, is only one of those epithets ; and it is a most significant fact, to which I would invite especial attention, that it is an epithet comparatively very seldom employed in the Pali Pi/akas themselves. It is to the state of mind itself, the salvation which every Arahat has reached while yet alive, in a word, to Arahatship, that importance ought to be attached, rather than to that particular conno- tation of it suggested by the word Nirvawa. One of the many ideas involved in Arahatship was the absolute dissolution of individuality. Gotama, whether rightly or wrongly is here of no importance, held that freedom from pain, absolute ease, happiness, was incom- patible with existence as a distinct individual (whether animal, god, or man). The cessation of the Confections, so far from being a thing to be dreaded, was the inevitable result of the emancipation of heart and mind in Arahatship. * The Dhamma-itakka-ppavattana Sutta, translated below, R 2 244 MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. But it was not a thing to be desired, and could not, in fact, be brought about apart from all the other things involved in Arahatship. The formation of these Confections ceases in Nirvana, and in Nirva;/a alone ; and when the poet declares that their cessation is blessed, he is saying the same thing as if he had said ' Nirvawa is blessed ^.' Turning now to the Sutta itself, we find that the portion of the legend omitted in the Gataka throws an unexpected light upon the tale ; for it commences with a long descrip- tion of the riches and glory of Maha Sudassana, and reveals in its details the instructive fact that the legend is nothing more nor less than a spiritualist's sun-myth. It cannot be disputed that the sun-myth theory has become greatly discredited, and with reason, by having been used too carelessly and freely as an explanation of religious legends of different times and countries which have really no historical connection with the earlier awe and reverence inspired by the sun. The very mention of the word sun-myth is apt to call forth a smile of incredulity, and the undubitable truth which is the basis of the theory has not sufficed to protect it from the shafts of ridicule. The ' Book of the Great King of Glory ' seems to afford a useful example both of the extent to which the theory may be accepted, and of the limitations under which it should always be applied. It must at once be admitted that whether the whole story is based on a sun-story, or whether certain parts or details of it are derived from things first spoken about the sun, or not, it is still essentially Buddhistic. A large pro- portion of its contents has nothing at all to do with the worship of the sun ; and even that which has, had not, in ' In this respect it should be noticed that the very word here used for cessa- tion, upasamo, is used as one among a string of epithets of Arahatship at Dhamma-^akka-ppavattana Sutta, § 3, = Gataka I, 97, and again in Dhamma- pada, verses 368. 381. In this last passage the whole of the phrase in the last verse in our stanza recurs in the accusative case as an equivalent to Arahatship, and the comma inserted by Mr. Fausboll between sankharilpasamaw and sukhaw is, in both verses, unnecessary. INTRODUCTION. 245 the mind of the author, when the book was put together. Whether indebted to a sun-myth or not, it is therefore perfectly true and vaHd evidence of the rehgious behef of the people among whom it was current ; and no more shows that the Buddhists were unconscious sun worship- pers than the story of Samson, under any theory of its possible origin, would prove the same of the Jews. What we really have is a kind of wonderful fairy tale, a gorgeous poem, in which an attempt is made to describe in set terms the greatest possible glory and majesty of the greatest possible king, in order to show that all is vanity, save only righteousness — just such a poem as a Jewish prophet might have written of Solomon in all his glory. It would have been most strange, perhaps impossible, for the author to refrain from using the language of the only poets he knew, who had used their boldly figurative language in an attempt to describe the appearance of the sun. To trace back all the rhetorical phrases of our Sutta to their earliest appearance in the Vedic hymns would be an interesting task of historical philology, though it would throw more light upon Buddhist forms of speech than upon Buddhist forms of belief. In M. Senart's valuable work, ' La Legende du Bouddha,' he has already done this with regard to the seven treasures (mentioned in the early part of the Sutta) on the basis of the corresponding passage in the later Buddhist Sanskrit poem called the Lalita Vistara. The description of the royal city and of its wondrous Palace of Righteousness have been probably originated by the author, though on the same lines ; and it reminds one irresistibly, in many of its expressions, of the similar, but simpler and more beautiful poem in which a Jewish author, some three centuries afterwards, described the heavenly Jerusalem. When the Northern Buddhists, long afterwards, had smothered the simple teaching of the founder of their religion under the subtleties of theological and metaphy- sical speculation, and had forgotten all about the Noble Path, their goal was no longer a change of heart in the Arahatship to be reached on earth, but a life of happiness, under a change of outward condition, in a heaven of bliss 246 MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. beyond the skies. One of the most popular books among the Buddhists of China and Japan is a description of this heavenly paradise of theirs, called the Sukhavati-vyuha, the ' Book of the Happy Country,' the Sanskrit text of which has been just published by Professor Max Miiller in the volume of the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society for the present year. It is instructive to find that several of the expressions used are word for word the same as the corresponding phrases in the ' Book of the Great King of Glory.' THE GREAT KING OF GLORY^ MAHA-SUDASSANA -SUTTA. Chapter I. 1. Thus have I heard. The Blessed One was once staying at Kusinara in the Upavattana, the Sala grove of the Mallas, between the twin Sdla trees, at the time of his death. 2. Now the venerable Ananda went up to the place where the Blessed One was, and bowed down before him, and took his seat respectfully on one side. A And when he was so seated, the venerable Ananda said to the Blessed One : 2 'Let not the Blessed One die in this little wattel and daub town, in this town in the midst of the jungle, in this branch township. For, Lord, there are other great cities, such as Aamp^, Ra^agaha, Savatthi, Saketa, Kosambi, and Benares. Let the Blessed One die in one of them. There there are many wealthy nobles and Brahmans and heads of houses, believers in the Tathdgata, who will pay due honour to the remains of the Tathagata.' A A 3. ' Say not so, Ananda ! Say not so, Ananda, ^ Sudassana means ' beautiful to see, having a glorious appear- ance,' and is the name of many kings and heroes in Indian legend. 2 From here down to the end of the next section is found also, nearly word for word, in the Mahaparinibbana Sutta, above, pp. 99, 100. Compare also Maha-Sudassana G^ataka, No. 95. 248 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. that this is but a small wattel and daub town, a town in the midst of the jungle, a branch township. Long ago, Ananda, there was a king, by name Maha-Sudassana, a king of kings, a righteous man who ruled in righteousness, an anointed Kshatriya\ Lord of the four quarters of the earth, conqueror, the protector of his people, possessor of the seven royal treasures. This Kusin^ra, Ananda, was the royal city of king Maha-Sudassana, under the name of Kusdvatt^, and on the east and on the west it was twelve leagues in length, and on the north and on the south it was seven leagues in breadth. That royal city Kusavati, Ananda, was mighty, and pros- perous, and full of people, crowded with men, and provided with all things for food. Just, Ananda, as the royal city of the gods, A/akamanda by name, is mighty, prosperous, and full of people, crowded with the gods, and provided with all kinds of food, so, Ananda, was the royal city Kusavati mighty and prosperous, full of people, crowded with men, and provided with all kinds of food. Both by day and by night, Ananda, the royal city Kusavati resounded ^ Khattiyo muddhavasitto, which does not occur in the Mahaparinibbana Sutta, the INIahapadhana Sutta, the Lakkhawa Sutta, and other places where this stock description of a ^akka- vatti is found. It is omitted also in the Lalita Vistara. The Burmese Phayre MS. of the India Office reads here muddabhi- sitto, but this is an unnecessary correction. So the name of the Hindu caste mentioned in the Sahyadri Kha;/(3?a of the Skanda Pura«a is spelt both ways. The epithet is probably inserted here from § 12 below. ^ Kusavati was the name of a famous city mentioned as the capital of Southern Kusala in post-Buddhistic Sanskrit plays and epic poems. In the Mahabharata it is called Kui'avati. It is said to have been so named after Kusa., son of Rama, by whom it was built; and it is also called Kuj-asthali. I. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 249 with the ten cries ; that is to say, the noise of ele- phants, and the noise of horses, and the noise of chariots ; the sounds of the drum, of the tabor, and of the lute ; the sound of singing, and the sounds of the cymbal and of the gong ; and lastly, with the cry, " Eat, drink, and be merry M" A 4. ' The royal city Kusavatt, Ananda, was sur- rounded by Seven Ramparts. Of these, one rampart was of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal, and one of agate, and one of coral, and one of all kinds of gems M' ^ This enumeration is found also at Gataka, p. 3, only that the chank is added there — wrongly, for that makes the number of cries eleven. ^ Beryl, agate, and coral are doubtful renderings of Pali names of precious substances, the exact meaning of which has been dis- cussed on the very slender evidence available (and hence, it seems to me, with very little certain result) by Burnouf in the ' Lotus de la Bonne Loi,' pp. 3 1 9-3 2 1 ; and Professor Max Miiller has a further note in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, 1880, p. 178. The Pdli words here are in the first column : 1. Sova;/«amayo, Suvar«asya; 2. Rupimayo, Rfjpasya; 3. Ve/uriyamayo, Vaia'uryasya ; 4. Phalikamayo, Spha/ikasya ; 5. Lohitahkamayo, Lohitamuktasya ; 6. Masaragallamayo, Asmagarbhasya ; 7. Sabbaratanamayo, IMusaragalvasya : those in the second being taken from the Sukhavativyuha in the passage corresponding to § 6 below. It is quite possible that the writers of these passages used the rarer words only as names of precious substances, without attaching any clearly distinct meaning to each (compare Rev. xxi. 19-21). The Pali author seems to have been hard put to it to find enough names to fill up the sacred number seven ; just as in the ' Seven Jewels ' of the D ham ma, the sacred number seven is reached by giving to one jewel two distinct names (Pa?!/^:' indriyani = parl/^a balani). At .^ulla Vagga IX, i, 4 we find the following enumeration of 250 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. 5. ' To the royal city Kusavati, Ananda, there were Four Gates. One gate was of gold, and one of silver, and one of jade, and one of crystal. At each gate seven pillars were fixed ; in height as three times or as four times the height of a man. And one pillar was of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal, and one of agate, and one of coral, and one of all kinds of gfems. 6. ' The royal city Kusavatt, Ananda, was sur- rounded by Seven Rows of Palm Trees. One row was of palms of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal, and one of agate, and one of coral, and one of all kinds of gems. 7. * And the Golden Palms had trunks of gold, and leaves and fruits of silver. And the Silver Palms had trunks of silver, and leaves and fruits of gold. And the Palms of Beryl had trunks of beryl, and leaves and fruits of crystal. And the Crystal Palms had trunks of crystal, and leaves and fruits of beryl. And the Agate Palms had trunks of agate, and leaves and fruits of coral. And the Coral Palms had trunks of coral, and leaves and fruits of agate. And the Palms of every kind of Gem had trunks and leaves and fruits of every kind of gem. 8. ^'And when those rows of palm trees, Ananda, ratawas as found in the ocean, though only Nos. i, 4, 5, 6 are really produced there : 1. Mutta. 6. Pava/aw/. 2. Mawi. 7. R2Lgata.m. 3. Ve/uriyo. 8. Ga.taviip3.m. 4. Sahkho. 9. Lohitahko. 5. Sila. 10. Masaragallaz«. ^ This section and § 9 should be compared with one in the Sukhavativyuha, translated by Professor Max Miiller as follows (Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, 1880, p. 170) : ' And again, O 6'ariputra, when those rows of palm trees and I. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 25 1 were shaken by the wind, there arose a sound sweet, and pleasant, and charming, and intoxicating. 'Just, Ananda, as the seven kind of instruments yield, when well played upon, to the skilful man, a sound sweet, and pleasant, and charming, and in- toxicating — just even so, Ananda, when those rows of palm trees were shaken by the wind, there arose a sound sweet, and pleasant, and charming, and intoxicating. 9. ' And whoever, Ananda, in the royal city Kusavati were at that time gamblers, drunkards, and given to drink, they used to dance round to- gether to the sound of those palms when shaken by the wind. 10. 'The Great King of Glory, Ananda, was the possessor of Seven Precious Things, and was gifted with Four Marvellous Powers.' 'What are those seven?' 11. ^'In the first place, Ananda, when the Great King of Glory, on the Sabbath day^ on the day of strings of bells in that Buddha country are moved by the wind, a sweet and enrapturing sound proceeds from them. Yes, O ^Sari- putra, as from a heavenly musical instrument consisting of a hun- dred thousand ko/is of sounds, when played by Aryas, a sweet and enrapturing sound proceeds ; a sweet and enrapturing sound proceeds from those rows of palm trees and strings of bells moved by the wind. ' And when the men there hear that sound, reflection on Buddha arises in their body, reflection on the Law, reflection on the Assembly.' Compare also below, § 81, and Gataka I, 32. ^ The following enumeration is found word for word in several other Pali Suttas, and occurs also, in almost identical terms, in the Lalita Vistara (Calcutta edition, pp. 14-19). ^ Uposatha, a weekly sacred day; being full-moon day, new- moon day, and the two equidistant intermediate days. Comp. § 21. 252 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. the full moon, had purified himself, and had gone up into the upper story of his palace to keep the sacred day, there then appeared to him the heavenly Treasure of the WheeP, with its nave, its tire, and all its thousand spokes complete. 12. 'When he beheld it the Great King of Glory thought : ' " This saying have I heard, ' When a king of the warrior race, an anointed king, has purified himself on the Sabbath day, on the day of the full moon, and has gone up into the upper story of his palace to keep the sacred day; if there appear to him the heavenly Treasure of the Wheel, with its nave, its tire, and all its thousand spokes complete — that king becomes a king of kings invincible.' May I, then, become a king of kings invincible ^." 13. 'Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory rose from his seat, and reverently uncovering from one shoulder his robe, he held in his left hand a pitcher, and with his right hand he sprinkled water up over the Wheel, as he said : ' " Roll onward, O my Lord, the Wheel ! O my Lord, go forth and overcome!" 14. ' Then the wondrous Wheel, Ananda, rolled onwards towards the region of the East, and after it went the Great King of Glory ^ and with him his ^ ^akka-ratanaw/, where the ^akka is the disk of the sun. ^ ^akkavattira^a. ^ Atha kho ^akka-ratanaw puratthimaw disaw pavatti anvad eva ra^a Mahasudassano, &c. Here anvad must be the Sanskrit anvznk. The Lalita Vistara has anveti in the corresponding passage, and the (Phayre Burmese) MS. here reads anud eva. The verb in the second clause must be supplied, as I- MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 253 arm)^ horses, and chariots, and elephants, and men. And in whatever place, Ananda, the Wheel stopped, there the Great King of Glory took up his abode, and with him his army, horses, and chariots, and elephants, and men. 15. 'Then, Ananda, all the rival kings in the region of the East came to the Great King of Glory and said : ' '* Come, O mighty king ! Welcome, O mighty king ! All is thine, O mighty king ! Do thou, O mighty king, be a Teacher to us ! " 16. ' Thus spake the Great King of Glory : ' " Ye shall slay no living thing. ' " Ye shall not take that which has not been given. ' " Ye shall not act wrongly touching the bodily desires. * " Ye shall speak no lie. ' "Ye shall drink no maddening drink. ' " Ye shall eat as ye have eaten \" A 17. 'Then, Ananda, all the rival kings in the region of the East became subject unto the Great King of Glory. 18. 'But the wondrous Wheel, Ananda, having plunged down into the great waters in the East, rose up out again, and rolled onward to the region of the South [and there all happened as had hap- is the case in the one or two other passages where I have met with this phrase. ^ Yathabhuttawz bhuw^atha. Buddhaghosa has no comment on this. I suppose it means, ' Observe the rules current among you regarding clean and unclean meats.' If so, the Great King of Glory disregards the teaching of the Amagandha Sutta, quoted in 'Buddhism,' p. 131. 254 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. pened in the region of the East. And in hke manner the wondrous Wheel rolled onward to the extremest boundary of the West and of the North ; and there, too, all happened as had happened in the region of the East]. 19. ' Now when the wondrous Wheel, Ananda, had gone forth conquering and to conquer o'er the whole earth to its very ocean boundary, it returned back again to the royal city of Kusavati and re- mained fixed on the open terrace in front of the entrance to the inner apartments of the Great King of Glory, as a glorious adornment to the inner apartments of the Great King of Glory. 20. 'Such, Ananda, was the wondrous Wheel which appeared to the Great King of Glory. 21. ' Now further, Ananda, there appeared to the Great King of Glory the Elephant Treasure \ all white, sevenfold firm ^, wonderful in power, flying through the sky — the Elephant-King, whose name was "The Changes of the Moon^" 22. * When he beheld it the Great King of Glory was pleased at heart at the thought : * Hatthi-ratana. ''■ Satta-ppatittho, that is, perhaps, in regard to its four legs, two tusks, and trunk. The expression is curious, and Buddha - ghosa has no note upon it. It is quite possible that it merely sig- nifies ' exceeding firm,' the number seven being used without any hard and fast interpretation. ^ Uposatho. In the Lalita Vistara its name is 'Wisdom' (Bodhi). Uposatha is the name for the sacred day of the moon's changes — first, and more especially the full-moon day ; next, the new-moon day ; and lastly, the days equidistant between these two. It was therefore a weekly sacred day, and, as Childers says, may often be well rendered ' Sabbatli.' I. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 255 * " Auspicious were it to ride upon that Elephant, if only it would submit to be controlled ! " A 23. 'Then, Ananda, the wondrous Elephant — like a fine elephant of noble blood long since well trained — submitted to control. 24. ' When as before, Ananda, the Great King of Glory, to test that wondrous Elephant, mounted on to it early in the morning, it passed over along the broad earth to its very ocean boundary, and then returned again, in time for the morning meal, to the royal city of Kusavati ^ 25. 'Such, Ananda, was the wondrous Elephant that appeared to the Great King of Glory. 26. ' Now further, Ananda, there appeared to the Great King of Glory the Horse Treasure^, all white with a black head, and a dark mane, wonderful in power, flying through the sky — the Charger-King, whose name was " Thunder-cloud^." 2^. 'When he beheld it, the Great King of Glory was pleased at heart at the thought : ' "Auspicious were it to ride upon that Horse if only it would submit to be controlled !" 28. 'Then, Ananda, the wondrous Horse — like ^ Compare on this and § 29 my ' Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 85, where a similar phrase is used of Kanthaka. ^ Assa-ratanaw/. ^ Valahako. Compare the Valahassa (7ataka (Fausboll, No. 196, called in the Burmese MS. Valahakassa G^ataka), of which the Chinese story translated by JMr. Beal at pp. 332-340 of his ' Romantic History,' &c., is an expanded and altered version. In the Valahaka Sa?«yutta of the Sawyutta Nikaya the spirits of the skies are divided into U«ha-valahaka Deva, Sita-valahaka Deva, Abbha-valahaka Deva, Vata-valahaka Deva, and Vassa-valahaka Deva, that is, the cloud-spirits of cold, heat, air, wind, and rain respecdvely. 256 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. a fine horse of the best blood long since well trained — submitted to control. 29. 'When as before, Ananda, the Great King of Glory, to test that wondrous Horse, mounted on to it early in the morning, it passed over along the broad earth to its very ocean boundary, and then returned again, in time for the morning meal, to the royal city of Kusavatt. 30. 'Such, Ananda, was the wondrous Horse that appeared to the Great King of Glory. 31. ' Now further, Ananda, there appeared to the Great King of Glory the Gem-Treasured That Gem was the Ve/uriya, bright, of the finest species, with eight facets, excellently wrought, clear, trans- parent, perfect in every way. 32. ' The splendour, Ananda, of that wondrous Gem spread round about a league on every side. 33. ' When as before, Ananda, the Great King of Glory, to test that wondrous Gem, set all his fourfold army in array and raised aloft the Gem upon his standard top, he was able to march out in the gloom and darkness of the night. 34. ' And then too, Ananda, all the dwellers in the villages, round about, set about their daily work, thinking, " The daylight hath appeared." 35. ' Such, Ananda, was the wondrous Gem that appeared to the Great King of Glory. A 36. ' Now further, Ananda, there appeared to the Great King of Glory the Woman-Treasure^, graceful in figure, beautiful in appearance, charming in manner, and of the most fine complexion; neither ^ Mawi-ratanaw. ^ Itthi-ratanaw. I. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 257 very tall, nor very short ; neither very stout, nor very slim ; neither very dark, nor very fair ; sur- passing human beauty, she had attained unto the beauty of the gods ^ 37. 'The touch too, Ananda, of the skin of that wondrous Woman was as the touch of cotton or of cotton wool : in the cold her hmbs were warm, in the heat her limbs were cool ; while from her body was wafted the perfume of sandal wood and from her mouth the perfume of the lotus. 38. 'That Pearl among Women too, Ananda, used to rise up before the Great King of Glory, and after him retire to rest ; pleasant was she in speech, and ever on the watch to hear what she might do in order so to act as to give him pleasure. 39. ' That Pearl among Women too, Ananda, was never, even in thought, unfaithful to the Great King of Glory — how much less then could she be so with the body ! 40. ' Such, Ananda, was the Pearl among Women who appeared to the Great King of Glory. 41. 'Now further, Ananda, there appeared unto the Great King of Glory a Wonderful Trea- surer^, possessed, through good deeds done in a ^ The above description of an ideally beautiful woman is of frequent occurrence. ^ Gahapati-ratana/^z. The word gahapati has been hitherto usually rendered ' householder,' but this may often, and would certainly here, convey a wrong impression. There is no single word in English which is an adequate rendering of the term, for it connotes a social condition now no longer known among us. The gahapati was the head of a family, the representative in a village community of a family, the pater familias. So the god of fire, with allusion to the sacred fire maintained in each house- hold, is called in the Rig-veda the gr/'hapati, the pater familias, [II] S 258 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. former birth, of a marvellous power of vision by which he could discover treasure, whether it had an owner or whether it had not. 42. 'He went up to the Great King of Glory, and said : ' "Do thou, O King, take thine ease ! I will deal with thy wealth even as wealth should be dealt with." 43. ' Then, as before, Ananda, the Great King of Glory, to test that wonderful Treasurer, went on board a boat, and had it pushed out into the current in the midst of the river Ganges. Then he said to the wonderful steward : ' " I have need, O Treasurer, of yellow gold !" ' " Let the ship then, O Great King, go alongside either of the banks." ' " It is here, O Treasurer, that I have need of yellow gold." 44. ' Then the wonderful Treasurer reached down to the water with both his hands, and drew up a jar of the human race. Thence it is often used in opposition to brah- m a«a very much as we might use ' yeoman ' in opposition to ' clerk ' j (Gataka I, 83, and below, § 53); and the two combined are used j in opposition to people of other ranks and callings held to be ] less honourable than that of clerk or yeoman (Gataka I, 218). In this respect the term gahapati is nearly equivalent, though from a different point of view, to the Kshatriyas and Vai^yas of the Hindu caste division ; but the compound brahma^za-gahapatika , as a collective term comes to be about equivalent to ' priests and laymen' (see, for instance, below, § 53, and Maha Vagga I, 22; 3, 4, &c.) Then again the gahapati is distinct from the subor- dinate members of the family, who had not the control and management of the common property (Sama?l7ia Phala Sutta, 133, = Tevi^^a Sutta I, 47); and it is this implication of the term that is emphasised in the text. Buddhaghosa uses, as an expla- natory phrase, the words se//-^i-gahapati. See further the passages quoted in the index to the A'uUa Vagga (p. 354). \ I. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 259 full of yellow gold, and said to the Great King of Glory : ' " Is chat enough, O Great King ? Have I done enough, O Great King ?" ' And the Great King of Glory replied : "■' * " It is enough, O Treasurer. You have done enough, O Treasurer. You have offered me enough, O Treasurer!" 45. 'Such was the wonderful Treasurer, Ananda, who appeared to the Great King of Glory. 46. ' Now further, Ananda, there appeared to the Great King of Glory a Wonderful Adviser ^ learned, clever, and wise ; and qualified to lead the Great King of Glory to undertake what he ought to undertake, and to leave undone what he ought to leave undone. 47. ' He went up to the Great King of Glory, and said : ' " Do thou, O King, take thine ease ! I will be thy guide." 48. 'Such, Ananda, was the wonderful Adviser who appeared to the Great King of Glory. ' The Great King of Glory was possessed of these Seven Precious Things. 49. ' Now further, Ananda, the Great King of Glory was gifted with Four Marvellous Gifts^.' * What are the Four Marvellous Gifts ? ' ^ Pariwayaka-ratana/;/. Buddhaghosa says that he was the eldest son of the king ; but this is probably a mere putting back into the Sutta of a later idea derived from the summary in the Gataka. The Lalita Vistara makes him a general. "^ ^atuhi iddhihi. Here again, as elsewhere, it will be noticed that there is nothing supernatural about these four Iddhis. See S 2 26o THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. 50. ' In the first place, Ananda, the Great King of Glory was graceful in figure, handsome in ap- pearance, pleasing in manner, and of most beautiful complexion, beyond what other men are. 'The Great King of Glory, Ananda, was endowed with this First Marvellous Gift. 51. 'And besides that, Ananda, the Great King of Glory was of long life, and of many years, beyond those of other men. 'The Great King of Glory, Ananda, was endowed with this Second Marvellous Gift. 52. 'And besides that, Ananda, the Great King of Glory was free from disease, and free from bodily suffering ; and his internal fire was neither too hot nor too cold, but such as to promote good digestion, beyond that of other men \ the notes above on the ' Book of the Great Decease,' I, i ; III, 2. They are merely attributes accompanying or forming part of the majesty (iddhi) of the iTakkavatti. ^ Samavepakiniya gahawiya samannagato natisitaya na/^/^uwhaya. The same thing is said of Ra///^ap^la in the Ra/Z/^apala Sutta, where Gogerly renders the whole passage, * Ra//^apala is healthy, free from pain, having a good digestion and appetite, being troubled with no excess of either heat or cold' (Journal of the Ceylon Asiatic Society, 1 847-1 848, p. 98). The gahawi is a supposed particular organ or function situate at the junction of the stomach and intestines. IMoggallana explains it, udare tu tatha pa/C'analasmi7« gahawi (Abhidhana-ppadipika, 972), where Subhfiti's Sinhalese version is 'kukshi, pakagni,' and his English version, ' the belly, the internal fire which pro- motes digestion.' Buddhaghosa explains samavipakiya kam- ma^a-te_f o-dhatuya, and adds, 'If a man's food is dissolved the moment he has eaten it, or if it remains like a lump, he has not the samavepakini gahawi, but he who has appetite (bhatta/^- k/ia.ndo) when the time for food comes round again, he has the samavepakini gaha^n/ — which is delightfully naive. I. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 26 1 'The Great King of Glory, Ananda, was endowed with this Third Marvellous Gift. A 53. 'And besides that, Ananda^ the Great King of Glory was beloved and popular with Brahmans and with laymen alike ^ Just, Ananda, as a father is near and dear to his own sons, just so, Ananda, was the Great King of Glory beloved and popular with Brahmans and with laymen alike. And just, Ananda, as his sons are near and dear to a father, just so, Ananda, were Brahmans and laymen alike near and dear to the Great King of Glory. 54. ' Once, Ananda, the Great King of Glory marched out with all his fourfold army to the pleasure ground. There, Ananda, the Brahmans and laymen went up to the Great King of Glory, and said : ' " O King, pass slowly by, that we may look upon thee for a longer time ! " 'But the Great King of Glory, Ananda, addressed his charioteer, and said : ' " Drive on the chariot slowly, charioteer, that I may look upon my people (Brahmans and laymen) for a longer time !" 55. 'This was the Fourth Marvellous Gift, Ananda, with which the Great King of Glory was endowed. 56. ' These are the Four Marvellous Gifts, Ananda, with which the Great King of Glory was endowed. 57. 'Now to the Great King of Glory, Ananda, there occurred the thought: '"Suppose, now, I were to make Lotus-ponds ^ Brahmawa-gahapatikanaw. See the note on § 41. 262 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. in the spaces between these palms, at every hun- dred bow lengths." * Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory, in the spaces between those palms, at distances of a hun- dred bow lengths, made Lotus-ponds. 58. ' And those Lotus-ponds, Ananda, were faced with tiles of four kinds. One kind of tile was of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal. 59. 'And to each of those Lotus-ponds, Ananda, there were four flights of steps, of four different kinds. One flight of steps was of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal. The flight of golden steps had balustrades of gold, with the cross bars and the figure head of silver. The flight of silver steps had balustrades of silver, with the cross bars and the figure head of gold. The flight of beryl steps had balustrades of beryl, with the cross bars and the figure head of crystal. The flight of crystal steps had balustrades of crystal, with cross bars and figure head of beryl. 60. ' And round those Lotus-ponds there ran, Ananda, a double railing. One railing was of gold, and one was of silver. The golden railing had its posts of gold, and its cross bars and its capitals of silver. The silver railing had its posts of silver, and its cross bars and its capitals of gold ^ ^ Pokkharawi, the word translated Lotus-pond, is an artificial pool or small lake for water plants. There are some which are probably nearly as old as this passage still in good preservation in Anuradhapuru in Ceylon. Each is oblong, and has its tiles and its four flights of steps, and some had railings. The balustrades, cross bars, figure head, and railing are in Pali thambhS, sd^iyo, unhisaw, and vedika, of the exact meaning of which I am not quite confident. They do not occur in the description I. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 263 61. * Now, to the Great King of Glory, Ananda, there occurred the thought : ' *' Suppose, now, I were to have flowers of every season planted in those Lotus-ponds for the use of all the people — to wit, blue water lilies and blue lotuses, white lotuses and white water lilies." A ' Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory had flowers of every season planted in those Lotus- ponds for the use of all the people — to wit, blue water lilies and blue lotuses, white lotuses and white water lilies. 62. ' Now, to the Great King of Glory, Ananda, occurred the thouofht : * " Suppose, now, I were to place bathing-men on the banks of those Lotus-ponds, to bathe such of the people as come there from time to time." A ' Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory placed bathing-men on the banks of those Lotus-ponds, to bathe such of the people as come there from time to time. 63. * Now, to the Great King of Glory, Ananda, occurred the thougfht: ' " Suppose, now, I were to establish a perpetual grant by the banks of those Lotus-ponds — to wit, food for the hungry, drink for the thirsty, raiment for the naked, means of conveyance for those who have need of it, couches for the tired, wives for of the Lotus-lakes in Sukhavati. General Cunningham says that the cross bars of the Buddhist railings are called su-^iyo in the inscriptions at Bharhut (The Stupa of Bharhut, p. 127). Buddha- ghosa, who is good enough to tell us the exact number of the ponds — to wit, 84,000, has no explanation of these words, merely saying that of the two vedikas one was at the limit of the tiles and one at the Hmit of the parivewa. The phrases in the text are repeated below, §§ 73-87, of the Palace of Righteousness. 264 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. ' CH. those who want wives, gold for the poor, and money for those who are in want." * Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory esta- blished a perpetual grant by the banks of those Lotus-ponds— to wit, food for the hungry, drink for the thirsty, raiment for the naked, means of con- veyance for those who needed it, couches for the tired, wives for those who wanted wives, gold for the poor, and money for those who were in want. 64. * Now, Ananda, the people (Brahmans and laymen) went to the Great King of Glory, taking with them much wealth. And they said : * " This abundant wealth, O King, have we brought here for the use of the King of Kings. Let the King accept it of us!" ' " I have enough wealth, my friends, laid up for myself, the produce of righteous taxation. Do you keep this, and take away more with you !" 65. ' When those men were thus refused by the King they went aside and considered together, saying : ' " It would not beseem us now, were we to take back this wealth to our own houses. Suppose, now, we were to build a mansion for the Great Kine of Glory." 66. ' Then they went to the Great King of Glory, and said : * "A mansion would we build for thee, O King!'" * " Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory signi- fied, by silence, his consent. 67. ' Now, Ananda, when Sakka, the king of the gods, became aware in his mind of the thoughts that I. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 265 were in the heart of the Great King of Glory, he addressed Vissakamma the god^, and said: ' " Come now, Vissakamma, create me a mansion for the Great King of Glor) - — a palace which shall be called 'Righteousness ^"' 68. '"Even so, Lord!" said Vissakamma, in A assent, Ananda, to Sakka, the king of the gods. And as instantaneously as a strong man might stretch forth his folded arm, or draw in his arm again when it was stretched forth, so quickly did he vanish from the heaven of the Great Thirty-Three, and appeared before the Great King of Glory. A ^ 69. * Then, Ananda, Vissakamma the god said to the Great King of Glory : ' " I would create for thee, O King, a mansion — a palace which shall be called ' Righteousness !'" ' Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory signi- fied, by silence, his consent. "JO. ' So Vissakamma the god, Ananda, created for the Great King of Glory a mansion — a palace to be called " Righteousness." 71. 'The Palace of Righteousness, Ananda, was on the east and on the west a league in length, and on the north and on the south half a league in breadth. 72. ' The ground-floor, Ananda, of the Palace of Righteousness ^ in height as three times the height to which a man can reach, was built of bricks, of four kinds. One kind of brick was of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal. ^ Vissakamma/?/ devaputtaw, where devaputtawz means not ' son of a god,' but ' belonging to, born into the class of, the gods/ ^ Dhamma/zz nama Pasada;«. ^ Dhammassa pasadassa vatthu/w. 266 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. A J'^. ' To the Palace of Righteousness, Ananda, there were eighty-four thousand pillars of four kinds. One kind of pillar was of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal. 74. ' The Palace of Righteousness, Ananda, was fitted up with seats of four kinds. One kind of seat was of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal. 75. ' In the Palace of Righteousness, Ananda, there were twenty-four staircases of four kinds. One staircase was of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal. The staircase of gold had balustrades of gold, with the cross bars and the figure head of silver. The staircase of silver had balustrades of silver, with the cross bars and the figure head of gold. The staircase of beryl had balustrades of beryl, with the cross bars and the figure head of crystal. The staircase of crystal had balustrades of crystal, with cross bars and figure head of beryl. 76. ' In the Palace of Righteousness, Ananda, there were eighty-four thousand chambers of four kinds. One kind of chamber was of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal. ' In the golden chamber a silver couch was spread; in the silver chamber a golden couch ; in the beryl chamber a couch of ivory ; and in the crystal cham- ber a couch of coral. ' At the door of the golden chamber there stood a palm tree of silver ; and its trunk was of silver, and its leaves and fruits of gold. * At the door of the silver chamber there stood a palm tree of gold ; and its trunk was of gold, and its leaves and fruits of silver. I. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 267 *At the door of the beryl chamber there stood a palm tree of crystal ; and its trunk was of crystal, and its leaves and fruits of beryl. 'At the door of the crystal chamber there stood a palm tree of beryl ; and its trunk was of beryl, and its leaves and fruits of crystal. ']']. ' Now there occurred, Ananda, to the Great King of Glory this thought : * " Suppose, now, I were to make a grove of palm trees, all of gold, at the entrance to the chamber of the Great Complex \ under the shade of which I may pass the heat of the day." * Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory made a grove of palm trees, all of gold, at the entrance to the chamber of the Great Complex, under the shade of which he might pass the heat of the day. 78. ' The Palace of Righteousness, Ananda, was surrounded by a double railing. One railing was of gold, and one was of silver. The golden railing had its posts of gold, and its cross bars and its figure head of silver. The silver railing had its posts of silver, and its cross bars and its figure head of gold ^. 79. * The Palace of Righteousness, Ananda, was hung round with two networks of bells. One net- work of bells was of gold, and one was of silver. ^ Mahavyuhassa ku/agarassa dvare. The * Great Com- plex ' contains a double allusion, in the same spirit in which the whole legend has been worked out : i. To the Great Complex as a name of the Sun-God regarded as a unity of the four mytho- logical deities, Vasudeva, Sankarshawa, Pra^umna, and Aniruddha ; and 2. To the Great Complex as a name of a particular kind of deep religious meditation or speculation. ^ See above, § 60, and the note on § 54. 268 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. The golden network had bells of silver, and the silver network had bells of gold. 80. * And when those networks of bells, Ananda, were shaken by the wind there arose a sound sweet, and pleasant, and charming, and intoxicating. 'Just, Ananda, as the seven kind of instruments yield, when well played upon, to the skilful man, a sound sweet, and pleasant, and charming, and intoxicating — just even so, Ananda, when those networks of bells were shaken by the wind, there arose a sound sweet, and pleasant, and charming, and intoxicating. 81. ' And whoever, Ananda, in the royal city Kusavati were at that time gamblers, drunkards, and given to drink, they used to dance round toge- ther to the sound of those networks of bells when shaken by the wind. 82. ' When the Palace of Righteousness, Ananda, was finished it was hard to look at, destructive to the eyes. Just, Ananda, as in the last month of the rains in the autumn time, when the sky has become clear and the clouds have vanished away, the sun, springing up along the heavens, is hard to look at, A and destructive to the eyes, — ^just so, Ananda, when the Palace of Righteousness was finished was it hard to look at, and destructive to the eyes. St,. ' Now there occurred, Ananda, to the Great King of Glory this thought : * " Suppose, now, in front of the Palace of Right- eousness, I were to make a Lotus-lake to bear the name of * Righteousness.' " ' Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory made a Lotus-lake to bear the name of " Righteousness." 1. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 269 84. ' The Lake of Righteousness, Ananda, was on the east and on the west a league in length, and on the north and on the south half a league in breadth. 85. ' The Lake of Righteousness, Ananda, was faced with tiles of four kinds. One kind of tile was of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal. 86. 'The Lake of Righteousness, Ananda, had four and twenty flights of steps, of four different kinds. One flight of steps was of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal. The flight of golden steps had balustrades of gold, with the cross bars and the figure head of silver. The flight of silver steps had balustrades of silver, with the cross bars and the figure head of gold. The flight of beryl steps had balustrades of beryl, with the cross bars and the figure head of crystal. The flight of crystal steps had balustrades of crystal, with cross bars and figure head of beryl. Sy. ' Round the Lake of Righteousness, Ananda, there ran a double railing. One railing was of gold, and one was of silver. The golden railing had its posts of gold, and its cross bars and its capitals of silver. The silver railing had its posts of silver, and its cross bars and its capitals of gold. 88. ' The Lake of Righteousness, Ananda, was surrounded by seven rows of palm trees. One row was of palms of gold, and one of silver, and one of beryl, and one of crystal, and one of agate, and one of coral, and one of all kinds of gems. 89. ' And the golden palms had trunks of gold, and leaves and fruits of silver. And the silver palms had trunks of silver, and leaves and fruits of gold. And the palms of beryl had trunks of beryl, 270 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. and leaves and fruits of crystal. And the crystal palms had trunks of crystal, and leaves and fruits of beryl. And the agate palms had trunks of agate, and leaves and fruits of coral. And the coral palms had trunks of coral, and leaves and fruits of agate. And the palms of every kind of gem had trunks and leaves and fruits of every kind of gem. 90. ' And when those rows of palm trees, Ananda, were shaken by the wind, there arose a sound sweet, and pleasant, and charming, and intoxicating. 'Just, Ananda, as the seven kind of instruments yield, when well played upon, to the skilful man, a sound sweet, and pleasant, and charming, and intoxicat- ing, — ^just even so, Ananda, when those rows of palm trees were shaken by the wind, there arose a sound sweet, and pleasant, and charming, and intoxicating. 91. 'And whoever, Ananda \ in the royal city Kusavati were at that time gamblers, drunkards, and given to drink, they used to dance round to- gether to the sound of those palms when shaken by the wind. 92. ' When the Palace of Righteousness, Ananda, was finished, and the Lotus-lake of Righteousness was finished, the Great King of Glory entertained with all good things those of the Sama;^as who, at that time, were held in high esteem, and those of the Brahmans who, at that time, were held in high esteem. Then he ascended up into the Palace of Righteousness.' End of the First Portion for Recitation. * This paragraph is perhaps repeated by mistake ; but it is scarcely less in harmony with its context at § 8 than it is here. It is more probable that § 92 followed, originally, immediately after § 82, with the Lotus-lake clause omitted. II. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 271 Chapter II. 1. 'Now there occurred, Ananda, this thought to the Great King of Glory : ' " Of what previous character, now, may this be the fruit, of what previous character the result, that I am now so mighty and so great ?" A 2. 'And then occurred, Ananda, to the Great King of Glory this thought : ' " Of three qualities is this the fruit, of three qualities the result, that I am now so mighty and so great, — that is to say, of giving, of self-conquest, and of self-control ^" 3. * Now the Great King of Glory, Ananda, as- cended up into the chamber of the Great Complex ; and when he had come there he stood at the door, and there he broke out into a cry of intense emotion : * " Stay here, O thoughts of lust ! * " Stay here, O thoughts of ill-will ! ' " Stay here, O thoughts of hatred ! ' " Thus far only, O thoughts of lust ! ' '* Thus far only, O thoughts of ill-will ! * " Thus far only, O thoughts of hatred ! " 4. 'And when, Ananda, the Great King of Glory had entered the chamber of the Great Complex, ^ I have here translated kamma by 'previous character' and by 'quality.' The easiest plan would, no doubt, have been, to pre- serve in the translation the technical term karma, which is explained at some length in ' Buddhism,' pp. 99-106. 272 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. and had seated himself upon the couch of gold, having put away all passion and all unrighteousness, he entered into, and remained in, the First (7//ana, • — a state of joy and ease, born of seclusion, full of reflection, full of investigation, 5. ' By suppressing reflection and investigation, he entered into, and remained in, the Second 6^/^ana, — a state of joy and ease, born of serenity, without reflection, without investigation, a state of elevation of mind, of internal calm. 6. ' By absence of the longing after joy, he re- mained indifferent, conscious, self-possessed, experi- encing in his body that ease which the noble ones announce, saying, " The man indiiferent and self- possessed is well at ease," and thus he entered into, and remained in, the Third (S'/^ana. 7. ' By putting away ease, by putting away pain, by the previous dying away both of gladness and of sorrow, he entered into, and remained in, the Fourth G"//ina, — a state of purified self-possession and equa- nimity, without ease, and without pain \ 8. 'Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory went out from the chamber of the Great Complex, and entered the golden chamber and sat himself down on the silver couch. And he let his mind pervade ^ The above paragraphs are an endeavour to express the inmost feelings when they are first strung to the uttermost by the intense effects of deep rehgious emotion, and then feel the effects of what may be called, for want of a better word, the reaction. Most deeply religious natures have passed through such a crisis; and though the feelings are perhaps really indescribable, this passage is dealing, not with a vain mockery, but with a very real event in spiritual experience. II, MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 273 one quarter of the world with thoughts of Love; and so the second quarter, and so the third, and so the fourth. And thus the whole wide world, above, below, around, and everywhere, did he continue to pervade with heart of Love, far-reaching, grown great, and beyond measure, free from the least trace of anger or ill-will. 9. 'And he let his mind pervade one quarter of the world with thoughts of Pity ; and so the second quarter, and so the third, and so the fourth. And thus the whole wide world, above, below, around, and everywhere, did he continue to pervade with heart of Pity, far-reaching, grown great, and beyond measure, free from the least trace of anger or ill-will. 10. 'And he let his mind pervade one quarter of the world with thoughts of Sympathy ; and so the second quarter, and so the third, and so the fourth. And thus the whole wide world, above, below, around, and everywhere, did he continue to pervade with heart of Sympathy, far-reaching, grown great, and beyond measure, free from the least trace of anger or ill-will. 11. 'And he let his mind pervade one quarter of the world with thoughts of Equanimity^ ; and so the second quarter, and so the third, and so the fourth. And thus the whole wide world, above, below, around, and everywhere, did he continue to pervade with heart of Equanimity, far-reaching, grown great, and beyond measure, free from the least trace of anger or ill-will. ^ These are the four AppamaTi^ias or infinite feehngs, also called (e.g. below, § 11, 36) the four Brahma-viharas. They are here very appropriately represented to follow immediately after [II] T 2 74 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. 12. 'The Great King of Glory, Ananda, had four and eighty thousand cities, the chief of which was the royal city of Kusavatt : ' Four and eighty thousand palaces, the chief of which was the Palace of Righteousness : ' Four and eighty thousand chambers, the chief of which was the chamber of the Great Complex : * Four and eighty thousand divans, of gold, and silver, and ivory, and sandal wood, spread with long-haired rugs, and cloths embroidered with flowers, and magnificent antelope skins ; covered with lofty canopies ; and provided at both ends with purple cushions : ' Four and eighty thousand state elephants, with trappings of gold, and gilded flags, and golden coverings of network, — of which the king of ele- phants, called " the Changes of the Moon," was chief: * Four and eighty thousand state horses, with trappings of gold, and gilded flags, and golden coverings of network, — of which " Thunder-cloud," the king of horses, was the chief: 'Four and eighty thousand chariots, with cover- ings of the skins of lions, and of tigers, and of pan- thers, — of which the chariot called " the Flag of Victory" was the chief: ' Four and eighty thousand gems, of which the Wondrous Gem was the chief: ' Four and eighty thousand wives, of whom the Queen of Glory was the chief : the state of feeling described in the (r>^anas ; but they ought to be the constant companions of a good Buddhist (see Khaggavisana Sulta 8 ; and compare also Tevi^^^a Sutta III, 7 ; G^ataka, vol. i. p. 246 ; and the Araka Gataka, No. 169). II. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 275 ' Four and eighty thousand yeomen, of whom the Wonderful Steward was the chief: ' Four and eighty thousand nobles, of whom the Wonderful Adviser was the chief : ' Four and eighty thousand cows, with jute trap- pings, and horns tipped with bronze : * Four and eighty thousand myriads of garments, of delicate textures, of flax, and cotton, and silk, and wool : ' Four and eighty thousand dishes, in which, in the evening and in the morning, rice was served ^ 1 3. ' Now at that time, Ananda, the four and eighty thousand state elephants used to come every evening and every morning to be of service to the Great King of Glory. 14. 'And this thought occurred to the Great King of Glory : ' " These eighty thousand elephants come every evening and every morning to be of service to me. Suppose, now, I were to let the elephants come in alternate forty thousands, once each, every alternate hundred years ! " 15. 'Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory said to the Great Adviser: * " O, my friend, the Great Adviser ! these eighty thousand elephants come every evening and every morning to be of service to me. Now, let the elephants come, O my friend, the Great Adviser, in ^ Most of the trappings and cloths here mentioned are the same as those referred to in the Mzgg/nm?i Sila, §§ 5, 6, 7 recurring in the Tevi^^a Sutta, and in the Brahma^ala Sutta. The whole paragraph is four times repeated below, §§ 29, 31, 33, 37. T 2 276 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. alternate forty thousands, once each, every alternate hundred years !" ' " Even so, Lord ! " said the Wonderful Adviser, in assent, to the Great King of Glory. 16. ' From that time forth, Ananda, the elephants came in alternate forty thousands, once each, every alternate hundred years. 1 7. ' Now, Ananda, after the lapse of many years, of many hundred years, of many thousand years, there occurred to the Queen of Glory ^ this thought : ' " 'Tis long since I have beheld the Great King of Glory. Suppose, now, I were to go and visit the Great King of Glory." 18. 'Then, Ananda, the Queen of Glory said to the women of the harem : * " Arise now, dress your hair, and clad yourselves in fresh raiment. 'Tis long since we have beheld the Great King of Glory. Let us go and visit the Great King of Glory !'^ 19. '"Even so, Lady!" said the women of the harem, Ananda, in assent, to the Queen of Glory. And they dressed their hair, and clad themselves in fresh raiment, and came near to the Queen of Glory. 20. ' Then, Ananda, the Queen of Glory said to the Great Adviser : ' " Arrange, O Great Adviser, the fourfold army in array. 'Tis long since I have beheld the Great King of Glory. I am about to go to visit the Great King of Glory." ^ Subhadda Devi. Subhadda, 'glorious, magnificent,' is a not uncommon name both for men and women in Buddhist and post-Buddhistic Hindu literature. 11. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 277 21. '"Even so, O Queen!" said the Great Ad- viser, Ananda, in assent, to the Queen of Glory, And he set the fourfold army in array, and had the fact announced to the Queen of Glory in the words : ' " The fourfold army, O Queen, is set for thee in array. Do now whatever seemeth to thee fit." 22. 'Then, Ananda, the Queen of Glory, with the fourfold army, repaired, with the women of the harem, to the Palace of Righteousness. And when she had arrived there she mounted up into the Palace of Righteousness, and went on to the chamber of the Great Complex. And when she had reached it, she stopped and lent against the side of the door. 23. 'When, Ananda, the Great King of Glory heard the noise he thought : ' " What, now, may this noise, as of a great multi- tude of people, mean ?" 24. ' And going out from the chamber of the Great Complex, he beheld the Queen of Glory stand- ing leaning up against the side of the door. And when he beheld her, he said to the Queen of Glory : ' " Stop there, O Queen ! Enter not !" 25. 'Then the Great King of Glory, Ananda, said to one of his attendants : ' "Arise, good man ! take the golden couch out of the chamber of the Great Complex, and make it ready under that grove of palm trees which is all of gold." 26. '" Even so, Lord!" said the man, in assent, to the Great King of Glory. And he took the golden couch out of the chamber of the Great Complex, and made it ready under that grove of palm trees which was all of gold. 278 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. A 27. ' Then, Ananda, the Great King of Glory laid himself down in the dignified way a lion does ; and lay with one leg resting on the other, calm and self- possessed. 28. ' Then, Ananda, there occurred to the Queen of Glory this thought : ' " How calm are all the limbs of the Great King of Glory! How clear and bright is his appear- ance! O may it not be that the Great King of Glory is dead ^ ! " 29. * And she said to the Great King of Glory : ' " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand cities, the chief of which is the royal city of Kusavati. Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these ! quicken thy longing after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand palaces, the chief of which is the Palace of Righteousness. Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these ! quicken thy longing after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand chambers, the chief of which is the chamber of the Great Complex. Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these ! quicken thy longing after life ! * " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand divans, of gold, and silver, and ivory, and sandal wood, spread with long-haired rugs, and cloths embroidered with flowers, and magnificent antelope skins ; covered with lofty canopies ; and provided at both ends with purple cushions. Arise, ' The rather curious connexion between these clauses is worthy of notice in comparison with the legend of the ' Transfiguration ' just before the Buddha's death (above, pp. 80-82). II. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 279 O King, re-awaken thy desire for these ! quicken thy longing after Hfe ! ' " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand state elephants, with trappings of gold, and gilded flags, and golden coverings of network, — of which the king of elephants, called ' the Changes of the Moon,' is chief. Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these ! quicken thy longing after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand state horses, with trappings of gold, and gilded flags, and golden coverings of network, — of which ' Thunder-cloud,' the king of horses, is the chief. Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these! quicken thy longing after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand chariots, with coverings of the skins of lions, and of tigers, and of panthers, — of which the chariot called 'the Flag of Victory' is the chief Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these ! quicken thy longing after life ! * " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand gems, of which the Wondrous Gem is the chief Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these! quicken thy longing after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand wives, of whom the Queen of Glory is the chief. Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these! quicken thy longing after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand yeomen, of whom the Wonderful Steward is the chief. Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these ! quicken thy longing after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand nobles, of whom the Wonderful Adviser is the 2 8o THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. chief. Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these! quicken thy longing after Hfe ! , ' '* Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand cows, with jute trappings, and horns tipped with bronze. Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these ! quicken thy longing after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand myriads of garments, of delicate textures, of flax, and cotton, and silk, and wool. Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these ! quicken thy long- ing after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are those four and eighty thou- sand dishes, in which. In the evening and in the morning, rice is served. Arise, O King, re-awaken thy desire for these ! quicken thy longing after life!" A 30. 'When she had thus spoken, Ananda, the Great King of Glory said to the Queen of Glory : ' " Long hast thou addressed me, O Queen, in pleasant words, much to be desired, and sweet. Yet now in this last time you speak in words unpleasant, disagreeable, not to be desired." 31. ' " How then, O King, shall I address thee ?" * " Thus, O Oueen, shouldst thou address me : — The nature of all things near and dear to us, O King, is such that we must leave them, divide ourselves from them, separate ourselves from them^ Pass not away, O King, with longing in thy heart. Sad is the death of him who longs, unworthy Is the death of him who longs I Thine, O King, are these * The Pali words are the same as those at the beginning of the constantly repeated longer phrase to the same effect in the Book of the Great Decease. ^ Compare Gataka, No, 34. 11. MAKA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 28 1 four and eighty thousand cities, the chief of which is the royal city of Kusavati. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand palaces, the chief of which is the Palace of Righteousness. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand chambers, the chief of which is the chamber of the Great Complex. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand divans, of gold, and silver, and ivory, and sandal wood, spread with long-haired rugs, and cloths embroidered with flowers, and maonificent antelope skins ; covered with lofty canopies ; and provided at both ends with purple cushions. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand state elephants, with trappings of gold, and gilded flags, and golden coverings of network, — of which the king of elephants, called ' the Changes of the Moon,' is chief Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand state horses, with trappings of gold, and gilded flags, and golden coverings of network, — of which ' Thunder-cloud,' the king of horses, is the chief Cast away desire for these! long not after life! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand chariots, with coverings of the skins of lions, and of tigers, and of panthers, — of which the chariot called ' the Flag of Victory ' is the chief Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! 282 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand gems, of which the Wondrous Gem is the chief. Cast away desire for these ! long not after hfe ! * " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand wives, of whom the Queen of Glory is the chief. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! * " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand yeoman, of whom the Wonderful Steward is the chief Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand nobles, of whom the Wonderful Adviser is the chief. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand cows, with jute trappings, and horns tipped with bronze. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand myriads of garments, of delicate textures, of flax, and cotton, and silk, and wool. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand dishes, in which, in the evening and in the morning, rice is served. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life I " 2,2. 'When he thus spake, Ananda, the Queen of Glory wept and poured forth tears. 33. ' Then, Ananda, the Queen of Glory wiped away her tears, and addressed the Great King of Glory, and said : ' " The nature of all things near and dear to us, O King, is such that we must leave them, divide n. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 283 ourselves from them, separate ourselves from them. Pass not away, O King, with longing in thy heart. Sad is the death of him who longs, unworthy is the death of him who longs. Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thousand cities, the chief of which is the royal city of Kusavatt. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand palaces, the chief of which is the Palace of Righteousness. Cast away desire for these! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand chambers, the chief of which is the chamber of the Great Complex. Cast away desire for these ! long- not after life ! * " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand divans, of gold, and silver, and ivory, and sandal wood, spread with long-haired rugs, and cloths embroidered with flowers, and magnificent antelope skins ; covered with lofty canopies ; and provided at both ends with purple cushions. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! * " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand state elephants, with trappings of gold, and gilded flags, and golden coverings of network, — of which the king of elephants, called ' the Changes of the Moon,' is chief. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand state horses, with trappings of gold, and gilded flags, and golden coverings of network, — of which ' Thunder-cloud/ the king of horses, is the chief. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- 284 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. sand chariots, with coverings of the skins of lions, and of tigers, and of panthers, — of which the chariot called ' the Flag of Victory ' is the chief. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand gems, of which the Wondrous Gem is the chief. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand wives, of whom the Queen of Glory is the chief. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand yeomen, of whom the Wonderful Steward is the chief. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand nobles, of whom the Wonderful Adviser is the chief. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! * " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand cows, with jute trappings, and horns tipped with bronze. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life! ' " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand myriads of garments, of delicate textures, of flax, and cotton, and silk, and wool. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! * " Thine, O King, are these four and eighty thou- sand dishes, in which, in the evening and in the morning, rice is served. Cast away desire for these ! long not after life ! " A 34. ' Then immediately, Ananda, the Great King of Glory died. Just, Ananda, as when a yeoman has eaten a hearty meal he becomes all drowsy, II. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 285 A just so were the feelings he experienced, Ananda, as death came upon the Great King of Glory. A 35. ' When the Great King of Glory, Ananda, had died, he came to life again in the happy world of Brahma. A 36. ' For eight and forty thousand years, Ananda, the Great King of Glory lived the happy life of a prince ; for eight and forty thousand years he was vice- roy and heir-apparent ; for eight and forty thousand years he ruled the kingdom ; and for eight and forty thousand years he lived, as a layman, the noble life in the Palace of Righteousness. And then, when full of noble thoughts, he died ; he entered, after the dis- solution of the body, the noble world of Brahma \ A 37. ' Now it may be, Ananda, that you may think " The Great King of Glory of that time was another person." But, Ananda, you should not view the matter thus. I at that time was the Great King of Glory. * Mine at that time were the four and eighty thousand cities, of which the chief was the royal city of Kusavati. * Mine were the four and eighty thousand palaces, of which the chief was the Palace of Righteousness. ' Mine were the four and eighty thousand cham- bers, of which the chief was the chamber of the Great Complex. ' Mine were the four and eighty thousand divans, ^ The ' noble thoughts ' are the Brahma-viharas, described above, Chap. II, §§ 8-11. The ' noble Ufe' is the Brahma/C'ariyaw?, which does not mean the same as it does in Sanskrit. The adjec- tive Brahma may have reference here also to the subsequent (and consequent?) rebirth in the Brahma-loka. 286 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. of gold, and silver, and ivory, and sandal wood, spread with long-haired rugs, and cloths embroidered with flowers, and magnificent antelope skins ; covered with lofty canopies ; and provided at both ends with purple cushions. * Mine were the four and eighty thousand state elephants, with trappings of gold, and gilded flags, and golden coverings of network, — of which the king of elephants, called "the Changes of the Moon," was chief. * Mine were the four and eighty thousand state horses, with trappings of gold, and gilded flags, and golden coverings of network, — of which "Thun- der-cloud," the king of horses, was the chief. 'Mine were the four and eighty thousand chariots, with coverings of the skins of lions, and of tigers, and of panthers, — of which the chariot called " the Flag of Victory " was the chief. ' Mine were the four and eighty thousand gems, of which the Wondrous Gem was the chief. ' Mine were the four and eighty thousand wives, of whom the Queen of Glory was the chief. * Mine were the four and eighty thousand yeomen, of v/hom the Wonderful Steward was the chief. * Mine were the four and eighty thousand nobles, of whom the Wonderful Adviser was the chief. * Mine were the four and eighty thousand cows, with jute trappings, and horns tipped with bronze. * Mine were the four and eighty thousand myriads of garments, of delicate textures, of flax, and cotton, and silk, and wool. ' Mine were the four and eighty thousand dishes, in which, in the evening and in the morning, rice was served. 11. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 287 1 8. ' Of those four and eighty thousand cities, Ananda, one was that city in which, at that time, I used to dwell — to wit, the royal city of Kusavati. * Of those four and eighty thousand palaces too, Ananda, one was that palace in which, at that time, I used to dwell — to wit, the Palace of Righteousness. * Of those four and eighty thousand chambers too, Ananda, one was that chamber in which, at that time, I used to dwell — to wit, the chamber of the Great Complex. ' Of those four and eighty thousand divans too, A Ananda, one was that divan which, at that time, I used to occupy — to wit, one of gold, or one of silver, or one of ivory, or one of sandal wood. * Of those four and eighty thousand state ele- A phants too, Ananda, one was that elephant which, at that time, I used to ride — to wit, the king of elephants, " the Changes of the Moon." ' Of those four and eighty thousand horses too, A Ananda, one was that horse which, at that time, I used to ride — to wit, the king of horses, "the Thunder-cloud." * Of those four and eighty thousand chariots too, Ananda, one was that chariot in which, at that time, I used to ride — to wit, the chariot called " the Flag of Victory." * Of those four and eighty thousand wives too, Ananda, one was that wife who, at that time, used to wait upon me — to wit, either a lady of noble birth, or a Velamikant. * Of those four and eighty thousand myriads of suits of apparel too, Ananda, one was the suit of apparel which, at that time, I wore — to wit, one of delicate texture, of linen, or cotton, or silk, or wool. 288 THE GREAT KING OF GLORY. CH. ' Of those four and eighty thousand dishes too, A Ananda, one was that dish from which, at that time, I ate a measure of rice and the curry suitable thereto. 39. ' See, Ananda, how all these things are now past, are ended, have vanished away. Thus im- permanent, Ananda, are component things ; thus transitory, Ananda, are component things ; thus untrustworthy, Ananda, are component things. In- A somuch, Ananda, is it meet to be weary of, is it meet to be estranged from, is it meet to be set quite free from the bondage of all component things ! 40. * Now I call to mind, Ananda, how in this spot my body had been six times buried. And when I was dwelling here as the righteous king who ruled in righteousness, the lord of the four regions of the earth, the conqueror, the protector of his people, the possessor of the seven royal trea- sures — that was the seventh time. A 41. ' But I behold not any spot, Ananda, in the world of men and gods, nor in the world of Mara, nor in the world of Brahma, — no, not among the race of Sama?2as or Brahmans, of gods or men, — where the Tathagata for the eighth time will lay aside his body\' ^ The whole of this conversation between the Great King of Glory and the Queen is very much shorter in the Gataka, the enumeration of the possessions of the Great King being omitted (except the first clause referring to the four and eighty thousand cities), and clauses 34-38, 40, and 41 being also left out, § 39 and the concluding being placed in the mouth of the King immediately after § 33. This may be perhaps partly explained by the narrative style in which the G'atakas are composed — a style incompatible II. MAHA-SUDASSANA SUTTA. 289 42. Thus spake the Blessed One ; and when the Happy One had thus spoken, once again the Teacher said : * How transient are all component things ! Growth is their nature and decay : They are produced, they are dissolved again: And then is best, when they have sunk to rest^ !' End of the Maha-Sudassana Sutta. with the repetitions of the Suttas, and confined to the facts of the story. But I think that no one can read this Sutta in comparison with the short passage found in the Book of the Great Decease (above, pp. 99-101) without feeling that the latter is the more original of the two, and that the legend had not, when the Book of the Great Decease was composed, attained to its present extended form. We seem therefore really to have three stages of the legend before us, and though the Gataka story was actually put into its present shape at a known date (the fifth century of our era) long after the latest possible date for the Book of the Great King of Glory, it has probably preserved for us a reminiscence of what the legend was at the time when the Book of the Great Decease was composed. ^ On this celebrated verse, see the note at Mahaparinibbana Sutta VI, 16, where it is put into the mouth of Sakka, the king of the gods, and the discussion in the Introduction to this Sutta. [II] U SABBASAVA-SUTTA, U 2 INTRODUCTION TO THE SABBASAVA SUTTA. Dr. Morris, who had borrowed the Phayre and Tumour MSS. of the Ma^^//ima Nikaya from the India Office Library, has been good enough to transcribe the text of this Sutta for me, I had hoped from the Rev. David da Silva's analysis of the Sutta in the Ceylon Friend for 1872, that it would determine the exact meaning of the difficult word Asava as used in the theory of Arahatship, and in the important passage (the Faith, Reason, and Works paragraph) re- peated so often in the Mahaparinibbdna Sutta. It will be seen that this is scarcely the case, but as it does throw light on the ideas wrapped up in the word, and contains a very interesting passage ^ on the especial value attached in Buddhism to the mental habit we should now call agnosticism, I have adhered to the intention of including it in this volume. The word Asava seems in this Sutta to be used in a general sense, — not confined only to the Asavas of sen- suality, individuality, delusion, and ignorance, but including the more various defilements or imperfections of mind, out of which those especial defilements will proceed. Incidentally reference is made to the well-known Bud- dhist doctrine, that the right thing is to seek after the Nirva^za of a perfect life in Arahatship, and not to trouble and confuse oneself by the discussion of speculative ques- tions as to past or future existence, or even as to the '■ §§ 9. 10. 294 SABBASAVA SUTTA. presence within the body of a soul. Buddhism is not only independent of the theory of soul, but regards the con- sideration of that theory as worse than profitless, as the source of manifold delusions and superstitions. Practically this comes, however, to much the same thing as the denial of the existence of the soul ; just as agnosticism is, at best, but an earnest and modest sort of atheism. And we have seen above that anatta;^, the absence of a soul or self as abiding principle, is one of the three parts of Buddhist wisdom (vi^^a)^ and of Buddhist perception {sa;7;1a.)^. The reconciliation of these two doctrines, of the agnosticism and of the denial, is, I think, that the absence of soul is only predicated of those five Aggregates of parts and powers to which a good Buddhist should confine his attention. These alone he should consider ; and he does wrong to care whether beyond and beside them a soul has, or has not, any real existence. I may add that the importance of the Asavas appears from the fact that elsewhere the knowledge of them, of their origin, of their cessation, and of the way that leads to their cessation is placed on the road to Arahatship immediately after, and parallel to, the knowledge of Suffering, of its origin, of its cessation, and of the way that leads to its ces- sation — the knowledge, that is, of the four Noble Truths^. The Asavas there meant are sensuality, individuality (or life), and ignorance ; and the expressions ' to him who knows, to him who sees'" (^anato passato) are used there much in the same way as they are in our § 3. Per- haps this was the passage which Burnouf had in his mind when he wrongly said* that he had found in the Maha- parinibbana Sutta an enumeration of three classes of Asavas, whereas that Sutta always divides them into four classes. I am unable to suggest any good translation of the term itself — simple though it is. It means literally 'a running or flowing,' or (thence) ' a leak ; ' but as that figure is not ' See above, p. 162. » Sama«)4a Phala Sutta, p. 152. ''■ See above, p. 9. * Lotus de la Bonne Loi, p. 823. INTRODUCTION. 295 used in English in a spiritual sense, it is necessary to choose some other figure ; and it is not easy to find one that is appropriate. ' Sin '' would be very misleading, the Christian idea of sin being inconsistent with Buddhist ethics. A ' fault ' in the geological use of the word comes somewhat nearer. ' Imperfection ' is too long, and for ' stain ' the Pali has a different word \ In the Book of the Great Decease I have chosen 'evil;' here I leave the word untranslated. * Ra^o. See the verses translated in ' Buddhist Birth Stories,' p. 164. ALL THE ASAVAS. SABBASAVA-SUTTA. 1. Thus have I heard. The Blessed One was once staying at Savatthi, at the 6^etavana, in Anatha FindiksLS park. There the Blessed One addressed the brethren, and said, ' Bhikkhus.' ' Yea, Lord !' said those brethren, in assent, to the Blessed One. Then the Blessed One spake : 2. ' I will teach you, O brethren, the lesson of the A subjugation of all the Asavas. Listen well, and attend, and I will speak ! ' ' Even so. Lord ! ' said the brethren, in assent, to the Blessed One. Then the Blessed One spake : A ' I say that there is destruction of the Asavas, brethren, to him who knows, to him who sees ; not to him who knows not, to him who sees not. And what do I say, brethren, is the destruction of the A Asavas to him who knows, to him who sees ? It is (a matter of) wise consideration, and of foolish consideration. 3. ' In him, brethren, who considers unwisely, Asavas which have not arisen spring up, and Asavas which have arisen are increased. In him, brethren, A who considers wisely, Asavas which have not arisen SABBASAVA SUTTA. 297 spring not up, and Asavas which have arisen do not increase. 4. * There are Asavas which should be abandoned, brethren, by insight, there are Asavas which should A be abandoned by subjugation, there are Asavas which should be abandoned by right use, there are Asavas which should be abandoned by endurance, A there are Asavas which should be abandoned by avoidance, there are Asavas which should be aban- doned by removal, there are Asavas which should be abandoned by cultivation. 5. * And which, brethren, are the Asavas which should be abandoned by insight ^ ? ' In the first place, brethren, the ignorant uncon- verted man, who perceives not the Noble Ones, who cornprehends not, nor is trained according to the doctrine of the noble ones ; who perceives not good men, who comprehends not, nor is trained according to the doctrine of good men ; he neither understands what things ought to be considered, nor what things ought not to be considered ; the things that ought not to be considered, those he considers ; and the things that ought to be considered, those he does not consider. 6. ' And which, brethren, are those things which he should not consider, which he nevertheless con- siders ? ' There are things which, when a man considers them, the Asava of Lust springs up within him, which A had not sprung up before ; and the Asava of Lust, which had sprung up, grows great ; the Asava of ^ D ass ana. 298 ALL THE ASAVAS. Life Springs up within him, which had not sprung up before ; and the Asava of Life, which had spjung up, grows great ; the Asava of Ignorance springs up within him, which had not sprung up before ; and the Asava of Ignorance, which had sprung up, grows great. ' These are the things which ought not to be considered, things which he considers. 7. ' And which, brethren, are those things which should be considered, which he nevertheless does not consider ? * There are things, brethren, which, when a man considers them, the Asava of Lust, if it had not sprung up before, springs not up within him ; and the Asava of Lust, which had sprung up, is put away; the Asava of Life, if it had not sprung up before, springs not up within him ; and the Asava of Life, which had sprung up, is put away ; the Asava of Ignorance, if it had not sprung up before, springs not up within him ; and the Asava of Ignorance, which had sprung up, is put away. * These are the things which ought to be con- sidered, things which he does not consider. 8. ' It is by his consideration of those things, whick ought not to be considered ; and by his non- consideration of those things, which ought to be considered, that Asavas arise within him which had not sprung up ; and Asavas which had sprung up, grow great.' 9. ' Unwisely doth he consider thus : * " Have I existed during the ages that are past, or have I not ? What was I during the ages that are past? How was I during the ages that are SABBASAVA SUTTA. 299 past ? Having been what, what did I become in the ages that are past ? Shall I exist during the ages of the future, or shall I not ? What shall I be during the ages of the future ? How shall I be during the ages of the future? Having been what, what shall I become during the ages of the future ?" ' Or he debates within himself as to the present : "Do I after all exist, or am I not? How am I? This is a being ; whence now did it come, and whither will it q-q ? " 10. 'In him, thus unwisely considering, there springs up one or other of the six (absurd) notions \ ' As something true and real he gets the notion, '•' I have a self! " ' As something true and real he gets the notion, *' I have not a self! " ' As something true and real he gets the notion, " By my self, I am conscious of my self!" ' As something true and real he gets the notion, " By myself I am conscious of my non-self! " ' Or, again, he gets the notion, " This soul of mine can be perceived, it has experienced the result of good and evil actions committed here and there : now this soul of mine is permanent, lasting, eternal, has the inherent quality of never changing, and will continue for ever and ever!" II.' This, brethren, is called the walking in delu- sion, the jungle of delusion ^, the wilderness of de- lusion, the puppet show of delusion, the writhing of delusion, the fetter of delusion. 12. ' Bound, brethren, with this fetter of delusion, ^ Kha.nna.m di///^inam. ^ Di//,^i-gahanaw, with allusion, doubtless, if the reading is correct, to gaha«a»2. 300 ALL THE ASAVAS. the ignorant unconverted man becomes not freed from birth, decay, and death, from sorrows, lamenta- tions, pains, and griefs, and from expedients ^ — he does not become free, I say, from pain. 13. * But the wise man, brethren, the disciple walking in the Noble Path, who perceives the noble ones; who comprehends, and is trained according to, the doctrine of the Noble Ones ; who perceives good men, who comprehends, and is trained according to, the doctrine of good men ; he understands both what things ought to be considered, and what things ought not to be considered — and thus understand- ing, the things that ought to be considered those he considers ; and the things that ought not to be considered, those he does not consider. 14. 'And which, brethren, are those things which ought not to be considered, and which he does not consider ? ' There are things which, when a man considers them, the Asava of Lust springs up within him, which had not sprung up before ; and the Asava of Lust, which had sprung up, grows great ; the Asava of Life springs up within him, which had not sprung up before ; and the Asava of Life, which had sprung up, grows great ; the Asava of Ignorance springs up within him, which had not sprung up before ; and the Asava of Ignorance, which had sprung up, grows great. ' These are the things which ought not to be con- sidered, things which he considers. ^ That is, the practice of rites and ceremonies and the worship of Gods. SABBASAVA SUTTA. ■JOI 15. * And which, brethren, are those things which should be considered, and which he does consider ? ' There are things, brethren, which, when a man considers them, the Asava of Lust, if it had not sprung up before, springs not up within him ; and the Asava of Lust, which had sprung up, is put away; the Asava of Life, if it had not sprung up before, springs not up within him ; and the Asava of Life, which had sprung up, is put away ; the Asava of Ignorance, if it had not sprung up before, springs not up within him ; and the Asava of Ignorance, which had sprung up, is put away. ' These are the things which ought to be con- sidered, things which he does not consider. 16. * It is by his not considering those things which ought to be considered, and by his con- sidering those things which ought not to be con- sidered, that Asavas which had not sprung up within A him spring not up, and Asavas which had sprung up are put away. 17. ' He considers, "This is suffering." He con- siders, "This is the origin of suffering." He con- siders, " This is the cessation of suffering." He considers, "This is the way which leads to the cessa- tion of suffering." And from him, thus considering, the three fetters fall away — the delusion of self, hesitation, and the dependence on rites and cere- monies. * These are the Asavas, brethren, which are to be abandoned by insight. 18. 'And which are the Asavas to be abandoned by subjugation (samvara) ? ' Herein, brethren, a Bhikkhu, wisely reflecting. 302 ALL THE ASAVAS. remains shut in by the subjugation of the organ of Sight. For whereas to the man not shut in by the subjugation of the organ of sight Asavas may arise, full of vexation and distress, to the man shut in by the subjugation of the organ of sight the Asavas, full of vexation and distress, are not. 19. ' Wisely reflecting, he remains shut in by the subjugation of the organ of Hearing. For whereas to the man not shut in by the subjugation of the organ of hearing Asavas may arise, full of vexation and distress, to the man shut in by the subjugation of the organ of hearing the Asavas, full of vexation and distress, are not, 20. ' Wisely reflecting, he remains shut in by the subjugation of the organ of Smell. For whereas to the man not shut in by the subjugation of the organ of smell Asavas may arise, full of vexation and dis- tress, to the man shut in by the subjugation of the organ of smell the Asavas, full of vexation and distress, are not. 21. 'Wisely reflecting, he remains shut in by the subjugation of the organ of Taste. For whereas to the man not shut in by the subjugation of the organ of taste Asavas may arise, full of vexation and distress, to the man shut in by the subjugation of A the organ of taste the Asavas, full of vexation and distress, are not. 22. 'Wisely reflecting, he remains shut in by the subjugation of the organ of Touch. For whereas to the man not shut in by the subjugation of the organ of touch Asavas may arise, full of vexation and distress, to the man shut in by the subjugation of A the organ of touch the Asavas, full of vexation and distress, are not. SABBASAVA SUTTA. 303 23. 'Wisely reflecting, he remains shut in by the subjugation of the organ of Mind. For whereas to the man not shut in by the subjugation of the organ of mind Asavas may arise, full of vexation and dis- tress, to the man shut in by the subjugation of the organ of mind the Asavas, full of vexation and distress, are not. ' These, brethren, are called the Asavas to be abandoned by subjugation. 24. 'And which are the Asavas to be abandoned by right use ^ ? ' Herein, brethren, a Bhikkhu, wisely reflecting, makes use of his robes for the purpose only of warding off the cold, of warding off the heat, of warding off the contact of gad-flies and mosquitoes, of wind and sun, and snakes ; and of covering his nakedness^. 25. 'Wisely reflecting, he makes use of alms, not for sport or sensual enjoyment, not for adorning or beautifying himself, but solely to sustain the body in life, to prevent its being injured, to aid himself in the practice of a holy life — thinking the while, " Thus shall I overcome the old pain, and shall incur no new; and everywhere shall I be at ease, and free from blame." 26. 'Wisely reflecting, he makes use of an abode; only to ward off cold, to ward off heat, to ward off the contact of gad-flies and mosquitoes, of wind and sun, and snakes ; only to avoid the dangers of the climate, and to secure the delight of privacy. ^ Pa/isevana. 2 Compare Dickson's Kammava/^a, p. 7, where the reading, however, is wrong. 304 ALL THE ASAVAS. 27. ' Wisely reflecting, he makes use of medicine and other necessaries for the sick ; only to ward off the pain that causes injury, and to preserve his health. 28. 'For whereas, brethren, to the man not making such right use, Asavas may arise, full of vexation and distress ; to the man making such right use, the Asavas, full of vexation and distress, are not. ' These, brethren, are called the Asavas to be abandoned by right use. 29. ' And which, brethren, are the Asavas to be abandoned by endurance V ' Herein, brethren, a Bhikkhu, wisely reflecting, is patient under cold and heat, under hunger and thirst, under the contact of gad-flies and mosqui- toes, of wind and sun, and snakes ; he is enduring under abusive words, under bodily suffering, under pains however sharp, rough, severe, unpleasant, dis- agreeable, and destructive even to life. 30. ' For whereas, brethren, to the man who en- A dureth not, Asavas may arise, full of vexation and A distress; to him who endures, the Asavas, full of vexation and distress, are not. A * These, brethren, are called the Asavas to be abandoned by endurance. 31. 'And which, brethren, are the Asavas to be abandoned by avoidance ^ ? ' Herein, brethren, a Bhikkhu wisely reflecting, avoids a rogue elephant, he avoids a furious horse, he avoids a wild bull, he avoids a mad dog, a snake, a stump in the path, a thorny bramble, a pit, a precipice, a dirty tank or pool. When tempted to ^ Adhivasana. ^ Pariva^^ana. SABBASAVA SUTTA. 305 sit in a place where one should not sit, or to walk where one should not walk, or to cultivate the ac- quaintance of bad companions, he is skilled to shun the evil : and wisely reflecting he avoids that, as a place whereon one should not sit, that, as a place wherein one should not walk, those men, as com- panions that are bad. 32. ' For whereas, brethren, to the man who avoideth not, Asavas may arise, full of vexation and distress ; to him who avoids, the Asavas, full of vexation and distress, are not. A ' These, brethren, are called the Asavas to be abandoned by avoidance. 2,3. 'And which, brethren, are the Asavas to be abandoned by removal ^ ? ' Herein, brethren, a Bhikkhu, wisely reflecting, when there has sprung up within him a lustful thought, that he endureth not, he puts it away, he removes it, he destroys it, he makes it not to be ; when there has sprung up within him an angry thought, a malicious thought, some sinful, wrong dis- position, that he endureth not, he puts it away, he removes it, he destroys it, he makes it not to be. 34. ' For whereas, brethren, to the man who re- moveth not, Asavas may arise, full of vexation and A distress ; to him who removes, the Asavas, full of vexation and distress, are not. A ' These, brethren, are called the Asavas to be abandoned by removal. A 35. 'And which, brethren, are the Asavas to be abandoned by cultivation - ? ^ Vinodana. ^ Bhavana. [11] X 306 ALL THE ASAVAS. ' ^ Herein, brethren, a Bhikkhii, wisely reflecting, cultivates that part of the higher wisdom called Mindfulness, dependent on seclusion, dependent on passionlessness, dependent on the utter ecstasy of contemplation, resulting in the passing off of thoughtlessness. 36. ' He cultivates that part of the higher wisdom called Search after Truth, he cultivates that part of the higher wisdom called Energy, he cultivates that part of the higher wisdom called Joy, he cultivates that part of the higher wisdom called Peace, he cultivates that part of the higher wisdom called Earnest Contemplation, he cultivates that part of the higher wisdom called Equanimity — each dependent on seclusion, dependent on passionlessness, dependent on the utter ecstasy of contemplation, resulting in the passing off of thoughtlessness. 3 7. ' For whereas, brethren, to the man who cul- A tivateth not, Asavas may arise, full of vexation and distress ; to him who cultivates, the Asavas, full of vexation and distress, are not. A ' These, brethren, are called the Asavas to be abandoned by cultivation. 38. ' And then when a Bhikkhu has by insight put away the Asavas to be abandoned by insight, and by subjugation has put away the Asavas to be abandoned by subjugation, and by right use has put away the Asavas to be abandoned by right use, and by endurance has put away the Asavas to be abandoned by endurance, and by avoidance has put A away the Asavas to be abandoned by avoidance, ^ Compare Mahaparinibbana Sutta I, 9. SABBASAVA SUTTA. 307 A and by removal has put away the Asavas to be abandoned by removal, and by cultivation has put A away the Asavas to be abandoned by cultivation — that Bhikkhu, brethren, remains shut in by the sub- A jugation of the Asavas, he has destroyed that Craving Thirst, by thorough penetration of mind he has rolled away every Fetter, and he has made an end of Pain.' 39. Thus spake the Blessed One ; and those Bhikkhus, glad at heart, exalted the word of the Blessed One. End of the Sabbasava Sutta. X 2 INDEX. Abhibhayatanani, the eight, pages 49, 50. Addhariya Brahmans, 171. Age of the Suttas, x. A^atasattu, king of Magadha, i, 131. A^ita, one of the Six Teachers, 106. Aiiravati river, 167, 178. Alabaster, Mr., 141. Allakappa, name of a place, 132. A/ara Kalama, teacher, 75-77. Ambagama, near Vesali, 66. Ambala///iika, near Ra^agaha, 12. Ambapali, the courtezan, 28. — entertains the Buddha, 30-32. Ananda's sorrow and imperfection, 95, 96. — his character, 97, 98, 118, 119. Ananda ^etiya, 66. Angels. See Tavatiwzsa. — called devata, 45. — on the point of a needle, 88. — desire to become an, is spiritual bondage, 227, Angirasa, aVedic poet, 172. Apadesa, 66. Appama;7;?as, the four, 201, 273. Arahat Buddhas, 13, 104. Arahats, who are, &c., 107, 119. Arahatship and the Ten Fetters, 222. Arahatship and Nirvawa, 243. Asavas, 293-307. — translation of, 295. Assemblies, the eight, 48, 49. Astrology, 197, 198. Atuma, name of a village, 77. A//^aka, Vedic poet, 172. Bahuputta ATetiya, 40. Baptism, i. Beal, the Rev. Samuel, 118, 255. Beluva, near Vesali, 34. Benares, 99. Benares muslin, 54, 92. Bhadda, convert at Nadika, 25, 26. Bhagu, aVedic poet, 172. Bha«c/a-gama, near Vesali, 64, 66. Bharadva§-a, a young Brahman, 168- 170, — a Vedic poet, 172. Bhikkhu, meaning of, 5. Bhoga-nagara, near Vesali, 66. Bible, texts in, referred to — 1 Samuel xxviii, 208. 2 Kings vi. 17, 19. Matthew v. 20, 160. Matthew xi. 21, 46. Matthew xv. 14, xxii. 26, 173, Matthew xvii. 31, 207. Mark ix. 29, 207. Luke vii. 37-39* 34- Acts ii. 6, 142. Philippians ii. 12, 114. Philippians iii. 13, 7. 2 Peter i. 10, 114. Revelation xxi. 1 9-2 1, 245,249. Bigandet's Legend of Gaudama,xxxii. — quoted, xvi, 32, 33, 34, 82. Bodisat, the, 239. Bo^^/6anga, 9, 14. Bonds, the five, 181. — the ten, 222. Brahma, the supreme deity, 116, 162-165. Brahma/^ariya Brahmans, 171. Brahmans, 160, 180-185. — different schools of, 171. Brahma-viharas, the four, 201, 273. Brick Hall, the, at Nadika, 24. Buddha, the, description of character of, 27, 169. — his relation to the Order, 37. — his last illness, 35. — date of death of the, xlviii. Buddhahood, how reached, 14. lO THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. Buddhas, past and future, 13, 97, 104, — description of character of, 186. Buddhism, ancient summary of, 62, 63. — another, 65, — central doctrine of, 143, 144. Buddhist era, date of, xlv-xlviii. Buddhists, modern sects of, 129. Bulis of Allakappa, a clan, 132. Burial rites, xl^xlv, 92. Burnouf, Eugene, 50, 65, 75, 167. Cats, 14. Causation, chain of, 208. Cave dwellings, 56. Chetiyas, 4, 66. See Ketiya. — the seven at Vesali, 40, 58. Chinese works on the Great De- cease, xxxvi^xxix. Christianity, is it indebted to Bud- dhism? 165, 166. Clans, customs of, 3, 4. Cloth of gold, 80-82. — of Benares, 92. Conditions of the welfare of a com- munity, 6-1 1. — the F'our Noble, 64, 65, Confections (Sawkhara), 242, 243. Council of Ra^agaha, xii, xiii, xv. — of Patna, xiii. — of Vesali, xvii, xix. Cremation ceremonies, xl, Cunningham, General, 47, 263. Da Cuiiha, Mr., 140. Da Silva, the Rev. David, 211, 293. Dagaba, or tope, 93, 131-135. Dagabas, date of earliest, xvii. Dawn, as the Woman-Treasure of the King of Glory, 257. Deliverance, eight stages of, 51, 52. Delusion. See Ditt/A. Destiny, result of actions, 25, 26. Devata, note on meaning of, 45. Dhamma, 62, 64, 117, 118. Dhamma-^akkhu, 82, 96, 119, 127, 153- Dibba-/^akkhu, 209, 218. Dipavawsa, xxii. Di//^i. See Asava. — six kinds of, in detail, 297. Divinations condemned, 196. Do«a, a Brahman, 133, 134. Earthquake, occurrence of, 44. — eight causes of, 45-48. Elephant look, curious belief as to, 64. Era, date of the Buddhist, xlv-xlviii. Esoteric doctrine, none in Bud- dhism, 36. Existence, cause of renewed, 6. Eye, epithet of the Buddha, 84. Eye of Truth. SeeDhamma-zJakkhu. Fairies of the earth, 18, 19, 45. Faith, reason, and works, 11. Fa Kheu Pi Hu, a Chinese work, 117. Fausboil, Professor, 100. Feer, M. Leon, 139, 140. Fetters, the ten, 222, 307. — the first three, 299. Final perseverance of the saints, 26, 27, 114. Fortune-telling, 197, 199. Foucaux, M., 139. Funeral ceremonies, xl-xlv. Gaha^/i, curious belief as to, 260. Gahapati, pater familias, 257, 258. Games of chance and skill, 193. Gandhara, a city, 135. Gods, good men so called, 20, 21. Gogerly, the Rev. Samuel, 139, 144, 150, 260. Gotama, name of the Buddha, 103, 104, 169. Gotama's gate, 21. — own teaching, xx-xxii. Gotamaka A'etiya, 40. Great Decease, meaning of, xxxii. Grimblot's ' Sept Suttas Palis,' 50. Gains (and see Nigaw^^a), i. Gambugama, near Vesali, 66. Ga;msso«i, a Brahman, 167. G/Ana, 115, 210, 212. — the four, in detail, 272. Hardy, the Rev. Spence, 129, 142, 149.^ Hatthi-gama, near Vesali, 66. Hell, corresponding belief to, among the Buddhists, 17. Hindrances, the five, 182. Huth's 'Life of Buckle,' quoted, 164. Earth rests on water, 45. Iddhi, 2, 40, 259. INDEX, 311 Idealists, European and Buddhist, 49. ly^/^/^agala, in Kosala, 167. Incarnation of the Buddha, 46, 47. Infinite feelings, the four, incumbent on the Buddhist, 201, 273. Isigili, Mount at Rag-agaha, 56. Kakudha, convert at Nadika, 16, 25. Kakuttha river, 74. KaX'Hyana, one of the Six Teachers, 106. Kalandaka-nivapa, 56. Kalinga, convert at Nadika, 25, 26. Kalpa, an aeon, 41. Ka/asoka, xvi. Karma, 84, 165, 214, 217, 271. Kassapa. See Purawa-Kassapa and Maha-Kassapa. — a Vedic poet, 172. Ka/issabha, convert at Nadika, 25, 26. Koliyas of Ramagama, a clan, 132, Ko«ika = A^atasattu, i. Kosambi, a great city, 99. Ko/igama, near Patna, 23. Kuwika = A^atasattu, i . Kusavati, former name of Kusinara, 100, 248. Kusinara, where the Buddha died, 73, 100, 248. Ku/agara Hall at Vesali, 59. A'akkavatti, ideal of, xviii-xx. A'ampa, a city, 99. A'andragupta, xix. A'aiiki, a Brahman of Kosala, 167, A'apa'a A'etiya, 40, 58. A'/6andava Brahmans, 171. A'y^andoka Brahmans, 171. A'>6anna, the penalty imposed upon, 1 12. — attains Nirvana, 113. ATunda, the smith, of Pava, 70-73, 83,84. A'undaka, a mendicant, 82, 83. Lalita Vistara, quoted, 47, 75, 139, 209, 216, 218, 251. Life, future, virtue inspired by hope of is impure, 10, 222. Light of the world, 89. Li^^/javis, of Vesali, 31, 131. Lineage of the Buddhist faith, 14. Love, duty of universal, 163. Love, the true path to union with God, 161. — how a Buddhist should love the world, 2or, 273. Maddaku>^/^/ji at Ra^agaha, 56. Maha-Kassapa, the great disciple, 126-129. Mahapadesa, the four, 66-69. Mahavana, at Vesali, 59, 60. Makkhali, one of the Six Teachers, 106. Makma-bandhana, shrine of the Mal- las, 124. Malalankara-vatthu, the, xvi, xxxii. Mallas of Kusinara, i 21-135. — of Pava, 133, 135. Manasaka/a, in Kosala, 167, 168. Mandarava flowers from heaven, i 24. Mara, 41, 53. Max Miiller, Professor, 105, 180, 246. Milinda, king, xlviii. Mindful and thoughtful, doctrine of, 29, 38. Mirror of Truth, the so-called, 27. Monotheism, 164. Moriyas of Pipphalavana, a clan, 1 54, 135- Morris, Dr. Richard, 29, 221, 293. Muhammadanism, 163. Nadika, near Patna, 24. Naga Thera, 46. Nagas, the race of, 135, 136. Nalanda, near Ra^agaha, 12. Names (family, tribal, &c.), i. Nanda, king of Magadha, xix. Nature of things, doctrine of, 59- Nera%ara, river, 53. Niga«//6a, founder of the Gains, 106. Nika/a, convert at Nadika, 25, 26. Nirvawa, the Brethren not to be satisfied till they have attained, 7. — perception of, due to earnest thought, 9. — attainment of, dependent on one- self, 38. — consists of the seven jewels of the Law, 62. — is the rooting out of lust, bitter- ness, and delusion, 84. — the Supreme Goal of the higher life, no. — how the gods can attain to it, 163. 312 THE BUDDHIST SUTTAS. Nirva;za, emancipation of heart and mind, 218. — is the cessation of the Sawkharas, 241. — is one side of Arahatship, 243. Nissanka Malla, xlv. Nivarana, hindrances, 182. Noble Ones, the, 182, 272, 295, 298. Nymphs included under devata, 45. Oldenberg, Dr., xi, 139. Opasada in Kosala, 167. Order, the Buddhist, description of, 27. Parables : — The city guard and the cat, 14. Blind leading the blind, 173. The man in love, 175. The staircase up to nothing, 177. Praying to the further bank, 179. The manbound on the bank, 180, The manveiledonthebank, 182. The skilful musician, 201, 270. The hen and her chickens, 233. Pati,^/^a-samuppada, 209. Patimokkha. quoted, 10 1. — referred to, 188, 210. Patna. See Pa/aliputta. Paraligama, on the Ganges, 15-22. Pa/aliputta, prophecy concerning, XV, 18. Pava, last journey of the Buddha to, 70. Pavarika, grove at Nalanda, 12. Penetrability of matter, 214. Pentecost, day of, 141. Pilgrimage, the four places of, 90. Pipphalavana, name of a place, 134. Pischel, Professor, 75, 102. Pi/aka, lateness of the word, 67. Pi/akas and the New Testament, 165, 166. Pokkharasati, a Brahman, 167. Positions of mastery, the eight, 49,50. Probation before entering the Order, 109. Pubbe-nivasa-;7ana, 209, 215. Public assemblies of a clan, 3. Pukkusa, the young Mallian, 75-82. — name of a caste, 75. Purawa-Kassapa, one of the Six Teachers, 106, Ra^agaha, 1-12, 56, 99. Ramagama, 132, 135. Rapti river, 167. Realists, European and Buddhist, 49. Rebirth, four kinds of, 25, 26. Rest house, public, in a village, 15, 25. Ritualism condemned, 10. ■ — various kinds of, 199, Robbers' Cliff, 56. Sabbath day, the Buddhist, 251. Sahaka, a Bhikkhu, 163. Sakadagamin, 25, 26. Saketa, a town, 99. Sakka, king of the gods, 1 13, 142,264, Sakyas, the clan, 131. Sala trees, the twin, 85. Sa//^a, native of Nadika, 25. — the Thera, 164. Samadhi, 11, 145. Samawa-brahmans, 105. Samson and sun-myths, 245. Sawgharakkhita Thera, story of, 46. Sawkharas, the Confections, 242. Sawya^anas, the ten, 222. Santuttha, convert at Nadika, 25. Sa;7^aya, one of the Six Teachers, 106. Sa;7;7a, sevenfold, 9. SappasoWika Cave at Ra^agaha, 56. Sarandada, name of a shrine, 4, 40. Sariputta, i, i 2-14. Satippa//Mna, 14, 29, 38. Sattambaka ^etiya, 40. Sattapawwi Cave at Ra^agaha, 56. Savatthi, on the Rapti, 99, 167, 168. Senart's 'Legende du Bouddha,' xix, 245. Service Hall, 5, 60. Service, religious, how conducted among Buddhists, 16-18. Seven classes of gods, 154. Seven conditions of welfare, 2-7, Seven jewels of the Law, 29, 61-63. Seven sacred places at Ra^agaha, 56, 57- Seven sacred places at Vesali, 40, 58. Seven Treasures of a king of kings, 63, 251. Seven wondrous gems, 249. Sevenfold higher wisdom, 9, 14, 21 r. Shows of various kinds, 192. Sila-;, the three, 188-200. Sitavana, grove, 56. Sorrow, cause of, &c., 23, 24. Soul, early Buddhist doctrine as to, 162, 165, 299. Spells, 196, 199. INDEX. 313 Spirits. See Devata. Spiritualism, 208. Storehouse of waters beneath the earth, 130. Subhadda, the barber, xi, 127. — the last convert, 103-111. — convert at Nadika, 25, 26. Subhadda, the Qiieen of Glory, 240, 241, 276. Subhuti Unnanse, xxxi. Sudatta, convert at Nadika, 25. Su^ata, convert at Nadika, 25. Sukhavativyuha, quoted, 246, 249. Sunidha, minister, 18, 19, 21. Sun-myths, 244, 245. Susunaga, xvi. Tapoda, grove at Ra^agaha, 56. Taranatha, quoted, xix. Tarukkha, a Brahman, 167, Tavatiwsa angels, 18, 32. Tevi^^^a-va^i/^igotta Sutta, 159, 209. Textile fabrics of various kinds, 193. Theism, 163. Thirst, or craving. See the Noble Truths. Thirty-Three, the Great. See Ta- vatiwsa. Thunder-cloud, name of the sun- ^horse, 255,^274. Thupa. See Dagaba. Tittiriya Brahmans, 171. Todeyya, a Brahman, 167. Tope. See Dagaba. Transfiguration of the Buddha, 82. Truth, nature of the Buddhist, 27. Truths, the Four Noble, 23, 24, 148-150. Tudigama, in Kosala, 168. Tuttha, convert at Nadika, 25, 26. Udena ATetiya, 40. Vkka.tt/M, in Kosala, 168. Upatissa = Sariputta, i . Upavawa, a mendicant, 87. Upavattana, at Kusinara, 85. Uposatha, the Sabbath day, 251. — name of the solar elephant, 254. Uttara-sisakawi, 85. Va^^-ians, 1-4. Valahaka, name of the sun-horse, 255, 274. Vamadeva, Vedic poet, 172. Vamaka, Vedic poet, 172. Vanishing away, 21, 22, 118. \asettha., a young Brahman, 168- 203. — a Vedic poet, 172. Yasettbas, epithet of the Mallas, 121. Vassa, season of, 34. Vassakara, Brahman, 2-4, 18, 19, 21. Vebhara Mount, at Ra^agaha, 56. Vedehi-putto, i. Vedic images adopted by the Bud- dhists, 141, 245. Vedic poets, 172. Ve/uriya, a kind of gem, 256. Vesali, xvi, 28, 40, 58, 64. Vessamitta, a Vedic poet, 172. Ve/;6adipa, a Brahman village, 132. Videha, i. Vimokkha, the eight, 51, 52, 213. Virtue, description of Buddhist, 10. Vissakamma, the god (Vulcan), 265. Vulture's Peak, i, 55. Wheel of the Law, 140, 141, 153. Wisdom, the sevenfold higher, 9. — its details, 306. — possessed by the Buddhas, 14. Witchcraft, 208. Women, 43, 53, 91, 98, 103, 257. Word of the Buddhas enduring for ever, 233. Writing, introduction of into India, xxii. Yamataggi, a Vedic poet, 172. Yatramulle Unnanse, xxxi. Zoysa, Mudaliyar de, xxxi. ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA. Maha-parinibbana Sutta I, 23, 24. The 'nobles' (khattiyas) should come before the ' Brahmans,' as in III, 21, and in the Tevi^^a Sutta I, 19. The sentiment of I, 24 recurs in a passage given by Mr. Beal from the Chinese in the ' Indian Antiquary,' IV, 96. — II, 31. 'Went out from the monastery' (vihara). There is no mention of a vihara in the previous sections. The following con- versation seems therefore to have been originally recorded in some other connection. — Ill, 20. Add at the end, 'These, Ananda, are the eight causes, proximate and remote, of the appearance of a mighty earth- quake.' — V, 10 (note p. 88). The passage here quoted from Buddhaghosa, about angels on the point of a gimlet, recurs in the Anguttara Nikaya, Duka Nipata. — V, 52. The words 'who was not a believer' should be in brackets. They are inserted to give the full force of the word paribba^ako, as the translation ' mendicant ' might convey the impression that Subhadda was a Buddhist mendicant. — \T, 26. Compare Gataka 1, 60, line 17. TRANSLITERATION OF ORIENTAL ALPHABETS. 317 n n '^ »~s r^ D 'O rz ^ tz ^tz >" - iJoJ-\j k)0 |u/ IF 10 I»? J* I3r Q u w H O u n <; K 0. J < •< 2 O ^ t. 's -^ :S '^^ -So =^ 3 -^ - c« r= W5 H Z < 2 O en 2 O U CD I— t -t-i i-H (M CO Tt< U5 o3 13 ^ ^ n. p , eS 03 ?j (/} b S ;3 -i-i K • 7- -1-3 K Sh " 3 OS ^ CO rj cS cd CJ 3 (Tl ^ <:4-H o CD o o3 c3 o • 1-1 o a CO CO 03 ^ C3 ^ -^ . ^ r, * -tJ 5 r - - -tj pi t^ CO 05 O -^ (M o <^ O 1—1 03 1— I c3 P. -2 2 ^ 03 .-. OJ a. c3 03 ^ '■a CD 00 '3 a 00 rt< 10 CO N. 31S TRANSLITERATION OF ORIENTAL ALPHABETS , 1 4; . . A > . tj - :S . . . c — . m . N '*> -c , , * • • «o & ■ • • • W^ • . • S£.^ ' r^ r *-« j-^ . D D " M »i> • • (J 1 f). • • • D : : U-o '. 5 • •-> ^ <: • c rt "5 ^•. '• • -h --s D • " • D-O i •0 "^ ^ £ b • •-> ,_• — 1 •^ • ^ o < HH N s •"• • • . . . • • .J < rt * ^ ^ ^ ^ • • 1 • U • "S^ "S- 5* f* • "*«» • • 1 • < z S * • • • • • • • 1 VI w • • 1 Z U >» - ^ • -o ;§ C -' W • N • 1 1 j • 1 . . 3 1 ■ • • • • ■ • • • • • 1-H (M • • • • • • • « • • • • SONANTS ntittued). • ) CO ! 3 "» a3 2 w • • • . o3 CO s • • r-H (M 1 1^ ■-3 03 - »3 - LJ . in <» . ~ . '^ t« m •> ^-a • G\ a p\ n > S ^ ■3 Si ? «) 1 5) ^ K> l« |w h? P ►^ f (P Rr » RT-iP §5 aJ ts ^ s S ■« CO N -i3 j5 ^ fc -:= ^ d, '- ^ © I— I fciO 53 03 ;s 03 o o c3 C CO CO (53 O O ID 05 O CO ■* ■<*l (M CO W 03 O c6 Hi a; 03 e3 .5 £8 •^ OJ m x/i 03 bC 03 00050'— IfMCO'tlinCDt^OOO 320 TRANSLITERATION OF ORIENTAL ALPHABETS. eS 0 S ca 3 nj 30 D O :ni :- :S J o > '3 tn .S C5 bO C f-t o be 2 O O) 03 C O > CM ^ ^ ^ ^ c8 > o -= 03 P bD C e3 be 2 S > O a> in > h4 be ^ C as O CI, o 13 o . 03 * ^ e3 a, ^ i bD CO 3 bfl C o ^ • • 03 >* bO ?^ -0 3 -4J QQ 3 .1-1 bD 03 m rO 3 03 bo •\ 3 ^ Sh J2 1 ■*^ -*^ X 3 a. Q t-iCd. Life of Whitgift. 3 vols. 1822. Svo. cloth, 16s. dd. Life of Aylmer. 1820. 8vo. cloth, 5J. dd. Life of Cheke. 1821. 8vo. chth, 5.;. dd. Life of Smith. 1820. Svo. cloth, 5^. dd. Ecclesiastical Memorials. 6 vols. 1822. Svo. cloth, \l. 13J. Annals of the Reformation. 7 vols. Svo. cloth, 2/. is. 6d. General Index. 2 vols. 1828. Svo. cloth, iis. Sylloge Confessionum sub tempus Reformandae Ecclesiae edi- tarum. Subjiciuntur Catechismus Heidelbergensis et Canones Synodi Dordrechtanae. 1827. Svo. cloth, 8s. ENGLISH THEOLOGY. Beveridge's Discourse upon the XXXIX Articles. The third complete Edition, 1847. Svo. cloth, 8s. Bilson on the Perpetual Government of Christ's Church, with a Biographical Notice by R.Eden, M.A. 1842. Svo. cloth, 4s. Biseoe's Boyle Lectures on the Acts of the Apostles. 1840. Svo. cloth, 9s. Gd. Bull's "Works, with Nelson's Life, Edited by E. Burton, D.D. A new Edition, 1846. 8 vols. Svo. cloth, 2/. 9s. Burnet's Exposition of the XXXIX Articles. 1845. 8yo. cloth, 7s. Burton's (Edward) Testimonies of the Ante-Nicene Fathers to the Divinity of Christ. Second Edition, 1829. Svo. cloth, "js. B 3 12 Clarendon Press, Oxford. Burton's (Edward) Testimonies of the Ante-Nicene Fathers to the Doctrine of the Trinity and of the Divinity of the Holy Ghost. 1831. 8vo. cloth, 7,s.6d. Butler's "Works, with an Index to the Analogy. 2 vols. 1874. 8vo. cloth, I IS. Butler's Sermons. 8vo. cloth, 5J. 6d. Butler's Analogy of Religion. Svo. cloth, 5J. 6d. Chandler's Critical History of the Life of David. 1853. 8vo. cloth, 8s. 6d. Chillingwortli's Works. 3 vols. 1838. 8vo. doth, jl.is.6d. Clergyman's Instructor. Sixth Edition, 1855. 8vo. cloth, 6j. 6d. Comber's Companion to the Temple ; or a Help to Devotion in the use of the Common Prayer. 7 vols. 1 841. Svo. cloth, il. lis. 6d. Cranmer's "Works. Collected and arranged by H. Jenkyns, M.A., Fellow of Oriel College. 4 vols. 1834. Svo. cloth, il. los. Enchiridion Theologieum Anti-Romanum. Vol. I. Jeremy Taylor's Dissuasive from Popery, and Treatise on the Real Presence. 1S52. Svo. cloth, Ss. Vol. II. Barrow on the Supremacy of the Pope, with his Discourse on the Unity of the Church. 1852. Svo. cloth, 'js.6d. Vol. III. Tracts selected from Wake, Patrick, Stillingfleet, Clagett, and others. 1S37. Svo. cloth, lis. [Pell's] Paraphrase and Annotations on the Epistles of St. Paul. 1 85 2. Svo. cloth, 7s. G-reswell's Harmonia Evangeliea. Fifth Edition, 1856. Svo. cloth, gs. 6d. Greswell's Prolegomena ad Harmoniam Evangelicam. 1840. 8vo. cloth, 9s. 6d. Greswell's Dissertations on the Principles and Arrangement of a Harmony of the Gospels. 5 vols. 1837. Svo. cloth, 3/. 3s. Hall's (Bp.) "Works, yi neiv Edition, by Philip Wynter, D.D. 10 vols. 1863. Svo. cloth, 3Z. 3s. Hammond's Paraphrase and Annotations on the New Testa- ment. 4 vols. 1845. Svo. cloth, il. Hammond's Paraphrase on the Book of Psalms. 2 vols. 1850. Svo. cloth, los. Heurtley's Collection of Creeds. 1858. Svo. cloth, 6s. 6d. Homilies appointed to be read in Churches. Edited by J. Griffiths, M.A. 1859. Svo. cloth, 7s. 6d. Clarendon Press, Oxford. 13 Hooker's Works, with his Life by Walton, arranged by John Keble, M.A. Sixth Edition, 1874. 3 vols. Svo. cloth, il. iis.Gd. Hooker's Works; the text as arranged by John Keble, M.A. 2 vols. 1875. 8vo. cloth, IIS. Hooper's (Bp. George) Works. 2 vols. 1855. Svo. c/ot^, 8j. Jackson's (Dr. Thomas) Works. 12 vols. 1844. Svo. clotb, 3/. 6s. Jewel's Works, Edited by R. W. Jelf, D.D. 8 vols. 1847, 8vo. cloth. It. los. Patrick's Theological Works, 9 vols. 1859. Svo.dotb, il.is, Pearson's Exposition of the Creed, Revised and corrected by E. Burton, D.D. Sixth Edition, 1877. Svo. cloth, los. 6d. Pearson's Minor Theological Works, Now first collected, with a Memoir of the Author, Notes, and Index, by Edward Churton, M.A. 2 vols. 1844. Svo. cloth, los. Sanderson's Works. Edited by W. Jacobson, D.D. 6 vols. 1854. Svo. cloth, il. I OS. Stanhope's Paraphrase and Comment upon the Epistles and Gospels. A new Edition. 2 vols. 1851. Svo. cloth, los. Stillingfleet's Origines Sacrae. 2 vols. 1837, Svo, cloth, gs. Stillingfleet's Rational Account of the Grounds of Protestant Religion; being a vindication of Abp. Laud's Relation of a Conference, &c. 2 vols. 1S44, Svo, cloth, I OS. Wall's History of Infant Baptism, with Gale's Reflections, and Wall's Defence. A new Edition, by Henry Cotton, D.C.L. 2 vols. 1S62. Svo. cloth, il. IS. Waterland's Works, with Life, by Bp. Van Mildert. ^ neau Edition, with copious Indexes. 6 vols. 1S57. Svo. cloth, 2I. lis. Waterland's Review of the Doctrine of the Eucharist, with a Preface by the present Bishop of London. iSSo. crown Svo. cloth, 6s. 6d. Wheatly's Illustration of the Book of Common Prayer. ^ new Edition, 1S46. Svo. cloth, 5s. Wyclif. A Catalogue of the Original Works of John Wyclif, by W.W.Shirley, D.D. 1S65. Svo. cZo^fc, 3s. 6^/. Wyclif. Select English Works. By T. Arnold, M.A. 3 vols. 1871. Svo. cloth, 2/. 2s. Wyclif. Trialogus. Witb the Supplement noiv first edited. By Gotthard Lechler. 1869. Svo. cloth, 145. 14 Clarendon Press, Oxford. ENGLISH HISTOKICAL AND DOCUMENTARY WORKS. British Barrows, a Record of the Examination of Sepulchral Mounds in various parts of England. By William Greenwell, M.A., F.S.A. Together with Description of Figures of Skulls, General Remarks on Prehistoric Crania, and an Appendix by George Rolleston, M.D., F.R.S. 1877. Medium 8vo. cloth, 25s. Two of the Saxon Chronicles parallel, with Supplementary Extracts from the Others. Edited, with Introduction, Notes, and a Glossarial Index, by J. Earle, M.A. 1865. 8vo. cloth, i6s. Magna Carta, a careful Reprint. Edited by W. Stubbs, M.A., Regius Professor of Modern History. 1879. 4to. stitched, is. Britton, a Treatise upon the Common Law of England, com- posed by order of King Edward I. The French Text carefully revised, with an English Translation, Introduction, and Notes, by F. M. Nichols, M.A. 2 vols. 1865. royal Svo. cloth, il. 16s. Burnet's History of His Own Time, with the suppressed Pas- sages and Notes. 6 vols. 1833. Svo. cloth, 2I. los. Burnet's History of James II, with additional Notes. 1852. 8vo. cloth, 9s. 6d. Carte's Life of James Duke of Ormond. J new Edition, care- fully compared with the original MSS. 6 vols. 1851. Svo. cloth, il. 5s. Clarendon's (Edw. Earl of) History of the Rebellion and Civil Wars in England. To which are subjoined the Notes of Bishop War- burton. 7 vols. 1849. medium Svo. cloth, 2I. 10s. Clarendon's (Edw. Earl of) History of the Rebellion and Civil Wars in England. 7 vols. 1839. iSmo. cloth, ll. is. Clarendon's (Edw. Earl oQ History of the Rebellion and Civil Wars in England. Also His Life, written by Himself, in which is in- cluded a Continuation of his History of the Grand Rebellion. With copious Indexes. In one volume, royal Svo. 1842. cloth, ll. 2s. Clarendon's (Edw. Earl of) Life, including a Continuation of his History. 2 vols. 1857. medium Svo. cloth, ll. 2s. Clarendon's (Edw. Earl of) Life, and Continuation of his His- tory. 3 vols. 1827. Svo. cloth, i6s.6d. Calendar of the Clarendon State Papers, preserved in the Bodleian Library. In three volumes. 1869-76. Vol.1. From 1523 to January 1649. Svo. cloth, i8s. Vol. II. From 1649 to 1654. Svo. clolh, l6s. Vol. III. From 1655 to 1657. Svo. cloth, 14s. Clarendon Press, Oxford. 15 Calendar of Charters and Rolls preserved in the Bodleian Library. 1878. 8vo. clo/A, ll. lis. 6d. Freeman's (E. A.) History of the Norman Conquest of England; its Causes and Results. In Six Volumes. 8vo. cloth, 5/. 9s. dd. Vols. I-II together, 3rd edition, 1877. ll. l6s. Vol. Ill, 2nd edition, 7874. 1/. is. Vol. IV, 2nd edition, 1875. ll. is. Vol. V, 1876. ll. is. Vol. VI. Index. 1879. 8vo. cloth, los. 6d. Gascoigne's Theological Dictionary (" Liber Veritatum ") : Selected Passages, illustrating the condition of Church and State, 1403- 1458. Edited, with an Introduction, from the MS. in the Library of Lincoln College, Oxford, by James E. Thorold Rogers, M.P. Small 4to. cloth, I OS. 6d. Lloyd's Prices of Corn in Oxford, 1583-1830. 8vo. seived, is. Luttrell's (Narcissus) Diary. A Brief Historical Relation of State Affairs, 167S-1714. 6 vols. 1857. 8vo. cloth, ll. ^s. May's History of the Long Parliament. 1854. Svo. cloth, 6s. 6d. Rogers's History of Agriculture and Prices in England, a.d. 1 259-1 793. Vols. I and li (1259-1400). Svo. cloth, 2I. 2s. Vols. Ill and IV in the Press. Sprigg's England's Recovery ; being the History of the Army under Sir Thomas Fairfax. 1854. Svo. cloth, 6s. Whitelock's Memorials of English Affairs from 1625 to 1660. 4 vols. 1853. Svo. cloth, ll. los. Protests of the Lords, including those which have been expunged, from 1624 to 1874; with Historical Introductions. Edited by James E. Thorold Rogers, M.A. 1875. 3 vols. Svo. cloth, 2/. 2s. Enactments in Parliament, specially concerning the Universi- ties of Oxford and Cambridge. Collected and arranged by J. Griffiths, M.A. 1S69. Svo. cloth, I2S. Ordinances and Statutes [for Colleges and Halls] framed or approved by the Oxford University Commissioners. 1863. Svo. clotb, I2S. — Sold separately (except for Exeter, All Souls, Brasenose, and Corpus), at is. each. Statuta Universitatis Oxoniensis. 1880. Svo. cloth, 5J. The Student's Handbook to the University and Colleges of Oxford. Fifth Edition. 1879. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.6d. Index to "Wills proved in the Court of the Chancellor of the University of Oxford, &c. Compiled by J. Griffiths, M.A. 1862. royal Svo. clotb, 3s. 6c?. Catalogue of Oxford Graduates from 1659 to 1850. 1851. Svo. clotb, 7s. 6d. 1 6 Clarendon Press, Oxford. CHROIirOIiOGY, GEOGRAPHY, &c. Clinton's Fasti Hellenici. The Civil and Literary Chronology of Greece, from the LVIth to the CXXIIIrd Olympiad. Third edition, 1841. 4to. cloth, il. 145.6^. Clinton's Fasti Hellenici. The Civil and Literary Chronology of Greece, from the CXXIVth Olympiad to the Death of Augustus. Second edition, 1 85 1. 4to. cloth, ll. 12s. Clinton's Epitome of the Fasti Hellenici. 1851. Svo. cloth, 6s. 6d. Clinton's Fasti Eomani. The Civil and Literary Chronology of Rome and Constaiitiiiople, from the Death of Augustus to the Death of Heraclius. 2 vols. 1845, 1850. 4to. cloth, 3/. gs. Clinton's Epitome of the Fasti Romani. 1854. Svo. clotA, ys. Cramer's Geographical and Historical Description of Asia Minor. 2 vols. 1832. 8vo. cloth, lis. Cramer's Map of Asia Minor, 15/. Cramer's Map of Ancient and Modern Italy, on two sheets, 15J. Cramer's Description of Ancient Greece. 3 vols. 1828. Svo. cloth, 1 6s. 6d. Cramer's Map of Ancient and Modern Greece, on two sheets, i ss. Greswell's Fasti Temporis Catholici. 1852. 4 vols. Svo. f/o^/j), 2/. los. Greswell's Tables to Fasti, 4to., and Introduction to Tables, 8vo. 1852. cloth, 15s. Greswell's Origines Kalendarige Italicse. 1854. 4 vols. Svo.r/o//', 2I. 2S. Greswell's Origines Kalendarise Hellenicse. 6 vols. 1862. 8vo. cloth, 4/. 4s. MATHEMATICS, PHYSICAL SCIENCE, &c. Archimedis quae supersunt omnia cum Eutocii commentariis ex recensione Josephi Torelli, cum nova versione Latina. 1792. fol. cloth, ll. 5s. Bradley's Miscellaneous Works and Correspondence. With an Account of Harriot's Astronomical Papers. 1832. 410. cloth, ip. Reduction of Bradley's Observations by Dr. Busch. i838.4to.c/o//j, 3s. Clarendon Press, Oxford, 17 Astronomical Observations made at the University Obser- vatory, Oxford, under the direction of C. Pritchard, M.A., Savilian Pro- fessor of Astronomy. No. 1. 1S78. Royal 8vo. paper covers, 3s. 6d. Treatise on Infinitesimal Calculus. By Bartholomew Price, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Natural Philosophy, Oxford. Vol.1. Differential Calculus. Second Edition, Svo. cloth. 14s. 6d. Vol. II. Integral Calculus, Calculus of Variations, and Differential Equations. Second Edition, 1865. Svo. cloth, i8s. Vol. III. Statics, including Attractions; Dynamics of a Material Particle. Second Edition, 1868. Svo. cloth, 16s. Vol. IV. Dynamics of Material Systems; together with a Chapter on Theoretical Dynamics, by W. F. Donkin, M.A., F.R.S. 1862. Svo. cloth, 16s. Rigaud's Correspondence of Scientific Men of the 17th Century, with Table of Contents by A. de Morgan, and Index by the Rev. J. Rigaud, M.A., Fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford. 2 vols. 1841-1862. Svo. cloth, 1 8s. 6d. Daubeny's Introduction to the Atomic Theory. 1850. i6mo. clotb, 6s. Vesuvius. By John Phillips, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Geology, Oxford. 1869. Crown Svo. cloth, ios.6d. Geology of Oxford and the Valley of the Thames. By the same Author. 1871. Hvo. cloth, 2is. Synopsis of the Pathological Series in the Oxford Museum. By H. W. Acland, M.D., F.R.S., 1867. Svo, cloth, 2s. 6d. Thesaurus Entomologicus Hopeianus, or a Description of the rarest Insects in the Collection given to the University by the Rev. William Hope. By J. O. Westwood, M.A., F.L.S. With 40 Plates. 1S74. Small folio, Aa//Hzorocco, 7/. IDS. Text-Book of Botany, Morphological and Physiological. By Dr. Julius Sachs, Professor of Botany in the University of Wiirzburg. Translated by S. H. Vines, M.A., and edited by W. T. Thiselton Dyer, M. A. Royal Svo. Second Edition, in the Press, Johannes Miiller on Certain Variations in the Vocal Organs of the Passeres that have hitherto escaped notice. Translated by F. J. Bell, B.A., and edited with an Appendix, by A. H. Garrod, M.A,, F.R.S. With Plates. 1878. ^to. paper covers, -js. 6d. 1 8 Clarendon Press, Oxford. BIBLIOGRAPHY. Ebert's Bibliographical Dictionary, translated from the German. 4 vols. 1837. 8vo. cloth, \l. los. Cotton's List of Editions of the Bible in English. Second Edition, corrected and enlarged. 1852. 8vo. cloth, Ss. dd. Cotton's Typographical Gazetteer. 183 1. Svo. cloth, \2s. 6d. Cotton's Typographical Gazetteer, Second Series. 1866. Svo cloth, 1 2s. 6d. Cotton's Rhemes and Doway. An attempt to shew what has been done by Roman Catholics for the diffusion of the Holy Scriptures in English. 1855. Svo. cloth, 9s. MISCELLANEOUS. Bacon's Novum Organum. Edited, with English notes, by G. W, Kitchin, M.A.. 1855. Svo. cloth, 9s. 6d. Bacon's TTovum. Organum. Translated by G. W. Kitchin, M.A. 1855. Svo. cloth, 9s. 6d. (See also p. 35.) The Works of George Berkeley, D.D., formerly Bishop of Cloyne ; including many of his writings hitherto unpublished. With Prefaces, Annotations, and an Account of his Life and Philosophy, by Alexander Campbell Eraser, M.A. 4 vols. 1871. Svo. cloth, 2/. iSs. The Life, Letters, &c. i wo\. cloth, i6s. See also p. 35. The Logic of Hegel; translated from the Encyclopaedia of the Philosophical Sciences. With Prolegomena by William Wallace, M.A. 1874. Svo. cloth, 14s. Smith's Wealth of Nations. A new Edition, with Notes, by J. E. Thorold Rogers, M.A. 2 vols. 1S80. cloth, 21s. A Course of Lectures on Art, delivered before the University of Oxford in Hilary Term, 1870, by John Ruskin, M.A., Slade Professor of Fine Art. Svo. cloth, 6s. A Critical Account of the Dra'wrings by Michel Angelo and RalTaello in the University Galleries, Oxford. By J. C. Robinson, F.S.A. 1870. Crown Svo. cloth, 4s. Sturlimga Saga, including the Islendinga Saga of Lawman Sturla ThorJsson and other works. Edited with Prolegomena, Ap- pendices, Tables, Indices, and Maps, by Dr. Gudbrand Vigfusson. In 2 vols. 1878. Svo. cloth, 2I. 2s. Casauboni Ephem.erides, cum praefatione et notisj. Russell, S.T.P. Tomi II. 1850. Svo. cloth, 155. The Ormulum ; with the Notes and Glossary of Dr. R. M. White. Edited by Rev. R. Holt, M.A. 1878. 2 vols. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2 IS, Clarendon Press, Oxford. 19 The Sacred Books of the East. Translated by various Oriental Scholars, anJ edited by P\ Max Miiller. Vol. I. The Upanishads. Translated by F. Max Mijller. Part I. The ^Aiindogya-iipanishad, The Talavakara-upanishad, The Aitareya-arawyaka, The Kaushitaki-brahma72a-upanishad, and The Vao'asaneyi-sawhita-upanishad. 8vo. cloth, los. dd. Vol. II. The Sacred Laws of the Aryas, as taught in the Scliools of Apastamha, Gautama, Vasi^h^/ia, and Baudhavana. Trans- lated by Georg Biihier. Part I, Apastaniba and Gautama. 8vo. cloth, los. 6d. Vol. III. The Sacred Books of China. The Texts of Con- fucianism. Translated by James Legge. Part I. The Shu King, The Religious portions of the Shih King, and The Hsiao King. 8vo. cloth, 1 2s. 6d. Vol. IV. The Vendidad. Translated by James Darmesteter. 8vo. cloth, I OS. 6d. Vol. V. The Biindahij, Bahman Y'a.st, and Shayast-la- Shayast. Translated by E. W. West. 8vo. cloth, 12s. 6d. Vols. VI and IX. The Qur'an. Parts I and II. Trans- lated by Professor E. H. Palmer. Svo. cloth, 21s. Vol. VII. The Institutes of VisliHU. Translated by Pro- fessor Julius Jolly. Svo. cloth, lOs. 6d. Vol. X. The Dhammapada, translated by Professor F. Max Miiller; and Tlie Sutta Nipata, translated by Professor Fausboll; being Canonical Books of the Buddhists. Svo. cloth, los. 6d. Vol. XI. The Mahaparinibbana Sutta, The Tevi^^a Sutta, The Mahasudassana Sutta, The Dhamma-A'akkappa- vattana Sutta. Translated by T.W.Rhys Davids. Svo. cloth, los.Gi. The following Volumes are also in the Press, viz : — Vol. VIII. TheBhagavadgita,Sanatsu^atiya,andAnugita.. Translated by Kashinath Trinibak Telang. Vol. XII. The ^atapatha-Brahmawa, by Professor Eggeling. Vol. XIII. The Patimokkha, by T. W. Rhys Davids. The Mahavagga, by Dr. H. Oldcnberg. Vol. XIV. The Sacred Iiaws of the Aryas, as taught in the Schools of VasishMa and Baudhayana, by Professor Georg Buhler. 20 Clarendon Press, Oxford. Ckri^ntrait ^xtss %>mi^. The Delegates of the Clarendon Press having undertaken the pubhcation of a series of works, chiefly educational, and entitled the Clarcnbou |)r£ss ^rrics, have published, or have in preparation, the following. Those to which prices are attached are already published; the others are in preparation. I. ENGLISH. A First Reading Book. By Marie Eichens of Berlin; and edited by Anne J. Clough. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, 40?. Oxford Reading "Book, Part I. For Little Children. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, 6d. Oxford Reading Book, Part II. For Junior Classes. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers, 6d, An Elementary English Grammar and Exercise Book. By O. W. Tancock, M.A., Head Master of Norwich School. Second Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth. Is. 6c?. An English Grammar and Reading Book, for Lower Forms in Classical Schools. By O. W. Tancock, M.A,, Head Master of Norwich School. Third Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 3s. 6c?. Typical Selections from the best English Writers, with Intro- ductory Notices. Second Edition. In Two Volumes. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 3s. 6d. each. Vol. I. Latimer to Berkeley. Vol. II. Pope to Macaulay. The Philology of the English Tongue. By J. Earle, M.A., formerly Fellow of Oriel College, and Professor of Anglo-Saxon, Oxford. Third Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. clolb, "js. 6d. A Book for the Beginner in Anglo-Saxon. By John Earle, M.A., Professor of Anglo-Saxon, Oxford. Second Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. 6d. An Anglo-Saxon Reader. In Prose and Verse. M'ith Grammatical Introduction, Notes, and Glossary. By Henry Sweet, M.A. Second Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 8s. 6d. Clarendon Press, Oxford. 21 Specimens of Early English. A New and Revised Edition. With Introduction, Notes, and Glossarial Index. By R, Morris, LL.D., and W. W. Skeat, M.A. Part I. In the Press. Part II. From Robert of Gloucester to Gower(A.D. 1298 to a.d. 1393). Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 'js, 6d. Specimens of English Literature, from the ' Ploughmans Crede' to the 'Shepheardes Calender' (a.d. 1394 to a.d. 1579). With Introduction, Notes, and Glossarial Index. By W. W. Skeat, M.A. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 'js. 6d. The Vision of 'William concerning Piers the Plowman, by William Langland. Edited, with Notes, by W. W. Skeat, M.A. Third Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6c?. Chaucer. The Prioresses Tale; Sir Thopas; The Menkes Tale ; The Clerkes Tale ; The Squieres Tale, &c. Edited by W. W. Skeat, M.A. Second Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6d. Chaucer. The Tale of the Man of Lawe; The Pardoneres Tale ; The Second Nonnes Tale ; The Chanouns Yemannes Tale. By the same Editor. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6d. (See also p. 22.) Old English Drama. Marlowe's Tragical History of Dr. Faustus, and Greene's Honourable History of Friar Bacon and Friar Bungay. Edited by A. W. Ward, M.A., Professor of History and English Literature in Owens College, Manchester. 1878. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 5s. 6d. Marlowe. Edward II. With Introduction, Notes, &c. By O. W. Tancock, M.A., Head Master of Norwich School. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 3s. Shakespeare. Hamlet. Edited by W. G. Clark, M.A., and W. Aldis Wright, M.A. Extra fcap. Svo. stiff covers, 2s. Shakespeare. Select Plays. Edited by W. Aldis Wright, M.A. Extra fcap. Svo. stiff covers. The Tempest, is. 6c?. King Lear, is. 6d. As You Like It, is. 6a?. A Midsummer Night's Dream, is. 6d. Julius Caesar, 2s. Coriolanus, 2s. 6c?. Richard the Third, 2s. 6d, Henry the Fifth. In the Press. (For other Plays, see p. 23.) Milton. Areopagitica. With Introduction and Notes. By J, W. Hales, M.A., late Fellow of Christ's College, Cambridge. Second Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 3s. 2 2 Clarendon Press, Oxford. Bunyan. Holy War, Life and Death of Mr. Badman, &c. Edited by E. Venables, M.A. 7« Preparation. (See also p. 23.) Locke's Conduct of the Understanding. Edited, with Intro- duction, Notes, etc., by T. Fowler, M.A., Professor of Logic in the University of Oxford. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. Addison. Selections from Papers in the Spectator. With Notes. By T. Arnold, M.A., University College. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. Bxirke. Four Letters on the Proposals for Peace with the Regi- cide Directory of France. F-dited, with Introduction and Notes, by E. J. Payne, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 5s, (See also p. 23.) A ho the following in paper covers : — Goldsmith. The Deserted Village. 2d. Gray. Elegy, and Ode on Eton College. 2d. Johnson. Vanity of Human Wishes. With Notes by E. J. Payne, M.A. ^d. Keats. Hyperion, Book L With Notes by W. T.Arnold, B.A. 6^d. Milton. With Notes by R. C. Browne, M.A. Lycidas, 3^. L' Allegro, 3c?. II Penseroso, 4c?. Comus, dd. Samson Agonistes, 6fi?. Parnell. The Hermit. 2d. A SERIES OP ENGLISH CLASSICS, Designed to meet the ivants of Students in English Literature, by the late Rev. J. S. Brewer, M.A., of Queen's College, Oxford, and Professor of English Literature at King's College, London. I. Chaucer. The Prologue to the Canterbury Tales; The Knightes Tale ; The Nonne Prestos Tale. Edited by R. Morris, Editor of Specimens of Early English, &c., &c. Sixth Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.6d. (See also p. 21.) 3. Spenser's Faery Queene. Books I and II. Designed chiefly for the use of Schools. With Introduction, Notes, and Glossary. By G. W. Kitchin, M.A. Book I. Eighth Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.6d. Book II. Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.6d. J. Hooker. Ecclesiastical Polity, Book I. Edited by R. W. Church, M.A., Uean of St. Paul's ; formerly Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. Clarendon Press, Oxford. 23 4. Shakespeare. Select Plays. Edited by W. G. Clark, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge ; and W. Aldis Wright, M.A., Trinity College, Cambridge. Extra fcap. 8vo. stiff covers. I. The Merchant of Venice, is. II. Richard the Second, is. 6d. III. Macbeth, is. 6d. (For other Plays, see p. 21.) 5. Bacon. I. Advancement of Learning. Edited by W. Aldis Wright, M.A. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo, cloth, 4s. 6d. II. The Essays. With Introduction and Notes. By J. R. Thursfield, M.A., Fellow and formerly Tutor of Jesus College, Oxford. 6. Milton. Poems. Edited by R, C. Browne, M.A. 2 vols. Fourth Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 6s. 6d. Sold separately. Vol. I. 4s.; Vol. II. 3s. (See also p. 22.) 7. Dryden. Select Poems. Stanzas on the Death of Oliver Cromwell; Astrcea Redux ; Annus Mirabilis ; Absalom and Achitophel ; Religio Laici; The Hind and the Panther. Edited by W. D. Christie, M.A. Second Edition. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. 8. Bunyan. The Pilgrim's Progress, Grace Abounding, Relation of the Imprisonment of Mr. John Bunyan. Edited, with Biographical Introduction and Notes, by E. Venables, M.A. 1879. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 5s. 9. Pope. With Introduction and Notes. By Mark Pattison, B.D., Rector of Lincoln College, Oxford. I. Essay on Man. Sixth Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. is. 6d. II. Satires and Epistles. Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. 2s. 10. Johnson. Rasselas ; Lives of Pope and Dryden. Edited by Alfred Milnes, B.A. (London), late Scholar of Lincoln College, Oxford, Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. 11. Burke. Select Works. Edited, with Introduction and Notes, by E. J. Payne, M.A., of Lincoln's Inn, Barrister-at-Law, and Fellow of University College, Oxford. I. Thoughts on the Present Discontents ; the two Speeches on America. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6a?. II. Reflections on the French Revolution. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 5s. (See also p. 22.) S3. Cowper. Edited, with Life, Introductions, and Notes, by H. T. Griffith, B.A., formerly Scholar of Pembroke College, Oxford. I. The Didactic Poems of 1782, with Selections from the Minor Pieces, a.d. 1779-1783. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 3s. II. The Task, with Tirocinium, and Selections from the Minor Poems, A.D. 1784-1799. Extra fcap. 8vo.c/o/i&, 3s. 24 Clarendon Press, Oxford. II. LATIN. An Elementary Liatin Grammar. By John B. Allen, M.A., Head Master of Perse Grammar School, Cambridge. Third Edition, Revised and Corrected. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. A First Latin Exercise Book. By the same Author. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d, Anglice Reddenda, or Easy Extracts, Latin and Greek, for Unseen Translation. By C. S. Jerram, M.A. Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Passages for Translation into Latin. For the use of Pass- men and others. Selected by J. Y. Sargent. M.A., Fellow and Tutor of Magdalen College, Oxford. Fifth Edition. Ext. fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. 6d. First Latin Reader. By T. J. Nunns, M.A. TAird Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. Second Latin Reader. In Preparation, Caesar. The Commentaries (for Schools). With Notes and Maps. By Charles E. Moberly, M.A. Parti. The Gallic War. Third Edition. Extra. fca^.Svo. cloth, ^s.6d. Part II. The Civil War. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 3s. 6d. The Civil War. Book I. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. Cicero. Selection of interesting and descriptive passages. With Notes. By Henry Walford, M.A. In three Parts. Second Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6c?. Each Part separately, limp, is.6d. Part I. Anecdotes from Grecian and Roman History. Part II. Omens and Dreams: Beauties of Nature. Part III. Rome's Rule of her Provinces. Cicero. Selected Letters (for Schools). With Notes. By the late C. E. Prichard, M.A., and E. R. Bernard, M.A. Second Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 3s. Cicero. Select Orations (for Schools). With Notes. ByJ. R. King, M.A. Extra fcap. Svo, cloth, 2s. 6d. Cornelius Wepos. With Notes. By Oscar Browning, M.A. Second Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Livy. Selections (for Schools). With Notes and Maps. By H. Lee-Warner, M.A. Extra fcap. Svo. In Parts, limp, each is. 6d. Part I. The Caudine Disaster. Part II. Haimibal's Campaign in Italy. Part III. The Macedonian War. Clarendon Press, Oxford. 25 Ovid. Selections for the use of Schools. With Introductions and Notes, and an Appendix on the Roman Calendar. By W. Ramsay, M.A. Edited by G. G. Ramsay, M.A., Professor of Humanity, Glas- gow. Second Edition. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, ^s. 6d. Pliny. Selected Letters (for Schools). With Notes. By the late C. E. Prichard, M.A., and E. R. Bernard, M.A. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, y. Virgil. Edited with Notes, etc., by T. L. Papillon, M.A., Fellow of New College, Oxford. In Preparati07i. Catulli Veronensis Liber. Iterum recognovit, apparatum criticum prolegomena appendices addidit, Robinson Ellis, A.M. 1878. Demy 8vo. cloth, 16s. A Coramentary on Catullus. By Robinson Ellis, M.A. 1876. Demy 8vo. cloth, 16s. Catulli Veronensis Carmina Selecta, secundum recogni- tionem Robinson Ellis, A.M. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. Cicero de Oratore. With Introduction and Notes, by A. S. Wilkins, M.A., Professor of Latin, Owens College, Manchester. Book I. 1879. 8vo. cloth, 6s. Book II. 1881. 8vo. cloth, c,s. Cicero's Philippic Orations. WithNotes. By J. R. King, M.A. Second Edition. 1879. 8vo. cloth, los, 6d. Cicero. Select Letters. With English Introductions, Notes, and Appendices. By Albert Watson, M.A. Second Edition. 1874. Demy 8vo. cloth, iSs. Cicero. Select Letters. Text. By the same Editor. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. Cicero pro Cluentio. With Introduction and Notes. By W. Ramsay, M.A. Edited by G. G. Ramsay, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. Horace. With a Commentary. Volume I. The Odes, Carmen Seculare, and Epodes. By Edward C. Wickham, M.A., Head Master of Wellington College. Second Edition. 1877. 8vo. cloth, 12s Also a small edition for Schools. In the Press. Livy, Books I-X. By J. R. Seeley, M.A., Regius Professor of Modern History, Cambridge. Book I. Second Edition. 1874. 8vo. cloth, 6s. Also a small edition for Schools. Persius. The Satires. With a Translation and Commentary. By John Conington, M.A. Edited by Henry Nettleship, M.A. Second Edition. 1874. 8vo. cloth, "js. 6d. 26 Clare7idon Press, Oxford. Selections from the less known Latin Poets. By North Pinder, M.A. 1869. Demy 8vo. c/o/i, 15s. Fragments and Specimens of Early Latin. With Introduc- tions and Notes. 1874. By John Wordsworth, M.A. 8vo. cloth, iSs. Tacitus. The Annals. Books I-VI. With Essays and Notes. Preparing. Vergil : Suggestions Introductory to a Study of the Aeneid. By H. Nettleship, M.A. 8vo. sewed, Is. 6rf. Ancient Lives of Vergil ; with an Essay on the Poems of Vergil, in connection with his Life and Times. By H. Nettleship, M.A. 8vo. sewed, 2s. The Roman Satura : its original form in connection with its literary development. By H. Nettleship, M.A. 8vo. seived, is. A Manual of Comparative Philology. By T. L. Papillon, M.A., Fellow and Lecturer of New College. Srco?id Edition. Crown 8vo. cloth, 6s. The Roman Poets of the Augustan Age. By William Young Sellar, iSLA., Professor of Humanity in the University of Edinburgh. Virgil. 1877. Svo. cloth, 14s. The Roman Poets of the Republic. By the same Author. New Edition, Revised and Enlarged. 1881. Svo, cloth, 14s. III. GREEK. A Greek Primer, for the use of beginners in that Language. By the Right Rev. Charles Wordsworth, D.C.L., Bivhop of St. Andrews. Sixth Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Extra fcap. Svo. clo/h, is. 6d. GraecaeGrammaticaeRudimentainusumScholarum.Auctore Carolo Wordsworth, D.C.L. Nineteenth Edition, 1877. i2mo. cloth, 4s. A Greek-English Lexicon, abridged from Liddell and Scott's 4to. edition, chiefly for the use of Schools. Eighteenth Edition. Care- fully Revised througho?/t. 1879. Square 1 2nio. cloth, "js. 6d. Greek Verbs, Irregular and Defective; their forms, mean- ing, and quantity ; embracing all the Tenses used by Greek writers, with references to the passages in which thevare found. By W. Veitch. Fourth Edition. Crown Svo. cloth, lOs. 6d. The Elements of Greek Accentuation (for Schools): abridged from his larger work by H. W. Chandler, M.A., Wavnflete Professor of Moral and Metaphysical Philosophy, Oxford. Ext. fcap. Svo. clolb, 2s. 6d. Clare7tdon Press, Oxford. 27 A Series of Graduated Greek Readers ; — First Greek Reader. By W, G. Rushbrooke, MX., for- merly Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge, Second Classical Master at the City of London School. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s.6d. Second Greek Reader. By A. M. Bell, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. Third Greek Reader, In Preparation, Fourth Greek Reader ; being Specimens of Greek. Dialects. With Introductions and Notes. By W. W. Merry, M.A. , Fellow and Lecturer of Lincoln College. Extra fcap. 8 vo. c/o//;, 4s. 6ii. Fifth Greek Reader. Part I. Selections from Greek Epic and Dramatic Poetry, with Introductions and Notes. By Evelyn Abbott, M. A., Fellow of Balliol College. Ext.fcap. 8vo. cloth, ^s.6d. Part II. By the same Editor. In Preparation. The Golden Treasury of Ancient Greek Poetry; being a Col- lection of the finest passages in the Greek Classic Poets, with Introduc- tory Notices and Notes. By R. S. Wright, M.A., Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, Ss. 6d, A Golden Treasury of Greek Prose, being a collection of the finest passages in the principal Greek Prose Writers, with Introductory Notices and Notes. By R. S. Wright, M.A., and J. E. L. Shadwell, M.A. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. Aeschylus. Prometheus Bound (for Schools). With Intro- duction and Notes, by A. O. Prickard, M.A., Fellow of New College. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. Aeschylus. Agamemnon (for Schools), with Introduction and Notes by Arthur Sidgwick, M.A., Lecturer at Corpus Christi College, Oxford ; late Assistant Master at Rugby School, and Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. In the Press. Aristophanes. In Single Plays, edited, with English Notes, Introductions, etc., by W. W. Merry, M.A. Extra fcap. Svo. The Clouds, 2s. The Acharnians, 2s. Other Plays will follow. Arrian. Selections (for Schools). With Notes. By J. S. Phill- potts, B.C.L., Head Master of Bedford School. Cebes. Tabula. With Introduction and Notes by C. S. Jerram, M.A. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Euripides. Aleestis (for Schools). By C. S. Jerram, M.A. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Euripides. Helena (for Schools). By the same Editor. J« the Press. 28 Clarendon Press, Oxford. Herodotus. Selections from. Edited, with Introduction, Notes, and a Map, by W. W. Merry, M.A., Fellow and Lecturer of Lincoln College. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloih, 2s. 6d. Homer. Odyssey, Books I— XII (for Schools). By W. W. Merry, M.A. Nineteenth Thousand. Extra fcap. 8vo. clotb, 4s. 6d, Book II, separately, is.Gd. Homer. Odyssey, Books XIII-XXIV (for Schools). By the same Editor. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 5s. Homer. Iliad, Book I (for Schools). By D. B. Monro, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. Hom.er. Iliad, Book XXI. Edited with Notes, etc., for the use of Schools, by Herbert Hailstone, M.A., late Scholar of St. Peter's College, Cambridge. Extr. fcap. 8vo. cloth, is. 6d. Lucian. Vera Historia (for Schools). By G. S. Jerram, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, is. 6d. Plato. Selections (for Schools). With Notes. By B. Jowett, M.A., Regius Professor of Greek ; and J. Purves, M.A., Fellow and late Lecturer of Balliol College, Oxford. In the Press. Sophocles. In Single Plays, with English Notes, &c. By Lewis Campbell, M.A., and Evelyn Abbott, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. limp. Oedipus Rex, Oedipus Coloneus, Antigone, is. gd. each. Ajax, Electra, Trachiniae. Philoctetes, 2S. each. Sophocles. Oedipus Rex : Dindorfs Text, with Notes by the present Bishop of St. David's. Ext. fcap. 8vo. limp, is. dd. Theocritus (for Schools). With Notes. By H. Kynaston, M.A. (late Snow), Head Master of Cheltenham College. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. Xenophon. Easy Selections (for Junior Classes). With a Vocabulary, Notes, and Map. By J. S, Phillpotts, B.C.L., and C. S. Jerram, M.A. Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. ()d. Xenophon. Selections (for Schools). With Notes and Maps. By J. S. Phillpotts, B.C.L., Head Master of Bedford School. Fourth Edition. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2,s.(id. Xenophon. Anabasis, Book II. With Notes and Map. ByC.S. J<.rram, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. Aristotle's Polities. By W. L. Newman, M.A., Fellow of Balliol College, Oxford. Aristotelian Studies. I. On the Structure of the Seventh Book of the Nicomachean Ethics. By J. C. Wilson, M.A., Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford. 1879. Medium 8vo. stijf, 5s. Dem.osthenes and Aesehines. The Orations of Demosthenes and /Escliincs on the Crown. With Introductory Essays and Notes. By G. A. Simcox, M.A.,and W. H.Sinicox.M.A. 1872, &vq. clotb, i2i. Clarendon Press, Oxford. 29 Homer. Odyssey, Books I-XII. Edited with English Notes, Appendices, etc. By W. W. Merry, M.A.., and the ]ate James Riddell, M.A. 1876. Demy 8vo. c/o/A, 1 6s. Homer. Odyssey, Books XIII-XXIV. With Introduction and Notes. By S. H. Butcher, M.A., Fellow of University College. Homer. Iliad. With Introduction and Notes. By D. B. Monro, M.A., Vice-Provost of Oriel College, Oxford. Prej^arbig. A Homeric Gram,miar. By D. B. Monro, M.A. In the Press. Sophocles. The Plays and Fragments. With English Notes and Introductions, by Lewis Campbell, M.A., Professor of Greek, St. Andrews, formerly Fellow of Queen's College, Oxford. 2 vols. Vol. I. Oedipus Tyrannus. Oedipus Coloneus. Antigone. Second Edition. 1879. 8vo. cZo/7j, 1 6s. Vol. II. Ajax. Electra. Trachinae. Philoctetes. Fragments, 8vo. cloth. Just ready. Sophocles. The Text of the Seven Plays. By the same Editor. Ext. fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. A Handbook of Greek Inscriptions, illustrative of Greek History. By E. L. Hicks, M.A., formerly Fellow of Corpus Christi College, Oxford. In the Press. IV. FRENCH. An Etymological Dictionary of the French Language, with a Preface on the Principles of French Etymology. By A. Brachet. Translated into English by G. W. Kitchin, M.A. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. cloth, "js. 6d. Braehet's Historical Grammar of the French Language. Translated into English by G. W. Kitchin, M.A. Fourth Edition. Extra fc.Tp. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. Historical Outlines of French Literature. By George Saintsbury, M.A. In Preparation, A Primer of French Literature. By the same Author. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. Frenc/j Classics, Edited by GUSTAVE Masson, B.A. Corneille's Cinna, and Moliere's Les Femmes Savantes. With Introduction and Notes. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Racine's Andromaque, and Corneills's Le Menteur. With Louis Racine's Life of his Father. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Moliere's Les Fourberies de Scapin, and Racine's Athalie. With Voltaire's Life of Moliere. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Selections from the Correspondence of Madame de Sevign^ and her chief Contemporaries. Intended more especially for Girls' Schools. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 3s. 30 Clarendon Press, Oxford, Voyage autour de ma Chambre,by Xavier de Maistre ; Ourika, by Madame de Duras ; La Dot de Suzette, by Fievee ; Les Junieaux de I'Hotel CorneiUe, by Edmond About ; Mesaventures d'uii Ecolier, by Rodolphe Topflfer. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Regnard's Le Joueur, and Brueys and Palaprat's Le GronJeur. Extr.i fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Iiouis XIV and his Contempoi'aries ; as described in Extracts from the best Memoirs of the Seventeenth Century. With English Notes, Genealogical Tables, &c. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. V. GERMAN. LanGE'S German Course. By HERMANN LangE, Teacher of Modern Languages, Manchester: The Germans at Home ; a Practical Introduction to German Conversation, with an Appendix containing the Essentials of German Grammar. Second Edition. Svo. cloth, 2s. 6d. The German Manual; a German Grammar, a Reading Book, and a Handbook of German Conversation. Svo. cloth, 'js. 6d. A Grammar of the German Language. Svo. c/oth, ^s. 6d. This '■Grammar' is a reprint of the Granijnar contained in ' The German Manual,' and, in this separate fonn, is intended for the use of students tvho wish to make themselves acquainted with German Grammar chiefly for the purpose of being able to read German books. German Composition; Extracts from English and American writers for Translation into German, with Hints for Translation in foot- notes. In the Press. Lessing's Laokoon. With Introduction, English Notes, etc. By A. Hamann, Phil. Doc, M.A. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6rf. Wilhelm Tell. A Drama. By Schiller. Translated into English Verse by E. Massie, M.A. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 5s. Also, Edited by C. A. BUCHHEIM, Phil. Doc, Professor in King's College, London : Goethe's Egmont. With a Life of Goethe, &c. Third Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 3s. Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. With a Life of Schiller ; an historical and critical Introduction, Arguments, and a complete Commentary. Fourth Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 3s. 6d. Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm. A Comedy. With a Life of Lessing, Critical Analysis, Complete Commentary, &c. Fourth Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 3s. 6d. Clarendon Press, Oxford. 31 Schiller's Historische Skizzen ; Egmonts Leben und Tod, and Beiagerung von Antwerpen. Second Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Goethe's Iphigenie auf Tauris. A Drama. With a Critical Introduction and Notes. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. In Preparation. Schiller's Maria Stuart. With Notes, Introduction, &c. Schiller's Jungfrau von Orleans, With Notes, Introduction, &c. Selections from the Poems of Schiller and Goethe. Becker's (K. F.) Friedrich der Grosse. A German Reader, in Three Parts. Part I. In the Press. VI. MATHEMATICS, &c. Figures Made Easy: a first Arithmetic Book. (Introductory to ' The Scholar's Arithmetic.') By Lewis Hensley, IVI.A., formerly Fellow and Assistant Tutor of Trinity College, Cambridge. Crown 8vo. cloth, 6d. Answers to the Examples in Figures made Easy, together with two thousand additional Examples formed from the Tables in the same, with Answers. By the same Author. Crown 8vo, cloth, is. The Scholar's Arithmetic; with Answers to the Examples. By the same Author. Crown 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. The Scholar's Algebra. An Introductory work on Algebra. By the same Author. Crown 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. Book-keeping. By R. G. G. Hamilton, Financial Assistant Secretary to the Board of Trade, and John Ball (of the Firm of Quilter, Ball, & Co.), Co-Examiners in Book-keeping for the Society of Arts. New and enlarged Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. limp cloth, 2s. A Course of Leetiires on Pure Geometry. By Henry J. Stephen Smith, M.A., F.R.S., Fellow of Corpus Christi College, and Savilian Professor of Geometry in the University of Oxford. Acoustics. By W. F. Donkin, M.A., F.R.S., Savilian Professor of Astronomy, Oxford. 1870. Crown 8vo. cloth, "js.Od. A Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism. By J. Clerk Maxwell, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Experimental Physics in the Uni- versity of Cambridge. A New Edition in the Press, edited by W. D. Niven, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. An Elementary Treatise on the same subject. Edited, from the materials left by Professor Clerk Maxwell, by W. Garnett, M.A., Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. In the Press. A Treatise on Statics. By G. M. Minchin, M.A., Professor of Applied Mathematics in the Indian Engineering College, Cooper's Hill. Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged. 1879. 8vo. cloth, 14s. 32 Clarendon Press, Oxford. A Treatise on the Kinetic Theory of Gases. By Henry William Watson, M.A., formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. 1876 8vo. cloth, ^s.6d. A Treatise on the Application of Generalised Coordinates to the Kinetics of a Material System. By H. W. Watson, M.A., and S. H. Burbiiry, M.A., formerly Fellow of St. John's College, Cambriilge. 1879. 8vo. cloth, 6s. Geodesy. By Colonel Alexander Ross Clarke, C.B., R.E. 1880. 8vo. cloth, 12s. 6c?. VII. PHYSICAL SCIET3"CE. A Handbook of Descriptive Astronomy. By G. F. Chambers, F.R.A.S. Third Edition. 1S77. Demy 8 vo. c/oM, 28s. A Cycle of Celestial Objects. Observed, Reduced, and Dis- cussed by Admiral W. H. Smyth, R.N. RLvised, condensed, and greatly enlarged by G. F. Chambers, F.R.A.S. 8vo. cloth, 21s. Chemistry for Students. By A. W. Williamson, Phil. Doc, F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry, University College, London. A new Edition, with Solutions, 1873. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, Ss. 6d. A Treatise on Heat, with numerous Woodcuts and Diagrams. By Balfour Stewart, LL.D., F.R.S., Professor of Natural Philosophy in Owens College, Manchester. Fourth Edition. 1881. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 7s. 6c?. Lessons on Thermodynamics. By R. E. Baynes, M.A., Senior Student of Christ Church, Oxford, and Lee's Reader in Physics. 1878. Crown 8vo. cloth, 'Js. 6d. Forms of Animal Life. By G. Rolleston, M.D., F.R.S., Linacre Professor of Physiology, Oxford. Illustrated by Descriptions and Drawings of Dissections. Demy 8vo. cloth, i6s. Exercises in Practical Chemistry. Vol. I. Elementary Exer- cises. By A. G. Vernon Harcourl, M.A., F.R.S., Senior Student of Christ Church, and Lee's Reader in Chemistry; and H. G. Madan, M.A., Fellow of Queen's College, Oxford. Third Edition. Revised by H. G. Madan, M.A. Crown 8vo. cloth. 9s. Crystallography. By M.H.N. Story-Maskelyne, M.A., Pro- fessor of Mineralogy, Oxford ; and Deputy Keeper in the Department of Minerals, British Museum. In the Press. VIII. HISTORY. The Constitutional History of England, in its Origin and Development. By William Stubbs, D.D., Regius Professor of Modern History. Library Edition. Three vols, demy 8vo. cloth, 2I. 8s. Also in 3 vols, crown 8vo. price 12s. each. Clarendon Press, Oxford, 33 Select Charters and other Illustrations of English Con- stitutional History, from the Earliest Times to the Reign oi Edward I, Arranged and Edited by W. Stiibbs, M..^.. Fourth Edition. l88l. Crown 8vo. clolh, 8^. 6d. A History of England, principally in the Seventeenth Century. By Leopold Von Ranke. Translated by Resident Members of the University of Oxford, under the superintendence of G. W. Kitchin, M.A., and C. W. Boase, M.A. 1875. 6 vols. 8vo. cloth, 3/. 3s. A Short History of the Norman Conquest of England. By E. A. Freeman, M.A. Extra fc^ip. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. Genealogical Tables illustrative of Modern History. By H. B. George, M.A. Second Edition. Small 410. cloth, I 2s. A History of France. With numerous Maps, Plans, and Tables. By G. W. Kitchin, M.A. In Three Volumes. 1873-77. Crown Svo. cloth, each ios.6d. Vol. I. Down to the Year 1453. Vol. 2. From 1453-1624. Vol. 3. From 1624-1793. A History of Germany and of the Empire, down to the close of the Middle Ages. By J. Bryce, D.C.L., Regius Professor of Civil Law in the University of Oxford. A History of British India. By S. J. Owen, M.A., Reader in Indian History in the University of Oxford. A Selection from the Despatches, Treaties, and other Papers of the Marquess Wellesley, K.G., during his Government of India. Edited by S. J. Owen, M.A., formerly Professor of History in the Elphin- stone College, Bombay. 1877. Svo. cloth, il. 4s. A Selection from the Despatches, Treaties, and other Papers relating to India of Field-Marshal the Duke of Wellington, K.G. By the same Editor. 1S80. Svo cloth, 24s. A History of the United States of America. By E. J. Payne, M.A., Barrister-at-Law, and Fellow of University College, Oxford. In the Press. A History of Greece from its Conquest by the Romans to the present time, b.c. 146 to a.d. 1864. By George Finlay, LL.D. A new Edition, revised throughout, and in part re-written, with con- siderable additions, by the Author, and Edited by H. F. Tozer, M.A., Tutor and late Fellow of Exeter College, Oxford. 1877. 7 vols. Svo. cloth, 3/. I OS. A Manual of Ancient History. By George Rawlinson, M.A., Camden Professor of Ancient History, formerly Fellow of Exeter College, Oxford. Second Edition. Demy Svo. cloth, I ^s. A History of Greece. By E. A. Freeman, M.A,, formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Oxford. 34 Clarendon Press, Oxford. Italy and her Invaders, ad. 376-476. By T. Hodgkin, Fellow of University College, London. Illustrated with Plates and Maps. 2 vols. 8vo. cloth, il. 12s. IX. LAW. The Elements of Jurisprudence. By Thomas Erskine Holland, D.C.L., Chichele Professor of International Law and Diplo- macy, and Fellow of All Souls College, Oxford. 1880. Demy 8vo. cloth, I OS. 6d. The Institutes of Justinian, edited as a recension of the Insti- tutes of Gaius. By the same Editor. 1873. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 5*. Gail Institutionum. Juris Civilis Commentarii Quatuor ; or, Elements of Roman Law by Gaius. With a Translation and Com- mentary by Edward Poste, M.A., Barrister-at-Law, and Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford. Second Edition. 1875. 8vo. c/o/i&, 18s. Select Titles frora the Digest of Justinian. By T. E. Holland, D.C.L., Chichele Professor of International Law and Diplo- macy, and Fellow of All Souls' College, Oxford, and C. L. Shadweil, B.C.L., Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford. In four Parts. Part I. Introductory Titles. 8vo. sewed, 2s.6d. Part II. Family Law. 8vo. senved, is. Part III. Property Law. 2>-vo. sewed, 2s. 6d. Part IV. Law of Obligations (No. i). 8vo. sewed, zs. 6d. An Introduction to the Principles of Morals and Legisla- tion. By Jeremy Bentham. Crown 8vo. cloth, 6s. 6d. Elements of Law considered with reference to Principles of General Jurisprudence. By William Markby. M.A., Judge of the High Court of Judicature, Calcutta. Second Edition, with Supplement. 1874. Crown Svo. clotlj, 7s. 6d. Supplement separately, 2s. Alberici Gentilis, I. C. D., I. C. Professoris Regii, De lure Belli Libri Tres. Edidit Thomas Erskine Holland I. C. D., luris Gentium Professor Chicheleianus, Coll. Onm. Anim. Socius, necnon in Univ. Perusin. luris Professor Honorarius. 1877. Small ^to. half ttiorocco, 21s. International Law. By William Edward Hall, M.A., Barrister-at-Law. Demy 8vo. cloth, 21s. An Introduction to the History of the Law of Real Property, with original Authorities. By Kenelm E. Digby, M.A., of Lincoln's Inn, Barrister-at-Law. Second Edition. 1876. Crown 8vo. cloth, Js. 6d. Principles of the English Law of Contract. By Sir William R. Anson, Bart., B.C.L., Vinerian Reader of English Law, and Fellow of All Souls College, Oxford. 1879. Crown 8vo. cloth, 9s. Clarendon Press, Oxford. 35 X. MENTAL Al^D MORAL PHILOSOPHY. Bacon. Novum Organum. Edited, with Introduction, Notes, &c., by T. Fowler, M.A., Professor of Logic in the University of Oxford. 1S78. Svo. doth, 14s. Locke's Conduct of the Understanding. Edited, with In- troduction, Notes, etc., by T. Fowler, M.A., Professor of Logic in the University of Oxford. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. Selections from Berkeley, with an Introduction and Notes. For the use of Students in the Universities. By Alexander Campbell Eraser, LL.D. Second Edition. Crown Svo. cloth, "js. 6d. {See aho p. iS.) The Elements of Dedvictive Logic, designed mainly for the use of Junior Students in the Universities. By T. Fowler, M.A., Professor of Logic in the University of Oxford. Seventh Edition, with a Collection of Examples. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 35.60?. The Elements of Inductive Logic, designed mainly for the use of Students in the Universities. By the same Author. Third Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 65. A Manxial of Political Economy, for the use of Schools. By J. E. Thorold Rogers, M.A., formerly Professor of Political Economy, Oxford. Third Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6c?. XI. ART, &c. A Handbook of Pictorial Art. By R. St. J. Tyrwhitt, M.A., formerly Student and Tutor of Christ Church, Oxford. With coloured Illustrations, Photographs, and a chapter on Perspective by A. Mac- donald. Second Edition. 1S75. Svo. half morocco, i8s. A Music Primer for Schools. By J. Troutbeck, M.A., Music Master in Westminster School, and R. F. Dale, M.A., B. Mus., Assistant Master in Westminster School. Crown Svo. cloth, is. 6d. A Treatise on Harmony. By Sir F. A. Gore Ouseley, Bart., Professor of Music in the University of Oxford. Second Edition. 410. cloth, los. A Treatise on Counterpoint, Canon, and Fugue, based upon that of Cherubini. By the same Author. Second Edition, ^io. cloth, 16s. A Treatise on Musical Form and General Composition. By the same Author. 4to. cloth, los. The Cultivation of the Speaking Voice. By John Hullah. Second Edition, Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 2s. 6d. 36 Clare7idon Press, Oxfoj'd. XII. MISCELLANEOUS. The Constrvietion of Healthy Dwellings; namely Houses, Hospitals, Barracks, Asylums, etc. By Douglas Galton, late Royal Engineers, C.B., F.R.S., etc. Demy 8vo. cloth, los. 6d. River and Canal Engineering. By Leveson Francis Vernon Harcourt, M.A., C.E. Preparing. A System of Physical Education : Theoretical and Practical. By Archibald Maclaren. Extra fcap. 8vo. clo/h, 'js. 6d. Specimens of Lowland Scotch and Northern English. By Dr. J. A. H. Murray. Preparing. English Plant Names from the Tenth to the Fifteenth Century. By J. Earle, M.A. Small fcap. 8vo. cloth, 5s. An Icelandic Prose Reader, with Notes, Grammar, and Glos- sary by Dr. Gudbrand Vigfusson and F. York Powell, M.A. 1879. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, I OS. 6d. Dante. Selections from the Inferno. With Introduction and Notes. By H. B. Cotterill, B. A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. Tasso. La Gerusalemme Liberata. Cantos i, ii. With Intro- duction and Notes. By the same Editor. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 2s. 6d. The Modern Greek Language in its relation to Ancient Greek. By E. M. Geldart, B.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 4s. 6d. The Book of Tobit. A Chaldee Text, from a unique MS. in the Bodleian Library ; with other Rabbinical Texts, English Trans- lations, and the Itala. Edited by Ad. Neubauer, M.A. 1878. Crown 8vo. cloth, 6s. A Commentary on the Book of Proverbs. Attributed to Abraham Ibn Ezra. Edited from a Manuscript in the Bodleian Library by S. R. Driver, M.A. Crown Svo. paper cover, 3s. 6d. Outlines of Textual Criticism applied to the New Testament. By C. E. Hanmiond, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of Exeter College, Oxford. Third Edition. Extra fcap. 8vo. cloth, 3s. 6d. A Handbook of Phonetics, including a Popular Exposition of the Principles of Spelling Reform. By Henry Sweet, M.A. Extra fcap. Svo. cloth, 4s. 6d, LONDON: HENRY FROWDE, Oxford University Press Warehouse, 7 Paternoster Row, OXFORD: CLARENDON PRESS DEPOSITORY, 116 High Street. The Delegates of the Press invite suggestions and advice from all persons interested in education ; and will be thankful for hints, ^c. addressed to the SECRETARY TO THE Delegates, Clarendon Press, Oxford. \> Princeton Theological Seminary Libraries 1 1012 01247 1175 Date Due iye '40 pttUMM^ ■-*•«■-/.«* #i L*> JAU.tft'ii >i- iiinifjiiiin " ^ \ 4 1935